Garmin | G1000H NXI: Bell 407GX | Garmin G1000H NXI: Bell 407GX Pilot's Guide, G1000H NXi Bell 407GXi

Garmin G1000H NXI: Bell 407GX Pilot's Guide, G1000H NXi Bell 407GXi
Copyright © 2018 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1237.21 or later for the G1000H NXi
Bell 407GXi. Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this
manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support at www.flygarmin.com.
For warranty information refer to www.flygarmin.com.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express
written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this
manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be
viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must
contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized
commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G1000H® NXi, WATCH®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin
International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin ESP™, Garmin SVT™, SurfaceWatch™, and Connext™
are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used
without the express permission of Garmin.
Skywatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications. AC-U-KWIK® is a
registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc. NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen,
Inc. Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite
Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned
by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”)
expressly disclaim all warranties, with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or
implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including
negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any incidental, special or consequential damages that result from
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if AOPA or an AOPA authorized
representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and,
to the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action,
claims or losses related to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do
not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential
damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly
disclaim all warranties with respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or
implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant
or make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue
AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless
AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related to any actual or alleged
inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some
jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for
maintaining separation from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data
from third party sources and cannot independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of
displayed aeronautical information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the
latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude
requirements. The primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air
traffic control altitude regulations, requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of
navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data
sources and should be considered only an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all
of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception,
and/or inaccurate information from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is
not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around
areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within data link weather products may
not accurately depict current weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of
the weather information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays
inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission, the weather
information shown by the data link weather product may be older than the indicated
weather product age.
WARNING: Do not rely on the displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) as the sole source of
obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts for
appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Do not operate this equipment without first obtaining qualified instruction.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84
WPT’ by a system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown
map reference datum that may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS
(known as WGS84) and may be positioned in error as displayed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
i
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an
approach with vertical guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even
if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories
and does not under any circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see
and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and heading indications in the following
geographic areas (due to variations in the earth’s magnetic field): North of 72° North latitude
at all longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude
between longitude 75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude
between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude
between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South latitude between
longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole
basis for hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the
system to display inaccurate or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the
lightning detection system manufacturer for detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and
traffic avoidance. Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may
not provide either the accuracy or reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan
maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining
the proximity of the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path
angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not
operate properly with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height
above mean sea level, or the standard pressure setting, as applicable.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing
ammonia. They will harm the anti-reflective coating.
ii
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
CAUTION: Do not allow repairs to be made by anyone other than an authorized Garmin
service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and affect
the airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display
or may appear as a partial symbol.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
information. Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service
Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the
system panel and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system
and aviation databases. Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual
equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely
responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which
could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system
utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all
NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or misinterpreted and,
therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an
intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving
the aircraft more than 100 yards away from the source of the interference should alleviate
the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being
provided in accordance with California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would
like additional information, please refer to our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
iii
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or
electromagnetic fields can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare
annunciations during start up, shut down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed
values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no comparison is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that
procedure in the Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed
among similar types of procedures due to differences in the Navigation Database coding
specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent
avionics of the following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory
guidance and information related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or
Jeppesen. Databases obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of
Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured compliance with all data quality
requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for
compliance with established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute
authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures that may be presented by the system. It
is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established AFM(S) and regulatory
guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list
as discussed in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database
exclusion list can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and
consider their impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed
at www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product
Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database
information. These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure;
incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes; or any other displayed item used for
navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to FlyGarmin.com and select
‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
iv
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Electronic aeronautical charts displayed on this system have been shown to meet the
guidance in AC 120 76D as a Type B Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) for FlightCharts and
ChartView. The accuracy of the charts is subject to the chart data provider. Own-ship position
on airport surface charts cannot be guaranteed to meet the accuracy specified in AC
120-76D. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary source of aeronautical
charts, such as traditional paper charts or an additional electronic display, necessary on the
aircraft and available to the pilot. If the secondary source of aeronautical charts is a Portable
Electronic Device (PED), its use must be consistent with the guidance in AC 120-76D.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of
89º South latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the
system’s ability to process the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to
nearby thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode.
However, clusters of two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate
thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Operate G1000NXi system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days
of continuous operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
NOTE: The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special
Procedures. Prior to flying these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA authorization,
training, and possession of the corresponding current, and legitimately-sourced chart
(approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special Procedure in the navigation database DOES
NOT imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
v
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
BLANK PAGE
vi
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN
(“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the
software embedded in the Garmin Product (the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal
operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the
Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that the Software is
the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of
America copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You further acknowledge that the
structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its thirdparty providers and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade secret of Garmin
and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse
assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software or any part thereof or
create any derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to
any country in violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
vii
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BLANK PAGE
viii
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Record of Revisions
Part Number
Revision
Date
Page
Range
Description
190–02339-00
A
01/18/18
All
Production Release with GDU Software
20.80
B
03/19/18
All
Rev. B includes:
•
Update Database Loading procedures
•
Update CAS messages
•
Correct Abnormal Operations section
Clerical Updates
Update to include description of Circle of
Uncertainty on IFR/VFR Maps
•
C
190–02339–00 Rev. C
03/27/18
All
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
ix
RECORD OF REVISIONS
BLANK PAGE
x
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 System Description............................
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).....................
1.2 System Controls.................................
PFD/MFD Controls ...................................
Secure Digital Cards..................................
1.3 System Operation..............................
1
1
4
4
6
7
System Power-up......................................
7
Normal Operation.....................................
8
Reversionary Mode...................................
8
System Annunciations...............................
9
System Status........................................... 11
ADAHRS Operation................................... 11
GPS Receiver Operation............................ 13
1.4 Accessing System Functionality........ 19
Softkey Function.......................................
Menus......................................................
MFD Page Groups.....................................
System Settings........................................
Split Screen Functionality..........................
System Utilities.........................................
19
28
29
32
35
44
1.5 Display Backlighting.......................... 49
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Overview............................................ 51
2.2 Flight Instruments.............................. 55
Attitude Indicator.....................................
Airspeed Indicator.....................................
Altimeter..................................................
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI).....................
Vertical Deviation......................................
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications.........
Radar Altimeter........................................
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............
Heading Preset Mode...............................
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)...............
Turn Rate Indicator...................................
GPS CDI Scaling........................................
OBS Mode................................................
Bearing Pointers and Information
Windows..................................................
DME Information Window........................
55
56
57
59
60
61
63
64
68
69
72
72
75
76
78
2.3 Supplemental Flight Data.................. 79
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Generic Timer...........................................
Temperature Displays................................
Wind Data................................................
79
79
80
2.4 PFD Annunciations and Alerting
Functions............................................ 82
Altitude Alerting.......................................
Low Altitude Annunciation.......................
Marker Beacon Annunciations..................
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision
Height Alerting.........................................
82
82
82
83
2.5 SVT Operation.................................... 85
SVT Operation.......................................... 86
SVT Features............................................. 88
Field of View............................................. 98
2.6 Abnormal Operations........................100
Abnormal GPS Conditions........................
SVT Troubleshooting.................................
Unusual Attitudes.....................................
SVT Unusual Attitudes..............................
100
101
101
101
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 Introduction........................................103
3.2 Engine Indication System (EIS)
Display................................................105
3.3 Engine Power and Speed
Indications..........................................107
Power Situation Indicator.......................... 107
Dual Tachometer....................................... 108
Alternate Engine Data Source
Annunciations.......................................... 108
3.4 Engine Page........................................110
Aircraft Total Air Time Display................... 111
Power Assurance Check............................ 111
Hover Performance................................... 112
3.5 Reversionary Mode............................118
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Overview............................................119
Overview.................................................. 119
4.2 COM Operation..................................124
COM Tuning Boxes...................................
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning...............
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency..............
Auto-tuning from the MFD.......................
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
124
125
125
126
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Frequency Spacing.................................... 128
4.3 NAV Operation...................................130
NAV Tuning Boxes.....................................
NAV Radio Selection and Activation..........
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning....................
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the
MFD.........................................................
Auto-Tuning NAV Frequencies on
Approach Activation.................................
Marker Beacon Receiver (Optional)...........
DME Tuning..............................................
130
131
131
132
134
135
135
4.4 Transponder........................................137
Transponder Controls................................
Transponder Mode Selection.....................
Entering a Transponder Code....................
ADS-B TX..................................................
Ident Function..........................................
137
138
140
141
142
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions....143
Power-Up.................................................
Mono/Stereo Headsets..............................
Passenger Address (PA) Mode...................
Intercom...................................................
Clearance Recorder and Player (Optional)..
Split COM.................................................
3D Audio..................................................
Voice Recognition.....................................
Entertainment Inputs................................
Bluetooth®...............................................
143
143
143
143
147
147
148
150
154
155
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......157
4.7 Abnormal Operation..........................158
Stuck Microphone.................................... 158
COM Tuning Failure.................................. 158
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation................ 158
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.1 Introduction........................................159
Map Symbols............................................ 173
Airways.................................................... 177
Additional Navigation Map Items.............. 179
5.3 Waypoints...........................................183
Airports....................................................
Intersections.............................................
NDB..........................................................
VOR..........................................................
VRP..........................................................
User Waypoints.........................................
184
191
192
194
197
198
5.4 Airspaces.............................................205
5.5 Direct-To Navigation..........................210
5.6 Flight Planning...................................215
Flight Plan Creation..................................
Flight Plan Import/Export...........................
Mobile Device/Flight Stream 510 Flight
Plan Transfer.............................................
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan................
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan.
Active Flight Plan......................................
Along Track Offsets...................................
Parallel Track.............................................
Flight Plan Views.......................................
Closest Point of FPL..................................
User-Defined Holding Patterns..................
216
219
221
229
231
241
244
245
248
251
251
5.7 Vertical Navigation............................257
Altitude Constraints.................................. 259
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)................. 262
5.8 Procedures..........................................267
Departures................................................ 269
Arrivals .................................................... 271
Approaches.............................................. 273
5.9 Weight Planning.................................282
Weight Warning Conditions...................... 285
5.10 Trip Planning.......................................290
Navigation Status Box and Data Bar.......... 161
Trip Planning............................................. 290
5.2 Using Map Displays............................163
5.11 Abnormal Operation..........................294
Map Orientation.......................................
Map Range...............................................
Map Panning............................................
Measuring Bearing and Distance...............
Topography..............................................
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
xii
163
165
167
169
170
6.1 Overview............................................297
6.2 Data Link Weather.............................298
Activating Data Link Weather Services....... 299
Weather Product Age............................... 302
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Displaying Data Link Weather Products.....
Weather Data Link (XM) Page Softkeys.....
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Softkeys..
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS......................
Weather Product Overview.......................
FIS-B Weather Status................................
306
307
310
317
321
360
6.3 Stormscope Lightning Detection
System................................................364
Using The Stormscope Page...................... 364
6.4 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
Terrain.................................................369
VSD Display.............................................. 369
Track Mode Boundary............................... 371
6.5 HTAWS................................................373
HTAWS.....................................................
Displaying HTAWS Information.................
HTAWS Page.............................................
HTAWS Alerts...........................................
Wireaware Power Line Alerting.................
HTAWS System Status...............................
373
374
377
378
384
385
6.6 Traffic Information Service (TIS)........387
Traffic Information Service (TIS).................
Displaying Traffic Data..............................
Traffic Map Page.......................................
TIS Alerts..................................................
System Status...........................................
387
388
389
390
392
6.7 TAS Traffic...........................................395
GTS 800 Traffic.........................................
Theory of Operation.................................
TAS Surveillance Volume and Symbology..
TA Alerting Conditions..............................
TAS Alerts.................................................
System Test...............................................
Operation.................................................
Traffic Map Page.......................................
Altitude Display Mode..............................
Additional Traffic Displays.........................
System Status...........................................
395
395
396
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
406
6.8 ADS-B Traffic.......................................408
ADS-B System Overview............................ 408
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceRebroadcast (ADS-R)................................. 409
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TISB).............................................................
ADS-B with TAS........................................
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting.
Airborne And Surface Applications...........
Traffic Description.....................................
Operation.................................................
ADS-B System Status................................
409
410
410
413
414
414
420
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL
SYSTEM
7.1 Overview............................................425
7.2 Flight Director Operation..................426
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 Overview............................................427
8.2 SafeTaxi...............................................428
8.3 Charts..................................................430
Charts......................................................
ChartView................................................
Chart Options...........................................
FliteCharts................................................
Airport Directory.......................................
IFR/VFR Charts..........................................
430
430
435
438
439
440
8.4 Database Cycle Number and
Revisions.............................................443
8.5 SiriusXM Radio Entertainment..........445
Using SiriusXM Radio................................
Active Channel and Channel List...............
Category..................................................
Presets......................................................
Volume.....................................................
446
446
447
447
448
8.6 Satellite Telephone and SMS
Messaging..........................................449
Registering with Garmin Connext.............
Telephone Communication.......................
Incoming Calls..........................................
Outgoing Calls..........................................
Placing The Cockpit Phone on Hold..........
Text Messaging (SMS)...............................
Viewing a Text Message When Received...
Reply to a Text Message............................
Sending a Text Message............................
Predefined Text Messages.........................
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
449
449
450
451
453
454
455
456
456
457
xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Text Message Boxes.................................. 459
Managing Text Messages.......................... 461
8.7 Flight Data Logging...........................464
8.8 Maintenance Logs..............................467
8.9 Connext Setup....................................468
8.10 Auxiliary Video...................................470
Video Softkeys..........................................
Video Setup..............................................
Display Selection.......................................
Input Selection..........................................
Zoom/Range.............................................
470
471
471
471
471
8.11 WiFi Connections................................473
8.12 Position Reporting.............................476
8.13 Abnormal Operation..........................479
Unusual Attitudes..................................... 479
GDL 69AH SXM Datalink Receiver
Troubleshooting........................................ 479
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts........................ 481
CAS Message Prioritization.......................
Voice Alerts..............................................
System Message Annunciations................
System Messages......................................
482
485
486
486
Database Management............................ 501
Loading Updated Databases..................... 501
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update 512
Aviation Terms and Acronyms................. 513
Frequently Asked Questions....................533
Map Symbols............................................ 537
INDEX
Index......................................................... I-1
xiv
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G1000H NXi Integrated Avionics System as installed in the
Bell 407GXi. The system presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and
identification information to the pilot through large-format displays.
LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
The system consists of the following LRUs:
•
GDU 1050H (2) – The GDUs are configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a Multi Function
Display (MFD). Both feature 10.4-inch backlit LED screens with 1024 x 768 high resolution. The
displays communicate with each other through a High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an Integrate Avionics Unit (IAU, i.e.
Garmin Integrated Avionics (GIA)).
•
GIA 64H (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking LRUs to the PFD and MFD. Each
GIA contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system
integration microprocessors. Each GIA is paired with their onside GDU via an HSDB connection.
The GIAs are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
•
GSU 75H (1) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the GTP 59 OAT probe to
provide pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the system. This unit also
provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to the PFD, MFD, and GIAs. The
GSU 75H contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with
the GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field information, and with the GIA to obtain GPS information.
ADAHRS modes of operation, including Heading Preset Mode (HPM), are discussed later in this
document.
•
GEA 71BH (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit
communicates with both GIAs using an RS-485 digital interface.
•
GMU 44 (1) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GSU unit for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. The GMU 44 receives power directly from the GSU unit and
communicates with the GSU using an RS-485 digital interface.
•
GMA 350Hc (1) – Integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon controls.
This unit communicates with both GIAs, using an RS-232 digital interface, and also provides
Bluetooth® wireless connectivity between compatible tablet/mobile devices and the intercom.
•
GTX 335R (1)(Standard)/GTX345R (Alternate) – The GTX 335R solid-state transponder provides
Modes A, C, S and ADS-B Out capability. As an alternative transponder, the GTX 345R provides the
same capabilities, plus an ADS-B In capability. The transponder can be controlled from the PFD, and
it communicates with the both GIAs through an RS-232 digital interface.
•
GRA 55 (1)(Optional) – The Radar Altimeter provides altitude above the ground information and
rate of change of radar altitude information.
•
GDL 59H (1)(Optional) – Provides wireless connectivity for the transmission of flight parameter
data for trend monitoring and maintenance planning. It is connected to the MFD through the HSDB,
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
and it also has connectivity with the GSR 56 through a RS-232 bus. GDL 59 can also send its data
while in flight or out of range of a Wi-Fi connection via the optional GSR 56H.
•
GDL 69AH SXM (1)(Optional) – A satellite radio receiver that provides data link weather
information to both GDUs via an HSDB connection. Subscriptions to the SiriusXM Weather or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are required to enable the GDL 69AH SXM capability.
•
Flight Stream 510 (1)(Optional) – Provides wireless Bluetooth® connectivity between a compatible
tablet/mobile device and the avionics system.
•
GSR 56H (1)(Optional) – The Iridium Transceiver operation for voice communication is by means
of pilot and copilot headsets in the cockpit. The transceiver can also send and receive data provided
by the GDL 59H through the RS-232 bus.
•
GTP 59 (1) – Provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the GSU
•
GTS 800 (1)(Optional) – The GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) uses active interrogations of
Mode S and Mode C transponders to provide traffic information to the pilot independent of the air
traffic control system.
The following figure shows interactions between the LRUs and optional equipment. The system is
capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
•
GDL 59H Data Link Receiver
•
GDL69AH SXM Data Link Receiver
•
Flight Stream 510 Wireless Bluetooth® Gateway
•
GRA 55 Radar Altimeter
•
GSR 56H Satellite Radio
•
GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System
•
GTX 345R Transponder ADS-B In/Out
•
KN 63 DME manufactured by Honeywell
•
KR 87 ADF manufactured by Honeywell
•
WX-500 Stormscope Lightning Sensor manufactured by L-3
•
Bell Autopilot
•
HeliSAS Autopilot
NOTE: For information on the additional equipment shown in the following figure, consult
the applicable optional interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is
already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface
user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of
this additional equipment.
2
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
#1
GDU 1050H
(MFD)
GDL 69AH SXM
(Datalink Receiver)
#2
GDU 1050H
(PFD)
GDL 59H
(Data Link)
Flight
Stream
510
(Bluetooth
DataLink)
GTS 800
(Traffic Advisory)
GTP 59
(OAT)
GSU 75H
(ADAHRS)
#1 GIA 64H
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
Bell
or
#2 GIA 64H
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
HeliSAS
(Autopilot)
VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
G/S
Flight
Director
GTX 335R
or
GTX 345R
(Transponder)
GEA 71BH
(Engine &
Airframe I/F)
GMA 350Hc
(Audio Panel)
VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
G/S
Flight
Director
GSR 56H
(Satellite Radio)
KR 87 (ADF)
WX-500 Stormscope
(Lightning Sensor)
KN 63 (DME)
GRA 55
(Radar Altimeter)
Garmin Equipment
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
FigureFigure
1-1 System
Configuration)
1-1 System(LRU
(LRU Configuration)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
3
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 350Hc) is described in the CNS & Audio Panel Section.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the
PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
17
10
13
11
14
12
15
16
Figure
1-2PFD/MFD
PFD/MFD Controls
Figure
1-2
Controls
4
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as
a percentage). Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF.
2
NAV Frequency Transfer Key Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
3*
NAV Knob Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for
kHz) Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2.
4
Heading Knob Turn to manually select a heading. Press to display a digital heading
momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the Selected Heading to the current
heading.
5
Range Knob/Joystick Turn to change map range. Press to activate Map Pointer for map
panning.
6*
CRS/BARO Knob Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting Turn the small
knob to set the pilot-selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode is
selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The pilot-selected
course provides course reference to the pilot-side flight director when operating in Navigation
and Approach modes. Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO
bearing of active waypoint/station.
7*
COM Knob Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz). Press to switch the tuning box (cyan box) between COM1 and COM2.
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the MIC Key (Audio Panel).
8
COM Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies.
Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into
the active frequency field.
9
COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the
COM Frequency Box). Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF.
10
Direct-to Key Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination
waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
11
FPL Key Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan
12
CLR Key Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus. Press and hold to display the
MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
13
MENU Key Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or
making setting changes
14
PROC Key Gives access to IFR Departure Procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and
Instrument Approach Procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
15
ENT Key Validates/confirms a menu selection or data entry
16*
FMS Knob Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location).
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group).
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
17*
ALT Knob Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds). In addition to providing the standard system
altitude alerter function, selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude
Capture/Hold mode of the AFCS.
* Knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner) and large (outer) control portions.
When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right
portion of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used
for aviation database and system software updates as well as terrain database storage and OEM
maintenance diagnostics. Flight plans may also be imported or exported from an SD card in the MFD.
Not all SD cards are compatible with the system. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft
manufacturer.
SD Card Slots
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
Inserting and Removing an SD card
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch
engages. The front of the card should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
6
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
This section discusses powering up the system, normal and reversionary display operation,
annunciations, system status, air data and attitude heading reference system (ADAHRS) modes of
operation, and GPS receiver operation.
SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Appendices
annunciations and alerts.
for
additional
information
regarding
system-specific
NOTE: See the flight manual for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
The system is integrated with and receives power directly from the aircraft electrical system. The
PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features
that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, and external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
When powering up the system, test annunciations are displayed and key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels. On the PFD, the AHRS
begins to initialize and an alignment message is displayed. All system annunciations should disappear
typically within one minute of power-up.
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
•
System version
•
Checklist File
•
Land database name and version
•
Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
•
Terrain database name and version
•
Obstacle database name and effective dates
•
Navigation database name and effective dates
•
Airport Directory name and effective dates
•
FliteCharts/ChartView database information
•
IFR/VFR charts database information (optional)
•
Crew Profile
•
Copyright
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type.
When this information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the
pilot is prompted to continue.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading,
airspeed, altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight
Instruments Section for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with
navigation information (see the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is
dedicated to the Engine Indication System (see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM
and NAV frequency selection.
Figure 1-4 System Normal Operation
Figure 1-4 Normal Operation
REVERSIONARY MODE
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the
Appendices for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
NOTE: In reversionary mode, backlighting can be adjusted from the remaining display.
In the event of a display failure, the system can be manually switched to reversionary (backup) mode
(all remaining displays enter reversionary mode). In reversionary mode, all important flight information
is presented on the remaining display(s) in the same format as in normal operating mode.
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to the figure below), and the NAV and COM functions
provided to the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system
reverts to backup paths for the ADAHRS, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The
change to backup paths is completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
Reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the DU Backup push button switch on the
instrument panel. Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
8
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed PFD)
Figure
1-51-5
Reversionary
Mode (Failed
PFD)
Figure
Reversionary
Mode
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window
continues to remain flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair
facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red “X” is typically displayed on windows associated
with the failed data (refer to the following table for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer
to the flight manual for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
NOTE: Refer to the flight manual for additional information regarding pilot responses to
these annunciations.
System Annunciation
Comment
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
Note, display reads “AHRS” for an ADAHRS system.
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the
ADAHRS.
ADAHRS calibration incomplete or configuration module failure.
Note, display reads “AHRS” for an ADAHRS system.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
9
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
Comment
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation
use. Note that ADAHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal
operation. ADAHRS operation may be degraded if GPS signals are
not present (see flight manual).
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from the ADAHRS.
Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the
ADAHRS.
Display system is not receiving valid heading input from the
ADAHRS or magnetometer.
Display system is not receiving altitude input from the ADAHRS.
Display system is not receiving valid OAT information from the
ADAHRS.
Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.
Other Various Red X Indications A red ‘X’ through any other display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields) indicates that the field is not receiving
valid data.
Table 1-1 System Annunciations
Viewing LRU Information
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
10
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system
LRUs. Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by
green check marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a
service center or Garmin dealer informed.
Figure 1-6 Example System Status Page
Figure 1-6 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU
Information or Airframe Window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information
within the selected window.
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label annunciator turns green indicting the softkey is selected)
places the cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information
for the MFD. Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database
information is now displayed in the database window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the
softkey label back to MFD1 DB. MFD database information is displayed again in the database window.
The ANN Test Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
ADAHRS OPERATION
In addition to using internal sensors, the GSU 75H ADAHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field
data and air data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the ADAHRS relies upon
GPS and magnetic field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or
invalid, the ADAHRS uses air data information for attitude determination. Eight ADAHRS modes of
operation are available (see the following table) and depend upon the combination of available sensor
inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated to the pilot by system
messages. For information on Heading Preset Mode (HPM), refer to the Flight Instruments section.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific ADAHRS system message information.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
11
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while the ADAHRS is not operating normally can degrade
ADAHRS accuracy.
ADAHRS
Mode
GPS Data
Available
Magnetometer
Data Available
Air Data
Available
ADAHRS
Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
ADAHRS no-Air
Data
Yes
Yes
No
ADAHRS noGPS
No
Yes
Yes
ADAHRS noGPS/no-Mag
No
No
Yes
ADAHRS noMag Data
Yes
No
Yes
ADAHRS noMag/no-Air
Data
Yes
No
No
ADAHRS coaston-gyros until
invalid
No
Yes
No
ADAHRS noMag/coast-ongyros until
invalid
No
Condition
Attitude
Indicator
Valid Pitch/Roll/
Heading.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading will
coast-on-gyros
until it becomes
invalid.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Invalid Heading.
Invalid Pitch/Roll/
Heading.
No
No
Table 1-2 ADAHRS Operation
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of ADAHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS
data and at true air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed.
Under these rare conditions, it is possible for in-flight ADAHRS initialization to take an
indefinite amount of time which would result in an extended period of time where valid
ADAHRS outputs are unavailable.
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the
information provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the ADAHRS seamlessly transitions
to using the other GPS receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS
path. If both GPS inputs fail, the ADAHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so
long as the air data and magnetometer inputs are available and valid.
12
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
A failure of the air data input has no effect on ADAHRS output while operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the ADAHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in
invalid attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the ADAHRS transitions to one of the reversionary NoMagnetometer modes and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is
airborne, the heading output on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”). For
information on Heading Preset Mode (HPM), refer to the Flight Instruments section.
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Each GIA Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the
specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the Aux - GPS
Status Page.
GPS1 provides information to the MFD and GPS2 provides data to the PFD. Internal system
checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the GDUs. In some
circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing
a better GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better
solution will be automatically coupled to both GDUs. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” will
then be displayed in the Reversionary Sensor Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver
is being used. Both GPS receivers are still functioning properly, but one receiver is performing better
than the other at that particular time.
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver
has acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal.
While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS
receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result
in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on
the PFD. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for
GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.4 for
information on navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
13
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT
Key.
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
EGNOS, MSAS
and WAAS
Selected
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
GPS Selection RAIM Softkey
Softkeys
Selected
SBAS Softkey Selected
Figure 1-7 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
SATELLITE CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
The GPS Status Page displays satellites currently in view at their respective positions on a sky view
diagram. The sky view is always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the
horizon, the inner circle representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the
position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e.,
satellite identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by
solid ovals.
SATELLITE STATUS
This box provides information regarding signal status. The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is
calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal
and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an
14
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a
statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are
relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy.
HFOM and VFOM, measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95%
confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are
displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
GPS STATUS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the
active GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the
receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses
satellite orbital data (collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine
the satellites that should be in view. “Acquiring” is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number
of satellites have been acquired for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is
indicated as the solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based
Augmentation System) indicates “Inactive”. When acquisition is complete, the solution status
indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS indicates “Active”.
RAIM PREDICTION
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected
approach may be outside the SBAS coverage area, and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM
prediction for the intended approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a
consistency check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows
the receiver to calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for
oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During
oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and
time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and
time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. The system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not
available. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does
not become active, as indicated by the messages, “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available
from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure
must be flown.
NOTE: The system RAIM prediction capability does not meet all RAIM prediction
requirements. Reference the RAIM/Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) Prediction Tool at
flygarmin.com as required.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
15
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and
press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints
(the FPL list is populated only when navigating a flight plan).
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or
User waypoints, if required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system
automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the
selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM
availability is computed, one of the following is displayed:
•
‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date
combination
•
‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
•
‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and
date
•
‘RAIM Not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint,
time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
16
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM
availability is computed, one of the following is displayed:
•
‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date
combination
•
‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
•
‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and
date
•
‘RAIM Not Available’ is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and
date
SBAS SELECTION
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage
area, it may be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended).
When disabled, the SBAS Field in the GPS Status Box indicates Disabled. There may be a small delay
for the GPS Status Box to be updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or
‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
GPS SATELLITE SIGNAL STRENGTHS
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor
satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength
bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or
120-138 for WAAS) below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as
indicated by signal bar appearance:
•
No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
•
Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
•
Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
•
Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
17
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
•
Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
•
“D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is
hollow) before the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
18
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the
softkey level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to select the
appropriate softkey. There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an
annunciator on the softkey label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects
among several options, indicated by the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range
keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option. The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another
set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also, these softkeys revert to the previous level after
45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
Softkey Names (displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
Figure 1-8 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions,
including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back
Softkey which can be pressed to return to the previous level. If new messages remain after
acknowledgement, the Messages Softkey will show “Message” in black text with a white
background. The Messages Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the
transponder (XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
The following table describes PFD Softkey functions. Softkeys which display another set of
softkeys are indicated in the table by showing the given set as an increased level. For example, the
Map/HSI Softkey is shown in the Level 1 column. When pressed, the Map/HSI softkey will display
another set of softkeys and these softkeys are explained in the Level 2 column. If a softkey on Level 2
provides yet another set of softkey functions, those new available softkeys are then explained in the
Level 3 column, etc.
Level 1
Level 2
CAS
Level 4
Description
Displays the scroll keys. Only
displayed when the number
of CAS messages exceeds
the capacity of the display
window.
CAS Up
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Level 3
Scroll up CAS messages
(Accessible only when the
CAS Softkey is displayed).
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
19
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
CAS Dn
Level 4
Description
Scroll down CAS messages
(Accessible only when the
CAS Softkey is displayed).
Map/HSI
Displays the PFD Map display
settings softkeys.
Layout
Displays the PFD Map
selection softkeys.
Map Off
Inset Map
Detail
Removes the PFD map from
display (Inset or Traffic).
Displays the Inset Map.
HSI Map
Displays the HSI Map.
Inset Trfc
Replaces the Inset Map with
a dedicated traffic display.
HSI Trfc
Replaces the HSI Map with a
dedicated traffic display.
Selects desired amount of
map detail:
•
All (No Declutter): All map
features visible
•
Detail
1:
Removes
everything except for the
active flight plan
•
Detail 2: Declutters land
and SUA data
Detail 3: Declutters land
data
Displays traffic information
on PFD Map.
•
Traffic
TER
20
•
Topo:
Displays
topographical data (e.g.,
coastlines, terrain, rivers,
lakes) and elevation scale
on PFD Map.
•
REL: Displays relative
terrain information on the
PFD Map.
•
Off: Removes terrain
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
WX LGND
Level 4
Description
Displays/removes the name
of the selected data link
weather provider (SiriusXM)
and the weather product
icon and age box (for
enabled weather products).
NEXRAD
Displays XM NEXRAD
weather and coverage on
PFD Map (subscription
optional).
METAR
Displays METAR information
on PFD Map (subscription
optional).
Lightning
Adds/removes the display of
SiriusXM lightning
information on PFD Map
(optional).
LTNG Off
Disables lightning function
on PFD Map. The softkey
annunciator is green when
the lightning function is off.
Datalink
Selects the data link weather
source for the PFD Map.
STRMSCP
Adds or removes the display
of Stormscope information
on the PFD Map. The softkey
annunciator is green when
the function is on. When the
function is off, the
annunciator is gray.
TFC Map
Replaces the PFD Map with a
dedicated traffic display. The
default display is the Inset
Map.
PFD Opt
Displays second-level
softkeys for additional PFD
options.
SVT
Displays additional SVT
overlay softkeys. (optional)
Pathways
Terrain
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Displays Pathway Boxes on
the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain
depiction.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
21
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
HDG LBL
Displays compass heading
along the Zero-Pitch line.
APT Sign
Displays position markers for
airports within approximately
15 nm of the current aircraft
position. Airport identifiers
are displayed when the
airport is within
approximately 9 nm.
Wire
Displays power lines on the
Synthetic Vision Display.
Wind
Displays the wind option
softkeys.
Off
Wind information not
displayed.
Option 1
Wind direction arrow and
speed.
Option 2
Headwind/Tailwind and
crosswind components and
wind direction arrow
Option 3
Wind direction arrow with
direction and speed.
DME
Displays DME Information
(optional).
Bearing 1
Cycles the Bearing 1
Information Window
through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPSderived distance
information, ADF/frequency,
and Off.
Sensors
Displays the ADAHRS and
HDG Softkeys
HDG
Displays softkeys to operate
Preset Heading Mode
HDG SYNC
22
Description
Synchronizes heading to the
selected heading
HDG -
Slews heading
counterclockwise
HDG +
Slews heading clockwise
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Set HDG
Description
Enables heading preset
mode
Bearing 2
Cycles the Bearing 2
Information Window
through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPSderived distance
information, ADF/frequency,
and Off.
ALT Units
Displays softkeys to select
altitude unit parameters.
Meters
IN
HPA
STD Baro
When enabled, displays
overlays altimeter with
meters.
Press to display the BARO
setting as inches of mercury.
Press to display the BARO
setting as hectopascals.
Sets barometric pressure to
29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if
metric units are selected)
and returns to top-level
softkeys.
OBS
Selects OBS mode on the
CDI when navigating by GPS
(only available with active
leg). When OBS is on, the
softkey annunciator is green.
CDI
Cycles through GPS, NAV1,
and NAV2 navigation modes
on the CDI.
DME
Displays the DME Tuning
Window, allowing selection
and tuning of the DME
(optional).
XPDR
Displays the transponder
selection softkeys.
Standby
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Selects transponder Standby
Mode (transponder does not
reply to any interrogations).
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
23
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Description
On
Activates transponder
(transponder replies to
identification interrogations).
Alt
Altitude Reporting Mode
(transponder replies to
identification and altitude
interrogations).
VFR
Automatically enters the VFR
code (1200 in the U.S.A.
only).
Code
Ident
24
Level 4
Displays transponder code
selection softkeys 0-7.
0–7
Use numbers to enter code.
Ident
Activates the Special Position
Identification (SPI) pulse for
18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the
ATC screen.
BKSP
Removes numbers entered,
one at a time.
Activates the Special Position
Identification (SPI) pulse for
18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the
ATC screen.
Ident
Activates the Special Position
Identification (SPI) pulse for
18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the
ATC screen.
Tmr/Ref
Displays References
Window: Provides option to
select/set the generic timer
and also the barometric
altitude minimums (with
temperature compensation
as required) or radar
altimeter minimums.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Nearest
Description
Displays Nearest Airports
Window.
Message or
Alerts
Displays the Alerts Window
when pressed. System
generated messages cause
the Alerts Softkey label to
change from Alerts to a
flashing ‘Message’ label.
Pressing the Message
Softkey opens the Alerts
Window, acknowledges the
message, and the softkey
reverts to the ‘Alerts’ label.
Table 1-3 PFD Softkeys
MFD SOFTKEYS
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain,
traffic, and weather (optional). There are many softkey functions available on the MFD depending on
the page group and screen selected.
The following table provides an example of the MFD Softkey functions accessed from the
Navigation Map screen. Further information concerning softkeys providing more navigation and
flight planning functions may be found in the Flight Management Section. Terrain, traffic, and
weather softkey descriptions may be found in the Hazard Avoidance section. Further description of
optional equipment and corresponding softkey functions may be found in the Additional Features
Section.
Level 1
Level 2
Engine
Description
Displays EIS - Engine Page; press again
to exit page (see the EIS Section for
more information).
CAS Up
Scroll up CAS messages in the Alerts
Window.
CAS Dn
Scroll down CAS messages in the Alerts
Window
PWR CHK
Performs a Power Assurance Check
HOV PWR
Performs a Hover Performance Power
Check
OGE
Performs an OGE (Out of Ground Effect)
Hover Performance Power Check
IGE
Performs an IGE (In Ground Effect)
Hover Performance Power Check
HOV-P
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Level 3
Enables Hover Prediction Mode
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
25
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Map Opt
Description
Displays second level Map Options
softkeys
Traffic
Displays traffic information on
Navigation Map Page.
Inset
Displays inset window second level
softkeys.
Off
Removes VSD inset from Navigation
Map Page.
VSD
Displays VSD profile information of
terrain/obstacles along the current track,
vertical track vector, and selected
altitude.
•
Auto: Automatically displays either
VSD profile information for active
flight plan information or along
current track with no active flight plan.
•
FPL: Displays VSD profile information
for active flight plan.
TRK: Displays VSD profile information
along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles
through the following:
•
TER
•
Off: No terrain information shown on
MFD Map.
•
Topo: Displays topographical data
(e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes)
and elevation scale on MFD Map.
REL:
Displays
relative
terrain
information on the MFD Map.
Displays airways on the map; cycles
through the following:
•
AWY
•
Off: No airways are displayed.
•
On: All airways are displayed.
•
LO: Only low altitude airways are
displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are
displayed.
Displays Stormscope information on
Navigation Map Page (optional).
•
STRMSCP
26
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Description
NEXRAD
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and
coverage on Navigation Map Page
(optional).
XM LTNG
Displays XM lightning information on
Navigation Map Page (optional).
METAR
Displays METAR information on PFD
Map (subscription optional).
Legend
Displays legends for the displayed XM
Weather products (optional).
Detail
Selects desired amount of map detail;
cycles through the following levels:
•
Detail All: All map features visible.
•
Detail-3: Declutters land data.
•
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-1: Removes everything except
for the active flight plan.
When available, displays optional airport
and terminal procedure charts
(optional).
Displays chart display settings softkeys
(if available).
Show Map displays the applicable WPT
Page information upon the map for the
chart currently selected. Chart displays
the chart for the WPT Page that is
currently selected and returns to the
Charts Level 2 Softkeys.
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey
returns to the airport diagram when the
view is on a different chart.
Displays departure procedure chart.
Displays standard terminal arrival
procedure chart.
Displays approach procedure chart.
Displays weather information.
•
Charts
CHRT Opt
Show Map and
Chart
Info
DP
STAR
APR
WX
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
27
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
NOTAM
Checklist
Description
Displays NOTAM information for
selected airport, when available.
When available, displays optional
checklists.
Table 1-4 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
MENUS
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically
relate to the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus
provide access to additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus
display “No Options” when there are no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used
in association with all window/page group operations are described in Section 1.2. Softkey selection
does not display menus or submenus.
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on PFD
Options with
FPL Window
Displayed on MFD
Figure 1-9 Page Menu Examples
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to
the right of the window when the option list is longer than the window).
28
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing
the FMS Knob also removes the displayed menu.
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The Display Title is
comprised of the page group and active page title and is displayed in the upper center of the screen
below the Navigation Data Bar. In the bottom right corner of the screen, a page group window is
displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are displayed along the bottom of the
window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs.
Page Group
MFD
Active Page Title
Pages in
Current
Group
Page Groups
Figure 1-10 Page Title and Page Groups
Figure 1-10 Page Title and Page Groups
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary
depending on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large
FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
There are several pages which may be selected by pressing the appropriate softkey at the bottom of
the page (or from the page menu). In this case, the page title will change when a different page softkey
is pressed, but the page will remain the same, i.e. the Radio and Info softkeys show different page
titles (“Aux - XM Radio” and “Aux - XM Information” respective) within the same page, “XM Radio”.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
29
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
Map (Map Page Group)
WPT (Waypoint Page Group)
30
Pages within Page Group
•
Navigation Map
•
IFR/VFR Charts (optional)
•
Traffic Map
•
Weather Data Link (service optional)
•
HTAWS (service optional)
•
Airport Information
•
Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
•
Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
•
Departure Information (DP Softkey)
•
Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
•
Approach Information (APR Softkey)
•
Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
•
NOTAM Information (NOTAM Softkey)
•
Intersection Information
•
NDB Information
•
VOR Information
•
VRP Information
•
User WPT Information
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
Pages within Page Group
AUX (Auxiliary Page Group)
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group)
•
Weight and Balance
•
Trip Planning
•
Utility
•
GPS Status
•
System Setup 1/2
•
XM Radio (service optional)
•
XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
•
XM Information (Info Softkey)
•
Satellite Phone (optional)
•
Maintenance WiFi Setup
•
Maintenance Logs
•
System Status
•
OEM Diagnostics
•
Video
•
Exceedances
•
ADS-B Status
•
Databases
•
Active Flight Plan
•
Flight Plan Catalog
•
NRST (Nearest Page Group)
EIS (Engine Indication System)
Stored Flight Plan (New Softkey)
•
Nearest Airports
•
Nearest Intersection
•
Nearest NDB
•
Nearest VOR
•
Nearest VRP
•
Nearest User WPTS
•
Nearest Frequencies
•
Nearest Airspaces
•
Engine
Table 1-5 Page Group and Pages
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
31
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure
Loading Page is opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
•
Approach Loading
•
Arrival Loading
•
Departure Loading
SYSTEM SETTINGS
System settings and crew profiles are managed from the System Setup Pages. Fields shown in cyan
text may be edited. Managing crew profiles and editing the system time format, display units, arrival
alerts, and audio voice format settings are discussed in this section. For other system settings, see the
reference given to their respective sections.
32
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Configure System
Time
Fields shown in Cyan may
be edited
Change Display
Unit Settings
Configure settings
Configure Alert
Settings
Inlet Settings
- GPS CDI
- Channel Spacing
- Flight Director Format
- Nearest Airport
Restore System Defaults
Crew Profile
- Choose active profile
- Create new profile
- Edit, rename, and delete
existing profile (other than
default profile)
- Import / Export profile to
SD Card
Touchdown
Callout Settings
Skid Setting
Auto Taxi Chart Setting
Audio Voice
Setting
Select System Setup Page
Figure 1-11 System Setup 1/2 Pages
- Setup 1
- Setup 2
Figure 1-11 System Setup 1/2 Pages
If desired, the default system settings may be restored at any time.
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’,
and press the ENT Key. The message ‘Restore Setup (1 or 2) Page Defaults?’ is
displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
CREW PROFILES
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. When the system is powered on, the last
selected crew profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen. The system can store up to 25
profiles; the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
33
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
available are shown at the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled “Crew Profile”. From here,
crew profiles may be created, selected, renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from
the system to an SD card, or imported from an SD card into the system.
CREW PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others:
Message
Description
‘No crew profile files found.’
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or
more valid pilot profile filenames.
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
Displayed if the profile name matches the name
of existing profile.
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different profile
name.’
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
‘All available crew profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot
profiles has been reached.
‘Crew profile import failed.’
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any
other reason.
‘Crew profile import succeeded.’
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
‘Overwrite existing file?’
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an
existing file on the SD card.
‘Crew profile export failed.’
Displayed if the export operation fails.
‘Crew profile export succeeded.’
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
Table 1-6 Crew Profile Import/Export Messages
Creating a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ Window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT
Key. Crew profile names cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to
base the new profile. Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default
profile settings (initially based on Garmin factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or
other previously created profile settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile.
Or:
34
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate
the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Active’ profile Field in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired
profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected
profile.
SPLIT SCREEN FUNCTIONALITY
Chart pages may be viewed in split screen mode with the Navigation Map Page and the Active Flight
Plan Page. When the system is powered-up on the ground, following acknowledgement of the MFD
Power-up Screen, the Navigation Map Page and Active Flight Plan Page will be displayed in normal
page view. To activate the split screen functionality, press the Charts Softkey. Two display panes are
displayed on the MFD. If split screen is activated from the Navigation Map Page, the page title will
show ‘Map - Chart + Navigation Map’. If split screen is activated from the Active Flight Plan Page, the
page title will change to show ‘FPL - Chart + Active Flight Plan’.
See the Additional Features section for more information on Charts, and how to enable Charts Full
Screen.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
35
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD in Split Screen Mode
Page Title shows
Map Chart + Navigation Map
Cyan Pane Selector
shows Charts
is the active
display pane
Softkeys for the
active display pane
Figure
1-15Split
Split Screen
Mode
Figure
1-12
Screen
Mode
CONTROLLING DISPLAY PANES
In split screen mode, the active display pane is outlined by a cyan box called the pane selector.
Softkeys and menu options will automatically change depending on which display pane is active.
Display panes may be displayed vertically in Narrow View, or horizontally in Wide View. In Narrow
View, move the Joystick left or right to move the pane selector. In Wide View, move the Joystick up
and down to move the pane selector. To change between Wide View and Narrow View, push and
hold the Joystick.
For information on viewing Charts and the Active Flight Plan Page with the Flight Plan map, see
the Flight Management Section.
For more information on Charts and how to enable Charts Full Screen, see the Additional Features
section.
36
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD in Split Screen Mode
Pane Selector Box
- Move Joystick in
direction of cyan
arrows to move
display pane
- Push and hold
Joystick to change
Narrow/Wide view
Cyan Pane Selector
shows Charts
is the active display
pane
Softkeys for the
active display pane
Figure
1-16Split
Split Screen
in Wide
View View
Figure
1-13
Screen
in Wide
Enabling/disabling split screen mode:
1) From the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page or the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page press the
Charts Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Chart Mode On’.
2) To disable the split screen mode, press the Charts Softkey again or press the MENU
Key and select ‘Chart Mode Off’. The display returns to the base page, either the
Navigation Map Page or the Active Flight Plan Page.
Renaming a Profile
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the
ENT Key.
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT
Key.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
37
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT
Key.
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
3) Press the Import Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
4) The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window with ‘Import’ highlighted.
Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the desired
profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press
the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to
replace profile on the system with the profile imported from the SD card, or turn the
FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the ‘Crew Profile
Importing’ Window.
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded’ in the Window below.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to
the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page. The imported profile becomes the active profile.
38
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
Import Successful
Figure 1-14 Crew Profile Import on the (Aux - System Setup Page)
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
3) Press the Export Softkey. The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with
‘Export’ highlighted. To change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large
and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Export’
highlighted.
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the
SD card, the system displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt.
Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card with the profile to be exported,
or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window without exporting the profile.
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’
highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
39
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Export Successful
Figure 1-15 Crew Profile Export on the (Aux - System Setup Page)
DATE/TIME
The system obtains the current Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) date and time directly from the
GPS satellite signals (shown on the Aux - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local
time is set by adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
Figure 1-14 System Time (UTC Format)
Figure 1-16 System Time (UTC Format)
Figure 1-15 Date/Time Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
Figure 1-17 Date/Time Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
40
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection. If local time format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ Field is highlighted.
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press
the ENT Key to confirm selection.
DISPLAY UNITS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System
Setup Page. The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set
from here.
Category
Settings
Affected Quantities
Navigation Angle
Magnetic (North)* Heading
True (North)
Course
User
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind Direction (Trip Planning Page)
Magnetic Variance
(can be modified
when the
Navigation Angle is
“User” Defined)
Degrees
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind Direction (Trip Planning Page)
Distance and Speed Metric
Nautical*
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges (some)
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK Fields (Navigation Data Bar)
Most distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
†
Altitude and Vertical Feet
Speed
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
††
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
41
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Category
Settings
Affected Quantities
Temperature
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
†††
Fuel and Fuel
Flow**
Gallons
Kilograms
Liters
Pounds*
Fuel Parameters (Trip Planning Page)
†††
Weight**
Pounds*
Kilograms
N/A
Position
HDDD°MM.MM’* All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
MGRS 1m
MGRS 10m
UTM/UPS
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
† Excludes: airspeed indicator, altitude, true airspeed (PFD), wind speed vector, map range (Traffic Map
Page, Terrain Proximity/HTAWS Page), CDI scaling (System Setup), and fuel range calculation (EIS)
†† Excludes: altimeter, Vertical Speed Indicator, and VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
††† Excludes: Engine Indication System (EIS)
Table 1-7 Display Unit Settings (System Setup Page)
Changing a display unit setting:
1) While on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate
the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
BARO TRANSITION ALERT
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
AIRSPACE ALERTS
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on Airspace Alerts settings.
ARRIVAL ALERTS
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup 1 Page allows the Messages Window arrival alerts to be
turned “On/Off” and the alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the Messages
Window and the PFD Navigation Status Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a
message upon reaching a user-specified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or
the last waypoint in a flight plan). When Arrival Alerts is set to “On”, and the set distance is reached,
an “Arrival at waypoint” message is displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box, and a “WPT
42
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]” is displayed in the Messages Window. When Arrival Alerts
is set to “Off”, only the PFD Navigation Status Box message “Arriving at waypoint” is displayed, and
it is displayed when the time to the final destination is approximately ten seconds.
Figure 1-18 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
Enabling/disabling the Window Arrival Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘On/Off’ Field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to
turn the alert Off.
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Distance’ Field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT DIRECTOR
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion setting the Flight Director format.
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on the MFD Data Bar Fields settings.
GPS CDI
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the GPS CDI format.
COM CONFIGURATION
See the Audio Panel & CNS section for a discussion on the COM Configuration for channel
spacing.
NEAREST AIRPORT
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on the Nearest Airport settings.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
43
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
INLET
See the EIS section for a discussion on the Particle Seperator and Snow Baffle.
TOUCHDOWN CALLOUTS
See the Hazard Avoidance section for a discussion on voice Touchdown Callouts.
SKID
The Skid Box on the System Setup 2 Page allows the Skid Type to be set to Low or High/EMERG
Floats.
Changing the Skid type:
1) While on the System Setup 2 Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the
flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Skid field in the Skid Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired skid type and press the
ENT Key.
AUDIO ALERTS
The Audio Box on the System Setup 2 Page allows the audio alert voice setting (male or female).
Changing the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Aux - System Setup 2 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Voice Field in the Audio Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired voice setting and press the ENT Key.
CHARTS
See the Additional Features section for a discussion on Auto Taxi Charts.
SYSTEM UTILITIES
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the Aux Utility Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer,
and a record of the time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and
maximum groundspeeds—are displayed from the time of the last reset.
44
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-17 Utility Page
Figure 1-19 Utility Page
TIMERS
The system timers available on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page include:
•
Stopwatch-like generic timers
•
Total-time-in-flight timer
•
Time since departure
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset
before reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting
up when reset, the digits return to zero.
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that
the aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the
time to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can
also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is
displayed is controlled from the System Setup Page.
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the
ENT Key.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
45
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS ‘Generic’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer.
The field changes to ‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to
‘Reset?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back
to ‘Start?’ and the digits are reset.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Flight’ timer Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the
ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Departure Time’ Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the
ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
TRIP STATISTICS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these
odometers can be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip
groundspeed. Maximum groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
46
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
•
Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
•
Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
•
Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
•
Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The
selected parameters are reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
SCHEDULER
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Switch
fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”, etc.) in the Messages Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display
based on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default
setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to
periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When
power is cycled, messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
Scheduler messages appear in the “Messages” Window on the PFD and cause the Messages Softkey
label to change to a flashing “Message” label. Pressing the Message Softkey opens the “Messages”
Window and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the “Messages” label.
Pressing the Messages Softkey again removes the “Messages” Window from the display and the
scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
Figure 1-18 PFD Alerts Window
Figure 1-20 PFD Alerts Window
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty field within the ‘Scheduler’ Box.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
47
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter text within the ‘Message’ Field to be displayed in the
‘Alerts’ Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Type’
Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
•
Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
•
One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
•
Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next
field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value
(HHH:MM:SS) from which to countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT
Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next
field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the
next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Message’ Field of the scheduler message to
be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the
message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
48
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be
adjusted manually in one of two ways:
•
Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
•
Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can
only be adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining
displays.
Figure
1-19PFD
PFD Setup
Menu
Figure
1-21
Setup
Menu
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted
next to ‘PFD Display’. If desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD
Display’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value
is now highlighted.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted
next to ‘PFD Display’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’
or ‘MFD Key’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
49
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value
is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
50
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 OVERVIEW
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on
selected flight instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts,
as they appear on the display during certain AFCS modes.
The system increases pilot situational awareness by providing and easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display
(PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation
information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and
weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
•
Airspeed Indicator, showing
•
Indicated airspeed
•
Ground speed
•
Airspeed awareness ranges
•
Trend vector
•
Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
•
Altimeter, showing
•
Barometric setting
•
Trend vector
•
Selected altitude
•
Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath Indicators
•
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
•
Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
•
•
Turn Rate Indicator
•
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
•
Bearing pointers and information windows
•
Navigation Source
Timer/References Window, Showing
•
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH)
•
Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
•
Outside air temperature (OAT)
•
Wind data
•
Engine data, Showing
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
51
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
•
Power Situation Indicator
•
Dual Tachometer
•
DME Information Window (optional)
•
Radar altimeter (optional)
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
52
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
21
20
19
18
1
17
16
2
15
14
3
13
4
12
5
11
6
10
9
7
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Altimeter Barometric Setting
3
Current Heading
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Power Situation Indicator (PSI)
15
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Dual Tachometer
16
Altimeter
6
Groundspeed
17
Selected Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
18
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
19
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
21
Attitude Indicator
11
Selected Heading Bug
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
53
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
10
1
9
8
2
3
7
4
5
6
1
Traffic Annunciation
6
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
2
Selected Heading
7
Desired Track
3
Wind Data
8
Required Vertical Speed Indicator
4
Map/HSI
9
Vertical Deviation Indication
5
Bearing Information Windows
10
VNV Target Altitude
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
54
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon
line. The Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
1
8
7
2
6
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-3 Attitude Indicator
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and
numeric labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚
increments, up to 25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the
horizon line, minor pitch marks occur every 2.5˚. When the Synthetic Vision System is activated, the
pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and
minor tick marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is
indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll
pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the
turn) or skid (outside the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer. One bar
displacement is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid Indicator.
Figure 2-4 Slip/Skid Indication
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
55
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The amber symbolic aircraft on the Attitude Indicator changes appearance based on selection of
AFCS Flight Director Command Bar format (see the AFCS Section for details). The Command Bar
format (single-cue or cross-pointer) may be selected from the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
Single-cue
Cross-pointer
Figure 2-5 Flight Director Format
NOTE: Synthetic Vision System Pathways are disabled if the cross-pointer is displayed.
Changing the Command Bar format:
1) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the ‘Aux’ page group on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, press the Setup 1 Softkey to display the ‘Aux — System Setup 1’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Format Active’ setting in the ‘Flight Director’
box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired format.
’Single Cue’ to display the aircraft symbol and Command Bars as a single cue.
Or:
’X Pointer’ to display the aircraft symbol and Command Bars as a cross-pointer.
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the applicable flight manual for airspeed criteria and
Vspeed values.
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The groundspeed
is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the
moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are
indicated at intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed
viewable at any time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains
black until reaching never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red.
56
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Airspeed
Speed
Ranges
Figure 2-6 Airspeed Indicator showing Shutter Cover and Red Pointer at VNE
A color-coded (amber, green, and red) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors
denote, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE).
A black and white checkered shutter covers the airspeed indication at or below 15 knots, and
remains displayed until reaching 20 knots.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded
speed range strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is
anchored to the tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down
corresponding to the rate of acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or
deceleration, the moving end of the line shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will
be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to
amber. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate
airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling
number gauge. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick
marks are at intervals of 20 feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug
symbol. A bug corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the
range shown on the tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. When the metric
value is selected it is displayed in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at
the approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
57
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
not shown if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system
failure.
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters. Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Indicated
Altitude
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-7 Altimeter
Setting the Selected Altitude:
1) Turn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. The large knob adjusts the Selected
Altitude in 1000-ft increments, the small knob in 100-ft increments. If the altimeter is
set to display meters, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter
increments, the small knob in 50-meter increments.
2) If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available
for the Selected altitude.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or
hectopascals (hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates
discontinuities in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take
several minutes for the aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a
waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to
meet the vertical constraint.
58
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not
operate properly with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height
above mean sea level, or the standard pressure setting, as applicable.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in
Hg).
Or:
Press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when
crossing the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing cyan barometric
pressure setting when crossing the transition altitude.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Altitude’ in the ‘Baro Transition Alert’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert ‘Off’ or ‘On’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical
guidance when SBAS is available.
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at
1000, 2000, and 3000 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than
100 fpm. The pointer remains black until reaching 2000 fpm, if rate of ascent exceeds 2000 fpm at
which point it turns red. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 3000 fpm, the pointer appears at the
corresponding edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
A magenta chevron is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) for reaching a VNV
Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
59
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight
Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
VERTICAL DEVIATION
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the
“TOD within 1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes
invalid. See the Flight Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2,
Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in
the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a
conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is
displayed in place of the diamond.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF)
becomes the active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC
clearance, the aircraft may be centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath
Indicator appears.
The Glidepath Indicator is a vertical deviation scale for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V). The Glidepath Indicator, a magenta diamond appears on the
display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the active waypoint, and FMS is the selected
navigation source. Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits. The upper
limit is +/-150 meters and lower limits depend on approach service level.
•
LNAV/VNAV is +/- 45 meters (148 feet)
•
LPV/LP+V is +/- 15 meters (49 feet)
If the approach downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
60
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Figure 2-8 Vertical Deviation, Vertical Speed, Glideslope and Glidepath Indicators
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RSVI, VDI) appear
on the PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See
the Flight Management section for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in Table 2-1.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
61
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Top of Descent Message
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Phase of
Flight
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Figure 2-9 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
VNV Indication Removed
Required
Vertical
Speed
(RSVI)
Vertical
Deviation
(VDI)
VNV Target
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight
plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey selected on
MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed
due to unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight
Management Section)
X
X
X
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target
Altitude
X
X
X
Criteria
62
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VNV Indication Removed
Required
Vertical
Speed
(RSVI)
Vertical
Deviation
(VDI)
VNV Target
Altitude
Current crosstrack or track angle error has
exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be
reached within maximum allowed flight path
angle and vertical speed
X
X
Criteria
Table 2-1 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
RADAR ALTIMETER
When the radar height (the aircraft altitude above ground level detected by the radar altimeter) is
between zero and 2500 feet, the current value is displayed in green above the selected course. Display
of radar height becomes more sensitive as the height above ground decreases (Table 2-2).
Radar Altimeter
Figure 2-10 Current Radar Height
Radar Height Range
Shown to Nearest
0 to 50 feet
1 foot
50 to 200 feet
5 feet
200 to 1500 feet
10 feet
1500 to 2500 feet
50 feet
Table 2-2 Radar Altimeter Sensitivity
When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the minimum descent altitude alerting
function, the color of the radar height changes to amber.
Figure 2-11 RAD ALT Setting(Timer/References Window)
Figure 2-12 RA as Altitude Source for MDA/DH
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
63
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
A ground line is shown on the Altimeter to display the aircraft’s height relative to the ground. If the
data becomes invalid, the message “RA FAIL” is displayed in amber in place of the current radar
height.
Radar Altimeter
Ground
Line
Radar Altimeter
Minimums Box
Figure 2-13 Altimeter Displaying the Ground Line and Radar Altimeter Failure
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up
orientation. Letters indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at
10˚ intervals and minor tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears
on top of the HSI. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and selected navigation
source information. The HSI is available in two formats: a 360˚ compass rose and a 210˚ HSI Map. The
HSI Map is mutually exclusive with the Inset Maps.
The HSI with the HSI map disabled presents a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a Course
Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line
arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction
of the set course. The To/From Indicator rotates with the Course Pointer and appears when the system
is receiving the active NAVAID.
64
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
17
16
15
1
14
2
3
13
4
12
5
6
11
10
7
9
8
1
Turn Rate Indicator
10
To/From Indicator
2
Selected Heading
11
Course Pointer
3
Current Track Indicator
12
Heading Bug
4
Lateral Deviation Scale
13
Flight Phase
5
Navigation Source
14
Selected Course
6
Aircraft Symbol
15
Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector
7
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
16
Current Heading
8
Rotating Compass Card
17
Lubber Line
9
OBS Mode Active
Figure 2-14 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
The HSI Map is a 210 ˚ expanded compass rose which also includes a navigation map with overlay
capabilities such as topographical, weather, traffic, and land information. The HSI Map contains a
Course Pointer, a combined To/From Indicator with a sliding deviation indicator, and a lateral
deviation scale. Upon passing a station, the To/From Indicator points to the tail of the aircraft.
Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the HSI Map can appear either as an arrowhead
(GPS, VOR, OBS) as a diamond (LOC). Refer to the Flight Management Section for information about
using HSI Map overlays.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
65
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Lateral Deviation Scale
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Navigation Source
Course Deviation
Indicator and To/
From Indicator
Course Pointer
Figure 2-15 HSI Map
Enabling/disabling the HSI Map on the PFD:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the HSI Map Softkey to enable the HSI Map.
Or:
Press the Map Off Softkey to disable the HSI Map.
For either HSI display format, a digital reading of the current heading appears above the rotating
compass card. A magenta diamond on the HSI represents the current track over the ground the aircraft
is flying. To the upper left of the HSI, the Selected Heading is shown in cyan, which corresponds to
the cyan heading bug on the compass rose. The Desired Track (DTK) is shown in magenta to the
upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is GPS and OBS Mode is not active. The
Selected Course (CRS) is shown to the upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is
VOR or LOC and in magenta when the selected navigation source is GPS with OBS Mode active.
Adjusting the selected heading:
1) Turn the HDG Knob to set the selected heading.
2) Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
1) Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
2) Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of
the active waypoint or navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
66
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Current Track Indicator
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
Selected Heading Bug
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted.
The Current Track Indicator, represented by a magenta diamond on the HSI, is the current over the
ground track the aircraft is flying.
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation
(Mag Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup 1 Page. When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change
the navigation angle setting to True at the appropriate time.
Figure 2-17 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Figure 2-18 Heading and Course Indications (User)
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1‘ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
•
True - References angles to true north (T)
•
Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
•
User - Angle set according to user input
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
67
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HEADING PRESET MODE
Heading Preset Mode allows AHRS to compute heading data without using the magnetic sensing
device. If a magnet anomaly occurs (either due to interference or magnetometer failure), and Heading
Preset Mode is available, a System Message occurs. The heading reference for this mode is a pilotentered value.
Activating Heading Preset Mode:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Sensors Softkey.
3) Select the HDG Softkey.
To change the heading value, press the HDG+ or HDG- Softkey until reaching the desired value, or
turn the HDG knob until the Selected Heading Bug reaches the desired value, and then push the HDG
SYNC Softkey. While Heading Preset Mode is active, “SET” is annunciated within the heading
indicator field. The heading numeric values are displayed in cyan, indicating that the value may be
modified by the pilot.
“SET”
Annunciation
Heading Preset
Mode Softkeys
Figure 2-19 Heading Preset Mode
Heading Preset Mode will stay active for eight minutes, however, the eight-minute time period is
“reset” if the heading value is changed within two minutes of activating the mode. The heading value
can be changed at any time while Heading Preset Mode is active, but the eight-minute duration is only
“reset” by heading value changes made during the first two minutes that the mode is active.
Heading Preset Mode may be deactivated at any time by pushing the HPM OFF Softkey, or the mode
will automatically deactivate at the completion of the eight-minute time period. If the difference
between the current heading and the magnetic heading is less than ten degrees, the heading indicator
will immediately turn to the magnetic heading, the “SET” annunciation will be removed, and the
numeric heading will turn from cyan to white. If the difference between current heading is greater
than ten degrees, the “SET” annunciation will change to “ALN”, and the numeric heading display will
turn amber, indicating that it is not reliable. The heading indication will transition to the magnetic
68
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
heading, at which time the “ALN” annunciation will be removed and the numeric value will change
from amber to white.
“ALN”
Annunciation
Figure 2-20 Heading Alignment
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on
the Arc HSI switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral
deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not
valid, the CDI is not displayed.
Navigation
Source
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
Flight
Phase
CDI
Figure 2-21 Course Deviation Indicator
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. Color indicates the current
navigation source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are
defined by a GPS-derived distance when coupled to GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer
(LOC), the CDI uses the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum
deviation on the scale (two dots) while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed
below the white aircraft symbol.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
69
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-22 Navigation Sources
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan
tuning box over the NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This
places the cyan tuning box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
VOR2
Selected
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-23 Selecting a Navigation Source
70
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
VOR2
Selected
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-24 Selecting a Navigation Source
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
•
A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
•
The final approach fix (FAF) is the active waypoint, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft
is moving toward the FAF
•
A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
•
The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC
capture, up to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes
invalid. Activating a Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source.
GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix
prior to the FAF, it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically
switches from FMS to LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
71
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Fix Prior to the FAF
Glideslope Intercept Point
Figure 2-25 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
TURN RATE INDICATOR
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left
and right of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend
Vector shows the current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6
seconds, based on the present turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend
vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from
the current heading. At rates greater than 4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta
trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Standard
Turn Rate
Half Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 Degrees
per Second
Figure 2-26 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
GPS CDI SCALING
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight
plan is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and
the full-scale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page.
If the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is
scaled accordingly and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
72
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Format Allowed’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon
the current phase of flight (refer to the figure/table below).
Missed
Approach
Figure 2-27 Automatic CDI Scaling
•
Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
•
The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following
conditions:
The next leg in the procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
The next leg in the departure procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
(see Glossary for leg type definitions)
After any leg in the departure procedure that is not CA or FA
•
At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI
scaling changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure
airport) or the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is
activated.
•
If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the
aircraft and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0
nm).
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
73
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2 nm
2 nm
FAF
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
angle based
on database
information
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
350 ft
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
course width
During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (refer to the following figures). This
transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to
approach scaling automatically once the approach procedure is activated or if Vector-to-Final (VTF)
is selected.
If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of
the final approach segment course.
If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
1.0 nm
•
CDI Full-scale Deflection
Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from
2.0 nm to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination
airport, the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0
nm to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm.
CDI Full-scale Deflection
•
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-28 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling/Typical LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV
and LP+V Approach CDI Scaling
•
When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
•
The system automatically switches back to terminal scaling under the following conditions:
The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or
TF
After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not CA or FA
Flight Phase
Annunciation*
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
Departure
DPRT
0.3 nm
Terminal
TERM
1.0 nm
Enroute
ENR
2.0 nm
Oceanic
OCN
4.0 nm
74
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase
Annunciation*
Approach (Nonprecision)
LNAV
Approach (Nonprecision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
LNAV+V
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
LNAV
Approach (LPV)
LPV
Approach (Nonprecision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
LP+V
Approach (LP)
Missed
Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-22)
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-23)
LP
MAPR
0.3 nm
Table 2-3 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a
GPS flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to”
waypoint as the navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the
lower right of the aircraft symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving
map. If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled,
the GPS flight plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the
course set in OBS Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
75
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Extended
Course
Line
GPS
Selected
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Figure 2-29 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in the following figure. Selecting the SUSP
Softkey, deactivates the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
Figure 2-30 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS
Knob to synchronize the Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and
ADF sources by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG or DME Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan
and are single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information
windows to indicate the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are
76
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
visually separated from the CDI by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily
visible due to data unavailability. When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows
and pointers are disabled.
NOTE: ADF radio installation is optional.
Tuning Mode
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance
DME Information Window
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing
Source
Station
Pointer
Identifier
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
Pointer
Icon
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
Figure 2-31 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The
Bearing Information windows are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and display the following
information:
•
Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
•
Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
•
Frequency (NAV, ADF)
•
Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
•
GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing source
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency, the bearing source and the bearing pointer are
removed from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced
by the station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active
waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information
window if the NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an
active waypoint is not selected.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
77
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and
information window with a NAV source.
3) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to
GPS.
4) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a third time to change the bearing source
to ADF (note: ADF radio installation is optional).
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or
Bearing 2 Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI
and in a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or
HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to
the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DME.
NOTE: DME installation is optional.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1
Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
78
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Selecting the PFD, then DFLTS Softkeys turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset
Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information,
including temperatures, wind data, and Generic Timer.
GENERIC TIMER
The generic timer can be accessed via softkeys on the PFD and allows for quick access for timing
functions (either counting up or down) for the pilot.
Setting the Generic Timer:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Up/Dn field is now highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the UP/DOWN Window.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Up’ or ‘Dn’.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Start?’ is now highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’. If the timer is
counting DOWN, it will start counting UP after reaching zero.
9) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to
‘Reset?’.
10) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back
to ‘Start?’ and the digits are reset.
11) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) in the lower left of the PFD
under normal display conditions and in reversionary display mode.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
79
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-32 Outside Air Temperature
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Temperature’ datafield in the ‘Display Units’
box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either ‘Celsius’ or ‘Fahrenheit’ and press the ENT
Key to confirm the selection.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft) in knots can be displayed in a window to the
upper left of the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or
unavailable, the window shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different
ways:
80
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
Figure 2-33 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
3) Press one of the Option Softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
•
Option 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
•
Option 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
•
Option 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
81
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to the Engine
Indication System (EIS) Section for information on the Crew Alerting System (CAS) and to Appendix A
for more information on alerts and annunciations.
ALTITUDE ALERTING
The Altitude Alerting function provides visual and audio alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, Altitude Alerting is reset. Altitude Alerting is
based on the altitude information shown on the PFD. Altitude Alerting is independent of the AFCS.
The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
•
Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude Box changes to black
text on a cyan background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
•
When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to
cyan text on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds.
•
After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the aircraft flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the
Selected Altitude), the Selected Altitude Box changes to amber text on a black background, flashes
for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
Figure 2-34 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This
annunciation is not shown unless HTAWS alerting is inhibited, has failed, or is unavailable.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical
guidance, a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet
below the prescribed altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the
top left of the Altimeter, flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is
resolved.
Figure 2-35 Low Altitude Annunciation on PFD
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer
marker reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel
and CNS Section for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
82
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
Altimeter
Figure 2-36 Marker Beacon Annunciations
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on
barometric altitude, radar altitude, or temperature compensated can be set. When active, the altitude
setting is displayed to the lower left of the altimeter, with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the
altimeter (once the altitude is within the visible range of the tape). The following visual annunciations
alert the pilot when approaching the MDA or DH:
•
When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN, RA
MIN, or COMP MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan (or magenta for COMP MIN) text. The
bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for COMP MIN) once in range.
•
When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
•
Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text become amber and the voice alert, “Minimums.
Minimums”, is heard.
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-37 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above
the setting for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it
reaches 50 feet above the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled. The function is reset when the power is
cycled.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
83
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-38 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, ‘RAD ALT’ or ‘TEMP COMP.’ ‘OFF’ is selected
by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the next field and then enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
84
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.5 SVT OPERATION
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated
Flight Deck. SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of
the aircraft. The field of view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is
shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary
Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional
position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data
resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares
measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the
required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled until the
required data is restored.
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical
map display), large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the
obstacle database. Cultural features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and
state boundaries are not displayed even if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display
also includes a north–south east–west grid with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arcminute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) is integrated within SVT to provide visual and
auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight
path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or
fidelity on which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must
not be predicated solely upon the use of the TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
•
Pathways
•
Flight Path Marker
•
Horizon Heading Marks
•
Traffic Display
•
Airport Signs
•
Runway Display
•
Terrain Alerting
•
Obstacle Alerting
•
Wire Obstacles
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
85
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-39 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and
traffic avoidance. SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not
provide either the accuracy or reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan
maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display.
Pressing the softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale
is reduced from 20 degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD
function Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature
softkeys. The softkeys are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and Wire. The Back
Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT
feature may be activated.
Pathways, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and Wire Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL,
APT Sign, and Wire softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When
system power is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and
APT Sign softkeys is remembered by the system.
86
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
•
Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
•
Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
•
HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
•
APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
•
Wire Softkey enables aerial wire obstruction depiction.
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey.
4) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the
Pathways Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey.
4) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the
HDG LBL Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey.
4) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT
Sign Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Wire Obstacles on SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
87
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Terrain Softkey.
4) Press the Wire Softkey. Display of aerial wire obstruction will cycle on or off with the
Wire Softkey.
SVT FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
Airport
Runway
Flight
Path
Marker
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Horizon
Heading
Marks
Airplane
Symbol
Synthetic
Terrain
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
Nav Source
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 2-40 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
ZERO PITCH LINE
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the
terrain horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the
terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high
altitudes.
AIRPORT SIGNS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic
terrain display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately
15 nm from an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the
identifier until the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are
not shown behind the airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by
pressing the APT SIGN Softkey.
88
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
Figure 2-41 Airport Signs
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at
groundspeeds above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft
accounting for wind speed and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM
represents the direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display,
while the airplane symbol represents the aircraft heading.
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired
altitudes and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is
aligned inside the pathway boxes as shown.
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant
terrain or obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the
FPM could indicate a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions
regarding terrain and/or obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
89
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
Wind
Vector
Figure 2-42 Flight Path Marker
HORIZON HEADING
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of
compass heading in 30 degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and
digits appearing on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display.
Horizon Heading is used for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing
the HDG LBL Softkey.
PATHWAYS
NOTE: Pathways are not available when the cross-pointer (X-Pointer) flight director format is
selected.
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as
colored rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan.
The box size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight
phases. During an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI,
whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less.
The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the
selected altitude or the VNV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude
deviation information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
90
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of
flight and navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by
magenta boxes that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes
that correspond to a green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by
white[[ boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the PFD maps or MFD map indicating an
inactive leg.
Selected
Altitude
Programmed
Altitudes
Figure 2-43 Programmed and Selected Altitude
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/
VNAV, and some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and
should not be used independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator.
They are removed from the display when the selected navigation information is not available.
Pathways are not displayed beyond the active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not
displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong
direction.
DEPARTURE AND ENROUTE
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with
pointers at each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not
displayed for the first leg of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first
segment displaying pathways is the first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg
of the flight plan route is outside the SVT field of view, pathways will not be visible until the
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
91
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching the center of the active leg and prescribed
altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum of four.
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance.
Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft
at the altitude selected or programmed.
DESCENT AND APPROACH
During an approach, Pathways be can shown for the programmed descent, level transition flight,
and at the Selected Altitude within the approach segments. When an approach providing vertical
guidance is activated, the corresponding approach glideslope or glidepath will be displayed using a
color corresponding to the selected navigation source and conditions.
White Pathways represent the next segment of the approach that is not yet active. Magenta
Pathways represent the active segment with GPS as the navigation source. Green Pathways indicate
the ILS/LOC navigation source. During the arrival/approach phases of flight, gray pathways
indicate the anticipated preview glidepath/glideslope. The gray Approach Preview Pathways will be
displayed beginning at the start of the segment leading to the FAF waypoint. With active approach
vertical guidance, the selected altitude will be displayed as a level gray Pathway if the Selected
Altitude is lower than the glidepath/glideslope. The gray Selected Altitude Preview Pathways are
displayed until they converge with the green glideslope or magenta glidepath pathways. If
approach vertical guidance is not yet active, pathways at the Selected Altitude will be displayed in
magenta throughout the arrival/approach.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment
altitudes if GPS is the selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer
inbound with the LOC selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in
green along the localizer and glideslope. VOR, LOC, BC, and ADF approach segments that are
approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using
other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final approach courses are not displayed.
92
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
Figure 2-44 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
MISSED APPROACH
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point
(MAHP) and are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected
altitude, whichever is the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA)
leg, the pathways boxes will be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial
missed approach leg is defined by a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for
that segment. In this case, the pathways displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view
and will be visible when the aircraft has turned in the direction of that leg.
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals
that are part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a
MAHP unless a defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
93
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FAF
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
MAHP
Figure 2-45 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining
the proximity of the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path
angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these
runways are not displayed.
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding
terrain. All runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database.
In some situations, where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be
layered. As runways are displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in
white. Other runways will be gray in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that
runway will appear brighter and be outlined with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation
94
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway
numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
Airport
Runway
Other
Runways
on Airport
Figure 2-46 Airport Runways
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or
may appear as a partial symbol.
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic
systems. Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting
closer, and smaller when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not
be displayed on the SVT display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic
displayed in the Inset map or MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not
be displayed on the SVT display. For more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard
Avoidance section.
HTAWS ALERTING
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance
(FLTA). When an obstacle becomes a potential impact point the color of the obstacle matches the
red or yellow X displayed on the MFD HTAWS Page. For more detailed information regarding
HTAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on
the synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of
the aircraft.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
95
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Terrain
Annunciation
Terrain
Caution
Potential
Impact
Area
Figure 2-47 Terrain Caution
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower
symbols as found on MFD HTAWS Page and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view
with relative height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike on the MFD HTAWS Page,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the
aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than
1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and
altitude displays.
96
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Terrain
Annunciation
Potential
Impact
Area
Potential
Impact
Point
Figure 2-48 Terrain Warning
WIREAWARE POWER LINE OBSTACLES
NOTE: The WireAware obstacle database does not contain all known power lines. And as
such, obstacle avoidance is the sole responsibility of the flight crew.
To enhance safety, HTAWS incorporates Garmin’s WireAware wire obstacle technology. WireAware
database information mainly includes Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) power lines which
are typically high voltage transmission lines depicted on the VFR Sectional charts, and are
considered of special interest to pilots. These include power lines which may span rivers, valleys,
canyons, or be in close proximity to airports/heliports. For wire obstacles present in the obstacle
database, HTAWS shows these on the maps as well as the Synthetic Vision display; see Hazard
Avoidance section for more information about HTAWS and Garmin’s WireAware.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
97
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Wire
Annunciation
Potential
Impact
Area
Figure 2-49 Wire Warning
FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines
forming a V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area
shown on the PFD.
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field
of View turned on.
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 2-50 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
98
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/Disabling SVT Field of View on the Navigation Map:
1) While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the
‘Page Menu’ Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Map Settings’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Map’ Group options to ‘Field of View’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ page.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
99
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.6 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in following table can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions
occur. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
Location
Description
GPS LOI
Right of HSI
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity
is insufficient for the current phase of
flight
GPS INTEG OK
Right of HSI
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been
restored
to
within
normal
limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected
Lower left of aircraft position rather than GPS position to
symbol
compute navigation data and sequence
active flight plan waypoints
DR
Table 2-4 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-51 Example HSI Annunciations
In Dead Reckoning Mode, the CDI is removed (when GPS is the selected navigation source), and the
following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
•
Current Track Bug
•
Wind Data
•
Distances in the Bearing Information windows
•
GPS bearing pointers
100
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode and they become
increasingly inaccurate over time.
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs.
SVT is disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid
SVT data, the PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
•
Attitude data
•
Heading data
•
GPS position data
•
4.9 Arc-second Terrain data
•
Obstacle data
•
TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
•
The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn
of extreme pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚
below the horizon line.
Nose High
Nose Low
Figure 2-52 Pitch Attitude Warnings
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed.
The Altimeter, Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, Power Situation Indicator, and Horizontal Situation
indicators remain on the display and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can
be displayed during such situations. All other indications on the PFD are removed form view.
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
101
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
gradient is great enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the
horizon during extreme pitch attitudes.
Blue Band
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
Figure 2-53 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
102
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the applicable flight manual for limitations.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for information on the Crew Alerting System (CAS) which is
displayed in the Alerts window of the Engine Page.
The system Integrated Flight Deck offers improved flight operations and reduces pilot workload by
automatically monitoring critical system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of
flight using the following:
•
The Power Situation Indicator (PSI) and Dual Tachometer display engine information on the
Primary Flight Display (PFD). A larger version of the PSI and Dual Tachometer is also available on
the Engine Page on the Multi Function Display (MFD).
•
The Engine Indication System (EIS) display contains engine, electrical and fuel information on the
MFD.
In combination with these, aural alerts, additional avionics messages, and master indicators are used
to inform the crew of aberrant flight conditions.
If a display fails, the other display may be configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD)
symbology together with condensed EIS information (refer to the System Overview for more
information about Reversionary Mode).
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
103
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
PFD
Power
Situation
Indicator
Dual
Tachometer
MFD
EIS
Display
Figure 3-1 EIS (Normal)
104
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS) DISPLAY
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown
may differ from the actual aircraft configuration.
EIS information is presented using gauges and digital displays. When unsafe operating conditions
occur, gauge pointers and displays change color to indicate caution (amber) or warning (red). Refer to
each indicator description for additional details on display behavior.
If the time limit for an unsafe condition is exceeded, the color of the pointers and digits may change to
denote an increase in priority level. Parameters out of the range of the display as a red “X”. If sensor data
for a parameter becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is shown across the indicator and/or display
and the indicator may be removed. Dashes may also be displayed in place of a digital display.
1
1
2
3
4
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
10
5
Figure 3-3 EIS Display (Reversionary)
6
7
9
8
10
Figure 3-2 MFD EIS Display (Normal)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
105
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
Engine Oil Pressure
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in pounds per
square inch (psi). A red triangle represents the oil pressure
limitation during a cold start (shown in normal mode only)
2
Oil Temperature Indicator
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Celsius
3
Transmission Oil Pressure
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the transmission in pounds
per square inch (psi).
4
Transmission Oil
Temperature
Displays the transmission oil temperature in degrees Celsius
5
Ammeter
Displays the DC load in amperes to the nearest 5 amps
6
Voltmeter
Displays the electrical bus voltage with a resolution of 0.5 VDC
7
Fuel Quantity
Displays the usable fuel quantity to the nearest 5 pounds. By
default, total usable fuel quantity is shown; when forward fuel
tank is selected, ‘FWD’ is displayed above display to indicate
forward tank usable fuel quantity is shown.
8
Fuel Pressure Indicator
Displays fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
9
Total Fuel Quantity Gauge Displays total usable fuel quantity as a bar graph.
10
Fuel Flow Indicator
106
Displays fuel flow in pounds per hour (PPH)
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 ENGINE POWER AND SPEED INDICATIONS
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the applicable flight manual for engine operating
limitations and corrective actions.
The Power Situation Indicator (PSI) and Dual Tachometer are shown as a group in the lower-left of
the PFD, and on the Engine Page of the MFD in a larger format.
Maximum Continuous
Power Operation Limit
Takeoff Power Operation
Limit
Power Available Pointer
Cyclic Centering Annunciation
Box Indicates Parameter
Controlling PSI Indicator
Torque Display
MGT Display
NG Display
Power Available Gauge
NR Pointer
NR Display
NP Pointer
Dual Tachometer Gauge
Figure 3-4 Power Situation Indicator Gauge and Dual Tachometer Gauge
POWER SITUATION INDICATOR
The PSI provides the pilot with the amount of power available based on engine torque (Q; shown as
a percentage), measured gas temperature (MGT, degrees Celsius, °C), and gas producer rotation speeds
(NG; shown as a percentage) with respect to operating limitations. A box is shown around the label for
the display currently closest to its maximum continuous power (MCP) limits or takeoff power (TOP)
limit as applicable. This value also controls a pointer along a numeric scale from 0 (no power) to 10
(MCP shown with an amber tick mark; TOP shown with a red tick mark).
Power available information is displayed along the PSI scale and is adjusted dynamically in response
to all parameters to show the rate and range of pointer movement available before any parameter
reaches the maximum continuous or takeoff power limit. Green arcs indicate continuous operation
ranges; amber arcs indicate transient operating limits. A gray arc becomes red if the Power Available
Indicator enters this range; it indicates an exceedance is occurring.
In normal operations, the Power Available Indicator pointer will be the same color as the arc it is
presently within. A gray pointer is displayed when an engine failure is detected while in-flight.
During engine start, a red triangle will appear on the PSI arc to reference 927°C. When MGT exceeds
843°C for more than 10 seconds, the triangle will then display at the 843°C scale position. Otherwise,
when the 843°C limit is not reached for more than 10 seconds during the start sequence, the triangle
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
107
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
will remain at the 927°C mark. The red triangle will be displayed until 5 seconds after the starter has
been disengaged.
TAKEOFF TIMER
After the engine has been started, when Q, MGT or NG are within the takeoff limitation ranges, the
system displays a 5-minute countdown timer inside the PSI gauge. The timer flashes beginning when
30 seconds remain until an exceedance will occur; the timer is automatically removed when either
Q, MGT or NG fall below takeoff limits.
CYCLIC CENTERING ANNUNCIATION
The amber CYC CTR (cyclic centering) annunciation, located above and to the right of the PSI
(Power Situation Indicator), alerts the pilot that the cyclic stick is not in the correct position when
the helicopter is on the ground.
DUAL TACHOMETER
The dual tachometer displays rotor speed (NR) and power turbine speed (NP) as percentages. A
display for NR is provided. The long pointer represents NR along the gauge scale; NP is shown with
the short pointer. Limitations are shown as colored arcs. A white tick mark represents the FADEC
normal governing point. When Quiet Mode is active, a magenta reference bug is shown on the
tachometer to indicate the Quiet Mode governing point at 92% NR. The NR and NP pointers will be
the same color as the arc(s) they are presently within. During autorotation with an engine failure, the
NP pointer will be displayed in gray and the dual tachometer gauge scale will display power-off
limitations.
ALTERNATE ENGINE DATA SOURCE ANNUNCIATIONS
If the System is using alternate analog data sources to determine Q or NR, an amber ‘ALTN’
annunciation box will appear to the right of the PSI gauge. In addition, an amber subscript ‘A’ will be
shown with the affected parameter display(s) (Figure 3-5).
In the event an alternate analog data source is unavailable or invalid, a white ‘ALTN’ annunciation
box is shown to the right of the PSI gauge (Figure 3-5) as well as the ALTN DATA FAIL white advisory
Crew Alerting System (CAS) message. When this occurs, the ALTN DATA FAIL CAS advisory message
will also display.
108
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Alternate Source
Data In-Use for
Torque
Alternate Data Source InUse Annunciation
Alternate Data Source
Missing or Invalid
Figure 3-5 Alternate Engine Data Source Annunciations
If no valid data sources are available, the ALTN indication will be removed and a red X will be
placed over the applicable data field.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
109
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.4 ENGINE PAGE
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the applicable flight manual for engine operating
limitations and corrective actions.
Pressing the Engine Softkey on the MFD accesses the Engine Page, which displays all engine,
electrical, fuel, alerts, and power assurance calculations. To return to the previous softkey level and
exit the Engine page, press the Engine Softkey again or press the CLR Key. The Engine Page is not
available in reversionary mode. The Engine page will display automatically when autorotation is
entered.
Engine
Displays the Engine page and softkeys; press again to return to
the previous page
CAS [Up Arrow]*
Scrolls up one message in the Alerts window on the MFD
CAS [Down Arrow]*
Scrolls down one message in the Alerts window on the MFD
PWR CHK
Performs a power assurance check
HOV PWR
Performs a Hover Performance Check
OGE
Performs a OGE (Out of Ground Effect) Hover Performance Check
IGE
Performs a IGE (In Ground Effect) Hover Performance Check
HOV-P
Enables Hover Prediction Mode
*Softkey disabled until 19 or more alerts are displayed.
MFD Alerts
window
containing CAS
messages
EIS Display
Power Situation
Indicator
Dual
Tachometer
Aircraft Total Air
Time Display
Figure 3-6 Engine Page Display (MFD)
110
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AIRCRAFT TOTAL AIR TIME DISPLAY
The aircraft total air time display hours increment when the weight-on-gear (WOG) switch indicates
the aircraft is in the air for more than 3 seconds and NR is greater than 70%. The hours do not
continue to increment when the WOG switch indicates the aircraft is on the ground for more than 3
seconds or NR is below 68% for more than 3 seconds.
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK
The System can assist the pilot in performing a Power Assurance Check to determine if installed
specification power can be achieved.
When the Power Assurance Check is activated, a PWR CHECK box is displayed containing a
progress meter. When the helicopter configuration for the Power Assurance Check is invalid, the error
message CHK LIMITS is displayed in amber. Otherwise, the Power Assurance Check will complete
after ten seconds.
Engine parameters from Power Assurance Check will automatically be compared against both the
Power Assurance Check charts for the basic aircraft, and the Power Assurance Check charts from the
Hot And High Operations RFM supplement.
When the comparison against Hot And High Operations yields positive margins, the margins will be
displayed in white. A green PASS H&H message will also be displayed. The green PASS H&H message
will continue to be displayed following removal of the PWR CHECK box.
When the comparison against Hot And High Operations yields negative margins, and the
comparison against basic aircraft yields a positive margin, the positive margin will be displayed. A
white H&H NOT AVAIL message will also be displayed.
Values that equal or exceed performance minimums will be displayed in white; values that do not
meet performance minimums will be shown with amber highlighted black displays. White dashes are
displayed if data used to perform the Power Assurance Check is not available.
Performing a power assurance check:
NOTE: Follow the procedures in the current version of the applicable flight manual for the
power assurance check prior to activating the feature on the system.
1) Aircraft equipped with a particle separator or snow baffle:
Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select System Setup. If necessary, press the SETUP 1
Softkey to display the System Setup 1 Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired option field in the Inlet Box.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob one click to the right to select ON or one click to the left to
select OFF.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
111
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6) Press the Engine Softkey to display the Engine Page.
7) Press the PWR CHK Softkey.
Or:
1) Aircraft not equipped with a particle separator or snow baffle:
Press the Engine Softkey to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the PWR CHK Softkey.
Figure 3-7 Power Assurance Check
HOVER PERFORMANCE
Pressing the HOV PWR Softkey on the Engine Page displays the Hover Performance parameters as
well as the OGE, IGE and HOV-P Softkeys. The Hover Power Indicator (HPI) is displayed on the
Power Situation Indicator (PSI) arc. The HPI is white when not in Hover Prediction Mode, and cyan
when in Hover Prediction Mode.
Out of Ground Effect
Out of Ground Effect
In Ground Effect
In Ground Effect
Hover Power Indicator (Real Time)
112
Hover Power Indicator (Hover Prediction Mode)
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
Hover
Performance
Parameters
Hover Performance
Power Chec k
Softkey
Figure 3-8 Hover Power Indicator and Hover Performance Parameters on the Engine Page
HOVER PERFORMANCE POWER CHECK
The Hover Performance Power Check displays the power required to perform an OGE (Out of
Ground Effect) or IGE (In Ground Effect) hover. The Hover Performance Power Check can be used
in real time or during pre-flight planning.
Pressing the HOV-P (Hover Prediction Mode) Softkey while HOV PWR is selected allows the pilot
to edit the hover performance parameters for pre-flight planning purposes. While in HOV-P (Hover
Prediction Mode), the Hover Power Indicator (HPI) and editable parameters are displayed in cyan,
and the HOV PRED annunciation is displayed in amber.
When limit conditions are not satisfied, the respective parameters are displayed in amber, the CHK
LIMIT annunciation is displayed, and the hover performance calculation is not performed.
When the engine is not within the Hot and High performance range, the Hot and High OPS text
display will be removed and the system will revert back to the basic flight manual performance
tables.
When wind conditions are not within the required range while performing a real time Hover
Performance Power Check, an amber CHK WIND annunciation is displayed above the Power
Situation Indicator. When wind conditions are not within the required range while in Hover
Prediction Mode, an amber CHK WIND annunciation is displayed above the hover performance
parameters.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
113
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Real Time
Hover Prediction Mode
Figure 3-9 CHK WIND (Check Wind) Annunciation
Performing a real time hover performance power check (out of ground effect):
1) Press the Engine Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the HOV PWR Softkey. The OGE (out of ground effect) Softkey is automatically
selected by default.
3) Press the HOV PWR Softkey a second time to disable the hover performance power
check.
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
Hover
Performance
Parameters
Hover Performance
Power Chec k
Softkey
Out of Ground Effect
Softkey
Figure 3-10 Real Time Hover Performance Power Check (Out of Ground Effect)
Performing a real time hover performance power check (in ground effect):
1) Press the Engine Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the HOV PWR Softkey.
114
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3) Press the IGE (in ground effect) Softkey.
4) Press the HOV PWR Softkey a second time to disable the Hover Performance Power
Check.
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
Hover
Performance
Parameters
Hover Performance
Power Chec k
Softkey
In Ground Effect
Softkey
Figure 3-11 Real Time Hover Performance Power Check (In Ground Effect)
Performing a pre-flight planning hover performance power check (out of ground
effect):
1) Press the Engine Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the HOV PWR Softkey. The OGE (out of ground effect) Softkey is automatically
selected by default.
3) Press the HOV-P Softkey.
4) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor on the first hover
performance parameter.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired parameter.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the value
7) Press the HOV PWR Softkey a second time to disable the hover performance power
check.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
115
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
HOV PRED (Hover
Prediction Mode)
Annunciation
Hover
Performance
Parameters
Hover Performance
Power Chec k
Softkey
Hover Prediction Mode
Softkey
Out of Ground Effect
Softkey
Figure 3-12 Hover Prediction Mode (Out of Ground Effect)
Performing a pre-flight planning hover performance power check (in ground
effect):
1) Press the Engine Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the HOV PWR Softkey.
3) Press the IGE (in ground effect) Softkey.
4) Press the HOV-P Softkey.
5) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor on the first hover
performance parameter.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired parameter.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the value.
8) Press the HOV PWR Softkey a second time to disable the hover performance power
check.
116
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Hover Power
Indicator (HPI)
HOV PRED (Hover
Prediction Mode)
Annunciation
Hover
Performance
Parameters
Hover Performance
P ow e r C h eck )
Softkey
In Ground Effect
Softkey
Hover Prediction Mode
Softkey
Figure 3-13 Hover Prediction Mode (In Ground Effect)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
117
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.5 REVERSIONARY MODE
In a display fails, the other display may be configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD)
symbology together with condensed EIS information (refer to the System Overview for more
information about Reversionary Mode).
EIS
Displays
Figure 3-14 EIS (Reversionary Mode)
118
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel,
communication radios, navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section
provides a block diagram description of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the Bell 407GXi is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
•
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
•
Multi Function Display (MFD)
•
Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
•
Audio Panel
•
Mode S Transponder
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio
selection. The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and
passengers, a marker beacon receiver, and a COM clearance recorder.
The Mode-S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The
data box displays the active four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
119
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 4-1 MFD/PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and DME Tuning
Window
120
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code
identifier audio on and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a
percentage.
2
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
3
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
4
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and
station ID. The frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The
selected COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer
Arrow between COM1 and COM2.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press
and hold this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz)
automatically into the active frequency field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic
squelch on and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by selecting the
DME Softkey.
10 ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME mode and Auto-tune selection.
11 FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to select DME modes, enter
transponder codes, and Auto-tune entries when the DME Tuning Window or NRST Window
is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob
moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the
highlighted cursor location.
12 Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply,
and ident status for the transponder.
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
11
2
3
4
5
12
13
14
15
22
6
7
8
9
16
17
18
19
10
20
21
Figure 4-2 GMA 350Hc Audio Panel Controls
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
1
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker
beacon receiver audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when
the next marker beacon signal is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to
enable/disable monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
3
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to
enable/disable monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
4
COM3 – When selected, audio from the #3 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to
enable/disable monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
5
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
121
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
6
7
122
AUX – When selected, audio from the AUX inputs can be heard.
– Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected
to the Front Panel Jack. Audio from a telephone device connected to the rear of the audio
panel is used if a device is not connected to the Front Panel Jack. Assigns the Bluetooth
device to the
audio source. Press the key until the annunciator turns blue. The
key
annunciator will cycle from OFF to GREEN to BLUE. GREEN selects the wired audio source
and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be
assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source,
the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and GREEN.
8
MUS – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Assigns the Bluetooth device to
the MUS audio source. Press the MUS Key until the annunciator turns blue. The key
annunciator will cycle from OFF to GREEN to BLUE. GREEN selects the wired audio source
and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be
assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source,
the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and GREEN
9
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, intercom squelch is controlled manually.
10
Volume Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
11
Front Panel Jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
12
MIC1 – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard.
COM2 or COM3 receive can be added by pressing the COM2 or COM3 Key. Selection of a
second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode (using COM1/COM2 or COM1/COM3). When
in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered COM, the copilot is using the
higher numbered COM.
13
MIC2 – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard.
COM1 or COM3 receive can be added by pressing the COM1 or COM3 Key. Selection of a
second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode (using COM1/COM2 or COM2/COM3). When
in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered COM, the copilot is using the
higher numbered COM.
14
MIC3 – Selects the #3 transmitter for transmitting. COM3 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #3 COM receiver to be heard.
COM1 or COM2 receive can be added by pressing the COM1 or COM2 Key. Selection of a
second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode (using COM1/COM3 or COM2/COM3). When
in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered COM, the copilot is using the
higher numbered COM.
15
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
16
PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom isolation.
17
COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot
configuration between crew and passenger.
18
PASS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable passenger
muting during reception.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
19
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, MKR, AUX receiver audio and
playback audio can be heard on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger
Address (PA). The SPKR Key flashes during PA.
20
Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing green or blue
annunciator) to the desired source.
21
Volume (VOL) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the
selected source (indicated by the flashing green or blue annunciator). When the volume
control cursor is not active press to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor
is active, press twice (once to cancel the cursor, once more to activate Blue-Select mode).
Press and hold for two seconds to enable the GMA 350Hc as discoverable for pairing. The
Bluetooth Annunciator with flash to indicate that the unit is discoverable. The unit will
remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once a successful
pair is established, the audio “Bluetooth paired” is played.
22
Bluetooth® Connection Annunciator – A flashing green annunciator indicates the unit is
discoverable. A solid green annunciator indicates an active Bluetooth connection.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
123
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TUNING BOXES
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8
Figure 4-3 COM Tuning Box Indications
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used
and the active COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
1
Active Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies
are on the left. An active COM frequency is displayed in green and indicates that the COM
transceiver is selected on the Audio Panel (MIC1 or MIC2 Key). Both active COM frequencies
appearing in white indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting (PA mode is
selected on the Audio Panel).
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields
with the Frequency Tuning Box. Indicates which COM transceiver is selected for frequency
transfer between the Standby and Active fields.
3
Standby Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby
frequencies are on the right. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or
gray. The standby frequency in the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
4
Frequency Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with
the Frequency Transfer Arrow. Indicates which COM transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby
Field.
5
Automatic Squelch Indication – Indicates that Automatic Squelch is disabled. Automatic
Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing
good sensitivity to weak COM signals. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio
reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and speaker, if
selected.
124
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
6
Transmit and Receive Indications – During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the
active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow. During COM signal reception,
a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
7
Frequency Spacing – The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975
MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel
configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing
frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
8
COM Volume – COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ
Knob. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise
decreases volume. When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby
frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after the change.
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
•
Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
•
WPT – Airport Information Page
•
NRST – Nearest Airports Page
•
NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
•
NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports
Window on the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency.
Pressing the Frequency Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
125
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Press the Nearest Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
Figure 4-4 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of
25 nearest airport identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Frequency Field.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active
Frequency Field.
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or
WPT page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing
the FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field
with the ENT Key.
126
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-5 Nearest Pages Menus
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
Runway Information
Press ENT Key to load
frequency into PFD1
COM Standby Field.
Cursor then advances
to the next frequency.
Press INFO 1 Softkey
for AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
Figure 4-6 WPT - Airport Information Page
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST - Nearest Airspaces, NRST - Nearest
Frequencies, and NRST - Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the
appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by
pressing the FMS Knob or pressing the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
127
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected
COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key on the PFD or MFD to transfer the frequency to the
COM Active Frequency Field.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected
COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active
Frequency Field.
FREQUENCY SPACING
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel
spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete
3040-channel list. COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup 1 Page of the Aux Page Group.
While the COM Configuration Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
Figure 4-7 AUX - System Setup 1 Page
128
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the Aux – System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM
Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
129
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV TUNING BOXES
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 4-8 NAV Tuning Box Indications
1
Standby Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby
frequencies are on the left. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or
gray. The standby frequency in the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields
with the Frequency Tuning Box. Indicates which NAV transciever is selected for frequency
transfer between the Standby and Active fields.
3
Active Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies
are on the right. An active NAV frequency is displayed in green. The active NAV radio is
selected by pressing the CDI softkey on the PFD. Both active NAV frequencies appearing in
white indicate that no NAV radio is selected.
4
NAV Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio standby frequency fields with
the Frequency Transfer Arrow. Indicates which NAV transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby
Field. Moving the Frequency Tuning Box is accomplished by pressing the NAV knob on the
PFD.
5
VOR/LOC Morse Code Audio Indication – When the Morse Code Identifier audio is on for
a NAV radio, a white ID replaces the Frequency Transfer Arrow to the left of the active NAV
frequency. In order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns on/off the Morse code audio only in the radio
with the NAV Tuning Box. To turn on/off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between
NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to
turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
6
Decoded Morse Code Station Identifier – The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded
Morse Code station identifier that is received from the navigation source. Audio verification of
the selected station identifier is still required, and can be accomplished by selecting the
corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
7
NAV VOLUME – NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ
Knob. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise
decreases volume. When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby
frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after the change.
130
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The
active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active
NAV frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects
NAV1 as the navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation
radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles
back to NAV1
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for
tuning, the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active
NAV frequency color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
•
VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or
LOC1 is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
•
VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or
LOC2 is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
•
GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and
neither NAV radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the
previously selected NAV standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and
using VOR or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier is still required, and can be
accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV
VOL/ID Knob.
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel.
Pressing the NAV1, NAV2, or AUX Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected
audio can be heard over the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected
individually or simultaneously.
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Rotate the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active
Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
131
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
•
WPT – Airport Information
•
WPT – VOR Information
•
NRST – Nearest Airports
•
NRST – Nearest VOR
•
NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
•
NRST – Nearest Airspaces
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During
enroute navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field.
During approach activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency
field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or
WPT page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by
pressing the FMS Knob or the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the
cursor on the NAV frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV
radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active
Frequency Field.
Press the ENT
Key to load a
highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
Turn the FMS Knob to
scroll through a list of
Frequencies
Figure 4-9 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
132
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key on the MFD control unit to display the
page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV
radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active
Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menu
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The
FMS Knob or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the
FREQ Softkey and loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
133
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Press the VOR Softkey
to place the Cursor
on the VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ Softkey to place the Cursor
on the VOR Frequency
Press the ENT Key to
load the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Figure 4-11 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST - Nearest VOR Page
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST — Nearest Airports, WPT —
Airport Information, WPT — VOR Information, and NRST — Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer
approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated while navigating by GPS, the system
automatically switches to LOC as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of
the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically
transferred to a NAV frequency field as follows:
•
If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1
active frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is
transferred to standby.
•
If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the
NAV1 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
•
If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the
standby frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
134
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and
cannot be turned off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and
detects any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker
beacon annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Figure 4-12 Marker Beacon Key on Audio Panel
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and
Deselected. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key
annunciator indicates when marker beacon audio is selected. Marker beacon audio is not heard when
the annunciator is off or when the annunciator is on with the marker beacon audio muted.
Turning Marker Beacon Audio On
With the MKR/MUTE annunciator off, press the MKR/MUTE Key to enable marker beacon audio.
Muting Marker Beacon Audio
During marker beacon audio reception, press the MKR/MUTE Key to mute the audio. The MKR/
MUTE annunciator remains lit, but the current marker tone is silenced. Audio muting deactivates
automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal is received.
Deselecting Marker Beacon Audio
To deselect marker beacon audio, press the MKR/MUTE Key twice during marker beacon reception
(once to mute, once more to deselect) or once if a marker beacon signal is not detected.
DME TUNING
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is
replaced on the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 NXi for use, the system remembers the last frequency
used for DME tuning and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The system tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a
VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The
DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing
the DME Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
135
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
DME
Modes
Figure 4-13 DME Tuning Window
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
•
NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
•
NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
•
HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry
and reverts back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/
deactivates the cursor in the DME Tuning Window.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
136
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 TRANSPONDER
The Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective
addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
•
Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
•
Surveillance identifier capability
•
Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as
either the aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
•
Altitude reporting
•
Airborne status determination
•
Transponder capability reporting
•
Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
•
Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification
address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose
of acquisition squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic
Avoidance System (TAS) to recognize the presence of Mode S equipped aircraft for selective
interrogation.
•
Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically with or without interrogations.
Extended Squitters contain information such as altitude (barometric and GPS), GPS position, speed
and direction, aircraft information, and aircraft identification. The purpose of the extended squitter is
to provide this information aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers
(GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection,
and Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear:
Standby, On, ALT, VFR, Code, Ident, Back.
When the Code Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Ident, BKSP,
Back. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence
enters the transponder code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection
cursor to the previous digit. Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous
digit.
Pressing the Back Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the
Back Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD. Code entry must be completed with
either the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the Ident Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to
the top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
137
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Figure 4-14 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The Standby, On, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the Standby Softkey. In Standby, the
transponder is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted..
When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field
of the Transponder Data Box.
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-15 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder
replies and squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and
transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on
the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies
to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
138
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
On-Ground On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
Figure 4-16 On Mode
ALTITUDE MODE
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode
enables transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure
altitude information. The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will
appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating
with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call
interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
On-Ground ALT Mode
Airborne ALT Mode
Figure 4-17 Altitude Mode
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in
the reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
139
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Reply to Interrogation
Figure 4-18 Reply Indication
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and
restores the previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code
automatically.
VFR CODE
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR
Softkey. When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed
in the code field of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous
identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required,
contact a Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
Figure 4-19 VFR Code
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit
entry.
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the
next softkey in sequence must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled
and restored to the previous code. Pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection
cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered, the
transponder code becomes active.
140
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Entering a Code
Figure 4-20 Entering a Code
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code
entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-21 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
ADS-B TX
The transponder transmits extended squitters (ADS-B out) on 1090 MHz. For more information on
ADS-B traffic and weather services (ADS-B in), refer to the Hazard Avoidance section.
Transmission of extended squitters containing ADS-B out information is enabled/disabled by
pressing the ADS-B TX Softkey. ADS-B transmission defaults to enabled at each power cycle. Do not
disable ADS-B transmission unless requested to do so by ATC.
Even with the ADS-B TX enabled, transmission of extended squitters containing ADS-B out
information will vary based on the current mode of the transponder.
ADS-B Transmission Enabled
Figure 4-22 ADS-B TX Enabled
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
141
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the Ident Softkey is inoperative.
Pressing the Ident Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The
indication distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s
screen. The Ident Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the Ident Softkey is
pressed, a green Ident indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a
duration of 18 seconds.
After the Ident Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the toplevel softkeys.
Ident Indication
Select the Ident Softkey to
Initiate the ID Function
Figure 4-23 Ident Softkey and Indication
142
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel
annunciator lights illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of
the settings are restored to those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are optional for use in this aircraft.
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) MODE
Press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds to initiate Passenger Address Mode. PA Mode is
annunciated by a rapid blinking of the SPKR annunciator. When in PA Mode the crew can use the PTT
“Push-to-Talk” button to deliver announcements to the passenger headsets.
SPLIT-PA MODE
During Split-PA Mode the pilot can continue to use the radio(s) while the copilot delivers PA
announcements. To initiate Split-PA Mode, first enter Split-COM Mode by pressing more than one
MIC Key simultaneously, then press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds.
INTERCOM
The GMA 350Hc includes a six-position intercom system (ICS), one music input, and one
telephone/entertainment input for the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot,
Copilot, and Passenger audio isolation.
Figure 4-24 Intercom Controls
Press the PILOT, COPLT, and/or PASS Keys to distribute as required. If the annunciators are lit,
those positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit that position is isolated from
the others.
COPILOT CONFIGURED AS CREW OR PASSENGER
NOTE: When the copilot position is configured as a passenger, the COPLT Key is disabled
and the copilot headset is treated as a ‘passenger’ for intercom and entertainment audio
distribution.
The copilot position can be configured as crew (COPLT Key enabled) or as a passenger (COPLT
Key disabled). Pressing and holding the COPLT Key toggles the copilot position configuration
between passenger and crew. The aural message “Copilot Configured as Passenger” or “Copilot
Configured as Crew” is heard.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
143
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM MODES
NOTE: In the following modes the copilot position is configured as crew.
NOTE: In the default ICS configuration, only the pilot and copilot positions can hear aircraft
alerts.
NOTE: When in Split-COM mode, the copilot will only hear alerts and the higher numbered
of the two selected COMs (COM2 or COM3).
ALL INTERCOM MODE
In ‘All Intercom’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other and hear the aircraft
audio.
PILOT ISOLATE MODE
In ‘Pilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot and
Passengers also hear each other.
PASSENGER/CREW ISOLATE MODE
In ‘Passenger/Crew Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio and each other.
The Passengers hear each other.
COPILOT ISOLATE MODE
In ‘Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Pilot and
Passengers also hear each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
ALL ISOLATE MODE
In ‘All Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to
use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
144
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PILOT & COPILOT ISOLATE MODE
In ‘Pilot & Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The
Passengers hear each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
PILOT & PASSENGER ISOLATE MODE
In ‘Pilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers
hear each other.
COPILOT & PASSENGER ISOLATE MODE
In ‘Copilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot can hear the aircraft audio. The
Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
The VOL/CRSR Knob controls selection and volume or manual intercom squelch adjustment for
audio sources that may not be adjustable anywhere else in the system. The small knob controls the
volume or squelch. Turning the large knob activates and/or moves the cursor (flashing green
annunciator or flashing blue annunciator in Blue-Select Mode) to select the audio source to adjust.
The cursor will time-out after a few seconds and the position of the cursor will always default back
to the PILOT Key. Pressing the small knob cancels the cursor.
Off for Automatic Intercom Squelch,
On for Manual Intercom Squelch
Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
Volume or Manual
Intercom Squelch
Cursor
Figure 4-25 Volume/Squelch Control
BLUE-SELECT MODE (TELEPHONE/ENTERTAINMENT DISTRIBUTION)
) audio are distributed using the BlueThe music (MUSIC) and telephone/entertainment (
Select Mode. The following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear the
telephone/entertainment audio.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
145
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Figure 4-26 Blue-Select Mode (Music/Telephone Distribution)
The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pressing the small knob when the volume control cursor
(flashing green annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, press the small knob
twice. The first press will cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select
Mode.
The annunciator over the
Button will be flashing blue. Any combination of the
annunciators over the PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to
turn the blue annunciator on or off to distribute the telephone audio to selected crew/passenger
positions. Turn the large knob to select MUS, and select the crew/passenger positions to receive the
music audio.
will cancel Blue-Select
Selecting any button other than PILOT, COPLT, PASS, MUS or
Mode. Pressing the small knob will also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately ten seconds
with no input, the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel.
ADJUSTING MKR, AUX,
, AND MUS VOLUME
When the cursor is on MKR, AUX,
individual volume of the selected source.
, or MUS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the
ADJUSTING INTERCOM VOLUME
When the cursor is on PILOT, COPLT, or PASS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom
volume for the listener.
ADJUSTING INTERCOM MANUAL SQUELCH
When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold
(the volume level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom).
ADJUSTING SPEAKER VOLUME
When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the
selected sources (COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). This will not affect Alert volume.
146
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER (OPTIONAL)
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected
COM radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of
recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks,
starting from the oldest block.
An optional external Play button controls the play function. Pressing the Play button once plays the
latest recorded memory block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is
detected during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Pressing the optional Play button while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded
memory block. Each subsequent press of the Play button selects the previously recorded memory
block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and
the separation of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM frequencies are too close
together, interference may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over
separate radios. The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, AUX, and MKR Audio as selected, but the
copilot is only able to monitor the higher numbered COM (COM2 or COM3).
Selection of more than one MIC Key selects Split COM operation (using COM1/COM2, COM1/
COM3, or COM2/COM3). The COM1/MIC1, COM2/MIC2, or COM3/MIC3 annunciators are
illuminated indicating Split COM operation. The selected COM frequencies are displayed in green
indicating that both transceivers are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing one of the
selected MIC Keys again.
When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered COM, the copilot is using the
higher numbered COM. The MIC1 or MIC2 (depends on COMs selected for Split-COM) Annunciator
flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The MIC2 or MIC3 (depends on COMs selected
for Split-COM) Annunciator flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
COM1 Radio is Used
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
Figure 4-27 Split COM Operation
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
147
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3D AUDIO
3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear,
3D audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or
seat position.
Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo
intercom and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will
still hear all audio sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation.
With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12
o’clock position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1
o’clock position. All other intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location.
By default, the GMA 350Hc assumes the pilot sits in the right seat. A Garmin authorized service center
can make changes to the default configuration.
ENABLING 3D AUDIO
Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions.
When 3D Audio is enabled, the aural message “3D audio left” is heard in the left ear followed by “3D
audio right” in the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear
respectively, the cause may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a
headset or aircraft wiring problem is suspected.
148
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Symptom(s)
Cause(s)
“3D audio left”
message heard in both
ears.
Or:
“3D audio right”
message not heard
“3D audio left”
message heard in both
ears, followed by “3D
audio right” message
heard in both ears
“3D audio right”
message heard in both
ears. “3D audio left”
not heard
Solutions(s)
1) Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
2) Stereo headset in use
with mono/stereo switch
set to ‘mono’
2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to
‘stereo’
3) Aircraft wiring has left
audio wired to both left
and right channels of stereo
headset jack
3) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see
a service center as soon as possible to
inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault can
cause fail-safe audio not to function.
1) Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
2) Stereo headset in use
with mono/stereo switch
set to mono
2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to
‘stereo’
3) Incorrect aircraft wiring
3) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see
(left/right shorted together) a service center as soon as possible to
inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault can
cause fail-safe audio not to function.
1) Incorrect aircraft wiring
1) See a service center as soon as possible
(right channel used for
to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault
mono instead of left or left/ can cause fail-safe audio not to function.
right swapped)
1) Stereo headset is on
backwards
“3D audio left”
message heard in right
ear only followed by
“3D audio right”
message heard in left
2) Incorrect aircraft wiring
ear only
(left/right channels
swapped)
1) Verify correct orientation from the left/
right indication on each side of the
headset or the position of the boom mic
(usually attached on left side). If the
headset is backwards left/right position
information will be swapped.
2) See a service center as soon as possible
to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault
can cause fail-safe audio not to function.
“3D audio left”
message heard in left
ear only, no audio
heard in right ear.
1) Aircraft wired for mono
intercom
1) See a service center to wire the
installation for stereo headsets.
“3D audio right”
message heard in right
ear only, no audio
heard in left ear
1) Incorrect aircraft wiring
(right channel used for
mono instead of left, or
left/right swapped)
1) See a service center as soon as possible
to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault
can cause fail-safe audio not to function.
Table 4-1 3D Audio Troubleshooting
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
149
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VOICE RECOGNITION
Voice Recognition allows the pilot (and optionally copilot) to control the GMA 350Hc using spoken
commands. To activate Voice Recognition, push and hold the PTC (Push-To-Command) Button while
speaking a command. When the Push-To-Command button is released, the GMA 350Hc will respond.
If a command is correctly interpreted by the GMA 350Hc, a positive acknowledgement chime will be
played, and the pilot should verify that the correct button selection is indicated by the triangular
annunciator lights. Alternatively, some commands will be indicated by a voice response from the GMA
350Hc. If the desired modes are not indicated by annunciator lights or a voice response, the pilot
should repeat the command by using the PTC Button, or by manually using the front panel controls of
the GMA 350Hc.
If a command is incorrectly interpreted by the GMA 350Hc, a negative acknowledgement tone will
be played. The pilot should repeat the command by using the PTC Button, or by manually using the
front panel controls of the GMA 350Hc. In the event of any abnormal Voice Recognition operation, at
any time the front panel controls may be used manually to control the GMA 350Hc.
The following table lists the available Voice Recognition commands, the associated actions, and the
voice response if applicable:
150
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Control
Spoken Command
Action
Confirmation of Action
“COM one”
Toggles COM1
Illuminate/Extinguish COM1
Annunciator
Selects MIC1
Illuminate MIC1 Annunciator
Toggles COM2
Illuminate/Extinguish COM2
Annunciator
Selects MIC2
Illuminate MIC2 Annunciator
Toggles COM3
Illuminate/Extinguish COM3
Annunciator
Selects MIC3
Illuminate MIC3 Annunciator
“Split COM”
Selects split
COM 1/2
Illuminate MIC1/MIC2
Annunciators
“Split COM 1 2”
Selects split
COM 1/2
Illuminate MIC1/MIC2
Annunciators
“Split COM 1 3”
Selects split
COM 1/3
Illuminate MIC1/MIC3
Annunciators
“Split COM 2 3”
Selects split
COM 2/3
Illuminate MIC2/MIC3
Annunciators
“Monitored COM mute” or
“Mute monitored COM”
Mutes
monitored COM
on primary COM
reception
Voice Response: “Monitor
mute enabled”
“Disable monitored COM
mute” or “Monitored COM
mute disable” or “Disable
mute monitored COM” or
“Mute monitored COM
disable”
Disables
monitored COM
mute on primary
COM reception
Voice Response: “Monitor
mute disabled”
“NAV one”
Toggles NAV1
Illuminate/Extinguish NAV1
Annunciator
“NAV two”
Toggles NAV2
Illuminate/Extinguish NAV2
Annunciator
“AUX” or “Auxiliary”
Toggles AUX
Illuminate/Extinguish AUX
Annunciator
“MIC one”
“COM one MIC”
“COM two”
“MIC two”
“COM two MIC”
“COM three”
“MIC three”
“COM three MIC”
COM
NAV
AUX
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
151
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Control
MUSIC
ICS Isolation
152
Spoken Command
Action
Confirmation of Action
“Telephone” or “Phone” or
“Jack”
Toggles
Telephone/Jack
“Telephone mute” or “Phone
mute” or “Jack mute”or
“Mute telephone” or “Mute
phone” or “Mute jack”
Mutes
Telephone/Jack
on radio
reception
Voice Response: “Tel and jack
mute enabled”
“Disable telephone mute” or
“Disable phone mute” or
“Disable jack mute”or
“Telephone mute disable”or
“Phone mute disable” or
“Jack mute disable”
Disables
Telephone/Jack
mute on radio
reception
Voice Response: “Tel and jack
mute disabled”
“MUSIC”
Toggles MUS
Illuminate/Extinguish MUS
Annunciator
“Music mute” or “Mute
Music”
Mutes MUS on
radio reception
Voice Response: “Music mute
enabled”
“Disable Music mute” or
“Music mute disable”
Disables MUS
mute on radio
reception
Voice Response: “Music mute
disabled”
“Pilot”
Toggles PILOT
button
Illuminate/Extinguish PILOT
Annunciator
“Copilot”
Toggles COPLT
button
Illuminate/Extinguish COPLT
Annunciator
“Passenger” or “Pass”
Toggles PASS
button
Illuminate/Extinguish PASS
Annunciator
“Passenger mute” or “Pass
mute” or “Mute passenger”
or “Mute pass”
Mutes
passengers
during radio
reception
Voice Response: “Passenger
mute enabled”
“Disable passenger mute” or
“Disable pass mute” or
“Disable mute passenger” or
“Disable mute pass” or
“Passenger mute disable” or
“Pass mute disable” or “Mute
passenger disable” or “Mute
pass disable”
Disables muting
of passengers
during radio
reception
Voice Response: “Passenger
mute disabled”
Illuminate/Extinguish
Annunciator
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Control
Copilot
Configuration
Manual
Squelch
Spoken Command
Action
Confirmation of Action
“Copilot is passenger” or
“Copilot is pass”
Configures
Copilot as a
passenger
Voice Response: “Copilot is
passenger”
“Copilot is crew”
Configures
Copilot as flight
crew
Voice Response: “Copilot is
crew”
“Manual squelch” or “Man
squelch”
Toggles manual
squelch
Illuminate/Extinguish MAN SQ
Annunciator
“Manual squelch threshold
up” or “Manual squelch
volume up” or “Man squelch
threshold up” or “Man
squelch volume up”
Increases manual
squelch
threshold
Manual squelch threshold
increased
“Manual squelch threshold
down” or “Manual squelch
volume down” or “Man
squelch threshold down” or
“Man squelch volume down”
Decreases
manual squelch
threshold
Manual squelch threshold
decreased
NOTE: Finer manual squelch adjustment may be made using the dual concentric
knobs on the GMA 350H. The voice command “Up” or “Down” is equivalent to
three clicks of the inner knob.
Speaker
(SPKR)
“Speaker”
Toggles SPKR
on/off
Illuminate/Extinguish SPKR
Annunciator
PA
“P - A”
Toggles PA
on/off
SPKR Annunciator blinks in PA
mode
“Marker” or “Mute marker”
or “Marker mute”
Marker Beacon
audio on/off
(refer to Marker
Beacon section
for details)
Illuminate/Extinguish MKR/
MUTE Annunciator
Marker
Beacon (MKR/
MUTE)
COM
Clearance
Recorder
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Plays recorded
clearance audio
(refer to
“Play” or “Read back” or “Say
again”
Clearance
Recorder section
for details)
Recorded audio playing
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
153
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Control
Volume
Adjustments
Spoken Command
Action
Confirmation of Action
“(*Desired selection) volume
up”
Increases volume
of desired
selection
Volume of desired selection
increased
“(*Desired selection) volume
down”
Decreases
volume of
desired selection
Volume of desired selection
decreased
NOTE: Finer volume adjustment may be made using the dual concentric knobs
on the GMA 350Hc. The voice command “Up” or “Down” is equivalent to three
click of the inner knob.
* Desired selection = “speaker”, “pilot”, “copilot”, “passenger”, “pass”, “marker”,
“aux”, “auxiliary”, “telephone”, “phone”, “jack”, or “music”.
Distribution
(Blue Mode)
“Distribute telephone to
(**desired position(s))” or
“Distribute phone to
(**desired position(s))” or
“Distribute jack to (**desired
position(s))”
Distributes TEL/
JACK to desired
positions
TEL/JACK audio heard at
desired position(s)
“Distribute music to
(**desired position(s))”
Distributes
MUSIC to
desired
position(s)
MUSIC heard at desired
position(s)
** Desired position(s) = “All”, “none”, “pilot”, “copilot”, “passenger”, “pass”, or
any combination of pilot, copilot, passenger, or pass.
Cursor
“Cursor off” or “Cursor
cancel” or “Cancel cursor”
Cancels cursor
when cursor is
flashing
Cursor is removed
“Three-D audio”
Enables 3D
audio
Voice Response: “Three-D
audio left, three-D audio
right”
“Standard audio”
Enables standard
audio (disables
3D audio)
Voice Response: “Standard
Audio”
3D Audio
Table 4-2 Voice Recognition Commands
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
The Audio Panel provides controls for one stereo music input and one stereo telephone/
entertainment input.
•
The telephone/entertainment ( ) Key controls a telephone or entertainment device connected to
the rear of the audio panel or to the Front Panel Jack.
•
The MUS Key controls the SiriusXM Radio audio input.
154
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The Front Panel Jack can be used as an entertainment input or a telephone input (in which case, it
operates simultaneously with the rear telephone interface). The Front Panel Jack is a 3.5-mm stereo
jack that is compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3s, CD players, and
cell phones. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the Front Panel
Jack.
Distribution of the entertainment inputs is configured in Blue-Select Mode.
TELEPHONE/ENTERTAINMENT INPUT
Telephone/entertainment (
the distribution configured.
) input can be heard by the pilot, copilot, or the passengers based on
SIRIUSXM RADIO AUDIO INPUT
SiriusXM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver (optional: requires subscription to SiriusXM
Radio Service) can be heard by the pilot, copilot, or the passengers based on the distribution
configured. Refer to the Additional Features section for more details on the Data Link Receiver.
INPUT MUTING
Muting occurs when alerts, aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard.
BLUETOOTH®
NOTE: Pairing is only necessary during the first attempt to connect a Bluetooth device to the
GMA 350Hc. Once paired, the GMA 350Hc and the device will connect automatically.
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH DEVICE WITH THE GMA 350HC
Press and hold the inner knob for two seconds. The Bluetooth Annunciator flashes to indicate the
unit is discoverable and the aural message “Bluetooth discoverable” is heard. The GMA 350Hc will
remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once paired, the
Bluetooth Annunciator turns steady blue and the aural message “Bluetooth connected/paired” is
heard.
ASSIGNING AN AUDIO SOURCE TO THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
or MUS key until the annunciator turns blue (the audio from the Bluetooth source
Press the
will not be heard until this step is complete). The key annunciator cycles OFF-GREEN-BLUE.
GREEN selects the wired audio source. BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. The BLUE source
assignment will persist through Bluetooth audio connection disruptions.
NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the
Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources
will only cycle between OFF and GREEN.
Bluetooth audio will maintain a separate volume level and Blue Select distribution from the wired
audio source. If the Bluetooth connection is supporting a phone call, all intercom positions listening
to that source can also speak on the call through the headset MICs.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
155
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ADDITIONAL BLUETOOTH CONTROL FUNCTIONS
In addition to the 2 second press and hold of the inner knob discussed above, the knob has two
additional functions that are intended to be seldom or never used. The following functions are
available if needed for troubleshooting:
•
Press and hold the inner knob for 5 seconds to turn off the Bluetooth radio. The aural message
“Bluetooth off” is heard. This function electrically turns off the radio, not just the audio source
selection. In the event that Bluetooth radio interference with communication or navigation
equipment is suspected, the Bluetooth radio can be powered off without powering off the entire
audio panel. A subsequent 5 second press and hold turns the radio back on.
•
Press and hold the inner knob for 10 seconds to clear the memory of paired devices (up to 10 are
stored). Once cleared, the aural message “Bluetooth list cleared” is heard. This function is used as
a troubleshooting method when a device is not pairing, or to remove a device that is no longer
needed.
156
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume
control knob, verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the
headsets are at maximum volume setting. On single-pilot flights, verify that all other headsets
are not connected to avoid excess noise in the audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot
and copilot. If manual squelch is set to full open, background noise is heard in the ICS system
as well as during COM transmissions.
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind
the notes above.
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT , COPLT and PASS annunciators are lit.
2) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
3) Use the VOL/CRSR Knobs to adjust the intercom volumes to the desired level.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
157
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Abnormal operation of the system includes equipment failures of the system components and failure
of associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the PTT Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
The MIC1, MIC2 or MIC3 Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key
remains stuck.
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically
tuned in the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may
appear on the frequency display.
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset (left ear only if
stereo) and microphone directly to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during
Fail-safe operation.
158
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This
section of the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: one Primary Flight Display
(PFD) and a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using
the GPS sensors is displayed on the PFD and the MFD. A brief description of the GPS navigation data on
the PFD follows.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight
plan phase (e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV
Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V,
and LPV approach service levels are only available with SBAS.
The Inset Map and HSI Map are small versions of the Navigation Map. The Inset Map is displayed in
the lower left corner of the PFD (lower right during reversionary mode), and the HSI Map is displayed
in the center of the HSI. The Inset Map and the HSI Map may each be referred to as the PFD Map. A
PFD Map is displayed by pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing
either the Inset Map or HSI Map Softkey. Pressing the Map Off Softkey removes the PFD Map.
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data
(e.g., cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard
data (e.g., traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the PFD Map can be reduced by
pressing the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed
data for the Navigation Map can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation
Map can be oriented three different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up
(HDG UP).
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated
present position. The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations.
The basemap upon which these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative
position of the aircraft to map features is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown
is shown as a magenta line on the navigation map. The other legs are shown in white.
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is indicated
in the upper left corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To
change the map range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or
clockwise to zoom out (+, increasing).
The Direct To Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports
Window can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed
in detail later in the section.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
159
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Navigation Status Box
Heading Bug
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD Inset Map
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD Inset Map
Navigation Mode
Current Track Indicator
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
HSI Map
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD HSI Map
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD HSI Map
160
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Navigation Data Bar
Display Title
Map Orientation
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Map Page
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX AND DATA BAR
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
•
Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
•
Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD Status Box are:
Symbol
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Description
Symbol
Description
Active Leg
Left Holding
Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure
Turn
Right DME Arc/
Radius to Fix Leg
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
161
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Left Procedure
Turn
Description
Left DME Arc/
Radius to Fix Leg
Right Holding
Pattern
Table 5-1 PFD Status Box Symbols
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one
of the following items:
BRG
Bearing
FOD
DEST
Destination Airport Identifier
GS
Ground Speed
DIS
Distance
ISA
Temperature at Standard Pressure
DTG
Distance to Go
LDG
ETA at Final Destination
DTK
Desired Track
MSA
Minimum Safe Altitude
END
Endurance
TAS
True Airspeed
ENR
ETE to Final Destination
TKE
Track Angle Error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
TRK
Track
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
VSR
Vertical Speed Required
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
XTK
Cross-Track Error
FLT
Flight Timer
Fuel over Destination
Table 5-2 MFD Data Bar Field Items
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the ‘MFD Data Bar
Fields’ Box on the ‘Aux-System Setup 1’ Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS,
DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the ‘MFD Data Bar
Fields’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the
desired data.
5) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
162
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system
maps can display the following information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (present position)
• Obstacle data
• Map Pointer information (distance and
bearing to pointer, location of pointer,
name, and other pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
• Topography scale and data
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (‘Map’)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (‘WPT’)
• Trip Planning Page (‘Aux’)
• All Nearest Group Pages (‘NRST’)
• Flight Plan Pages (‘FPL’)
• Direct To Window
• PFD Maps
• Procedure Loading Pages
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining
aircraft position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are
relative to where the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the
upper left corner of the map.
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
163
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
•
North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
•
Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
•
Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
The Auto North Up setting configures the map to switch automatically to a north up orientation
when the map range reaches a minimum range.
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the
map does not show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other
displays that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Map Settings
Selection
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
North Up Above Field
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Menu Window - Map Group
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Menu Window - Map Group
164
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Map Settings’ Window. Select the ‘Map’ group if
necessary.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ Field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the
range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP RANGE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is
indicated in the upper left corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the
map. When the map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to
accurately represent the map, a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change
the map range turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the
range
NOTE: Since the PFD Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are
removed on the PFD Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map
Settings pages (e.g., a setting of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD
navigation maps, while the PFD Map removes the same item at 50 nm).
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
165
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Auto Zoom On
Figure 5-9 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly
showing the active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick,
and remains until the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off,
or the manual override times out (timer set on ‘Map Settings’ Window). Auto zoom is suspended
while the map pointer is active.
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map
range clearly showing the potential impact areas If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page
capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto
zoom range based on the active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of
the ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look
forward’ times (set on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the ‘Map’ Group). These settings determine the
minimum and maximum distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
•
Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many
details on the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to
a value that limits the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
•
Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where
situational awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a
value that limits the auto zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational
awareness.
•
Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and
decrease as waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/
minimum times can be adjusted.
•
The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the Map Group) determines
how long auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of
this time, the auto zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual
override to never time out.
166
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
•
When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum
range available (1000 nm).
•
When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ On/Off Field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS
Knob.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the
‘Auto Zoom’ display selection field.
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘All’ using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max
Look FWD’ Field. Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the ‘Max Look FWD’ time. Press the ENT Key.
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99
minutes).
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
•
View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
•
Highlight and select locations on the map
•
Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
•
Designate locations for use in flight planning
•
View airspace and airway information
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map
display. A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position
of the pointer, the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the
elevation of the land at the position of the pointer.
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned
and there has been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to
centered on the aircraft position and the flashing pointer is removed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
167
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Map Pointer Information
Map Pointer
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name
was not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map
display, pertinent information is displayed.
Information about Point
of Interest
Map Pointer on
POI
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
168
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace
information is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Panning the map:
1) Push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s
current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the
Map Pointer and place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘WPT - Waypoint Information’ Page for the selected
waypoint.
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘WPT - Waypoint
Information’ Page and return to the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
Reviewing information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the
Map Pointer and place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an
airspace. (As the Map Pointer crosses the airspace boundary, the boundary is
highlighted and airspace information is shown.)
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to
display the ‘Information’ Window for the selected airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘Information’ Window.
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation
map may be calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page
menu. The bearing and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to
aid in graphically identifying points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for
the Measure Pointer is provided in a window at the top of the navigation map.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
169
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
Measurement Line
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed).
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ Field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present
position.
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing
and distance are displayed at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer
position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes the starting point for
measuring.
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop
Measuring’ from the ‘Page Menu’ Window and press the ENT Key.
TOPOGRAPHY
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation,
similar to aviation sectional charts. The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which
topographic data is displayed.
Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures.
Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable VSD Inset at the bottom of the navigation
map. In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand
side of the map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
170
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
Topographic Data
on VSD Inset
TOPO On
TOPO Off
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Absolute Terrain On
Terrain Off
Figure 5-14 PFD Inset Map - Terrain Data
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - Topography Scale
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
171
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation
maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data
from the navigation map. When topographic data is removed from the page, all
navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data
from the navigation map. When topographic data is removed from the page, all
navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ Field.
6) Select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range Field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the
range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
172
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ Field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP SYMBOLS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type
of symbol can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The
decluttering of the symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Default Range (nm)
Max Range (nm)
User Waypoint
25
40
Highways and Roads
N/A
N/A
Interstate Highway
(Freeway)
50
400
International Highway
(Freeway)
50
400
US Highway (National
Highway)
15
150
State Highway (Local
Highway)
2.5
100
4
25
Railroads (RAILROAD)
7.5
25
Large City (> 200,000)
100
1000
Medium City (>
50,000)
50
400
Small City (> 5,000)
25
100
Local Road (Local
Road)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Symbol
N/A
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
173
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Land Symbols
Symbol
Default Range (nm)
Max Range (nm)
State/Province
400
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/Longitude
(LAT/LON)
1
1000
Table 5-3 Land Symbol Information
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Default
Range (nm)
Max Range
(nm)
Large Airport (Longest
Runway >8100 ft)
100
1000
Medium Airport (8100 ft >
Longest Runway >5000 ft)
50
400
25
150
1.5
5
7.5
150
N/A
N/A
Intersection (INT)
25
40
Non-directional Beacon
(NDB)
25
50
VOR
50
250
N/A
N/A
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
25
1000
Temporary Flight Restriction
(TFR)
250
1000
VNAV Constraints
1000
1000
Aviation Symbols
Symbols
Small Airport (Longest
Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a
tower frequency)
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
See Additional Features
Runway Extension
Missed Approach Preview
On/Off (Missed APR)
VOR Compass Rose On/Off
N/A
N/A
Table 5-4 Aviation Symbol Information
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
174
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Symbol
Default
Range (nm)
Max Range
(nm)
Smart Airspace On/Off
N/A
N/A
N/A
Airspace Altitude Labels (Airspace
ALT LBL) On/Off:
N/A
N/A
N/A
Airspace Symbols
•
Class B Airspace
Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
N/A
N/A
•
Class C Airspace
Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
50
150
50
100
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
10
100
Alert/Prohibited/Restricted/Warning
Areas (RESTRICTED)
50
100
Military Operations Area
[MOA(MILITARY)]
50
250
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone
(OTHER/ADIZ)
50
250
Class D Airspace
Altitude Label (ceiling)
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/
TMA)
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/
TCA)
•
Table 5-5 Airspace Symbol Information
SYMBOL SETUP
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway
extensions, railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which
items appear on the display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on
the map extending from each runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or
below the value of the map settings option.
Setting up the Land, Aviation or Airspace group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the
‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
175
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map
information. The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu
Option.
The following table lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents
map items decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
Detail 2
Detail 1
Data Link Radar Precipitation
X
Data Link Lightning
X
Graphical METARs
X
Airports
X
Safe Taxi
X
Runway Labels
X
TFRs
X
Restricted
X
MOA (Military)
X
Intersections
X
X
NDBs
X
X
VORs
X
X
VRPs
X
X
User Waypoints
X
X
Latitude/Longitude Grid
X
X
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
X
X
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
X
X
Class B Airspaces/TMA
X
X
Class C Airspaces/TCA
X
X
Class D Airspaces
X
X
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
X
X
Obstacles
X
X
X
X
Cities
176
Detail 3
X
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Item
Detail 3
Detail 2
Detail 1
Roads
X
X
X
Railroads
X
X
X
State/Province Boundaries
X
X
X
Table 5-6 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
Decluttering the MFD Map:
Press the Detail Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter
level is shown. With each softkey press, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection,
another level of map information is removed.
AIRWAYS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in
places other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low
Altitude Airways (Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend
up to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before
the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to
45,000 feet MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are
drawn in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of
Low Altitude Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and
Intersections) are also displayed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
177
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
Figure 5-16 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY
Softkey presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway
range can also be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below
a specific number.
The following items are configured on the airways menu:
Default Range
(nm)
Maximum Range
(nm)
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T
Routes)
50
100
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q
Routes)
50
100
Airways Symbols
Symbol
Table 5-7 Airways Symbol Information
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AWY LO).
178
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AWY HI).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed
(AWY Off).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ On/Off Field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range Field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
Navigation maps can display some additional items. These items (e.g. track vector, wind vector, fuel
range ring, SVT field of view, and selected altitude intercept arc) can be displayed/removed
individually.
TRACK VECTOR
The map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is
selectable (30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the
track vector. The track vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time
settings. It is always a straight line for the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
179
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Track Vector
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map - Track Vector
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the
selected altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or
descending.
Selected
Altitude
Intercept Arc
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
WIND VECTOR
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector
information is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for
wind speeds greater than or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the
Waypoint Information pages.
FUEL RANGE RING
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green
circle indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance
range. If only reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
180
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
Total Endurance Range
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of
view. The field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol
on the map. This is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Field of View
Setting up additional Map group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
181
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
If it is a data field, use the FMS Knob to select the range or time value.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
182
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.3 WAYPOINTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions,
and are used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint
Information (WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This
auto-tuning feature simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
section for details on auto-tuning.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by
entering the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the
system. As a waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the Spell’N’Find feature scrolls
through the database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to
that point. A direct-to navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to
Key on any of the waypoint pages.
Identifier Entry Field
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
Waypoint Location
Figure 5-22 Waypoint Information Window
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by
continuing to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an
identifier, a ‘Duplicate Waypoints’ Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
183
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Identifier with
Duplicates
Duplicate
Waypoints
Duplicate Message
Figure 5-23 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
AIRPORTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot
needs to be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from
the Airport Information Page Map.
The ‘Airport Information’ Page is the first page in ‘WPT’ page group and allows the pilot to view
airport information, load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review
instrument procedures that may be involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on loading frequencies (auto-tuning). After engine startup, the ‘Airport
Information Page’ defaults to the airport where the aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been
loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple airports, it defaults to the
airport which is the current active waypoint.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport
Information Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airport’, ‘Runways’, and
‘Frequencies’. For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This
information is viewed on the ‘Airport Information’ Page by pressing the Info Softkey until ‘1’ is
displayed.
184
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
Airport/Runway
Diagram
Figure 5-24 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
•
Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
•
Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
•
Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
•
COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information
available)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
185
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Airport Information
Airport Directory
Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Figure 5-25 Airport Directory Page Example
The airport directory information is viewed on the ‘Airport Directory’ Page by pressing the Info
Softkey until ‘2’ is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if
available) on the ‘Airport Directory’ Page:
•
Airport: Identifier, Site Number, Name, City, State
•
Traffic Pattern Altitudes (TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
•
Runway: Headings, Length, Width, Obstructions, Surface
•
Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
•
Weather: Service Type, Frequency, Phone Number
•
Obstructions: General Airport Obstructions
•
Hours: Facility Hours, Light Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon Hours
•
Flight Service Station (FSS): FSS Name, Phone Numbers
•
Special Operations at Airport
•
Location: Sectional, Magnetic Variation
•
Instrument Approaches: Published Approach, Freq.
•
Services Available: Category, Specific Service
•
Frequencies: Type/Frequency
•
NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier, Frequency, Radial, Distance
•
Notes: Airport Notes
186
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
•
Transportation: Ground Transportation Type Available
•
Noise: Noise Abatement Procedures
•
Pilot Controlled Lighting: High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
•
Approach: Approach Facility Name, Frequency, Frequency Parameter
•
Charts: Low Altitude Chart Number
•
FBO: Type, Frequencies, Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
The airport ‘Frequencies’ Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Communication Frequencies
Approach *
Arrival *
ASOS
ATIS
AWOS
Center
Class B *
Class C *
Clearance
Control
CTA *
Departure *
Gate
Ground
Helicopter
Multicom
Other
Navigation Frequencies
Pre-taxi
Radar
Ramp
Terminal *
TMA *
Tower
TRSA *
Unicom
ILS
LOC
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-8 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page.
See the Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be
selected for display (see the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey), press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) displayed, press the FMS
Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway
designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the
selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
187
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Viewing a destination airport:
From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) press the MENU Key. Select
‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination Airport is displayed.
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest
airport information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The ‘Nearest Airports’ Window
displays a list of up to 25 of the nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there
are more than three they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available,
“None Within 200nm” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
Nearest Softkey
Figure 5-26 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
Pressing the ENT Key while the Nearest Airports Window is shown displays the PFD ‘Airport
Information’ Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the ENT Key again returns to the ‘Nearest
Airports’ Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued presses of the ENT Key
sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
- Lat/Long
Figure 5-27 Airport Information Window on PFD
188
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the
Airport Information Window.
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on
‘BACK’) or press the CLR Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest
airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves through the airport list,
alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential
use in the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected
airport and surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled
‘Nearest Airports’, ‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’, and ‘Approaches’.
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the
navigation map from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one
runway, up to three frequencies, and up to four approaches are visible at one time. If there are more
than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text
indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
See the Audio Panel & CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for
approaches.
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
Nearest Airport
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Window Selection
Softkeys
Figure 5-28 Nearest Airport Page
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
189
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Nearest Airports’ Page (it is the first page of the
group, so it may already be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, ‘None
Within 200nm’ is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight
‘Select Airport Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest
Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves
to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) 1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press
the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor
is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
2) 2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) 3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The ‘Nearest Airports’ Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and
surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports
Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small
runways or runways that are not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are
3000 feet (or meters) for runway length and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface and minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Runway Surface’ Field in the ‘Nearest
Airport’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/
Soft).
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Minimum Length’ Field in the ‘Nearest
Airport’ Box.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and
press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not
necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection
Information Page displays information about the VOR which is nearest to the selected intersection.
Intersection Identifier
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-29 Intersection Information Page
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path.
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
191
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Intersection Information
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Nearest
Intersection
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Figure 5-30 Nearest Intersection Page
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the ‘WPT - Intersection Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier in the
‘Intersection’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Intersections’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest INT’
Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
NDB
The NDB Information Page displays a information for the selected NDB and a map of the
surrounding area. This page also provides the NDB Frequency and information for the airport nearest
to the NDB.
192
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-31 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon
installed in conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is
at the Outer Marker; when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find an NDB close to the flight path. A white arrow
before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. In addition to displaying a map of the
surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs. The list only includes
waypoints that are within 200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no
nearest NDBs is displayed, and the information and frequency fields are dashed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
193
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
NDB Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
NDB
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
Nearest NDB
NDB Frequency
Figure 5-32 Nearest NDB Page
Selecting an NDB:
1) With the ‘WPT - NDB Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the
NDB, or the city in which it’s located in the ‘NDB’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest NDB’
Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
VOR
The VOR Information Page displays information for the selected VOR and a map of the surrounding
area. This page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS navigation signals, or to quickly
auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency.
Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined
with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only
DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
194
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Selected VOR
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-33 VOR Information Page
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. A white arrow
before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Also, a NAV frequency from a selected VOR
station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of the surrounding
area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations. The list only
includes waypoints that are within 200 nm. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information is
dashed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
195
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR
VOR Frequency
Figure 5-34 Nearest VOR Page
Selecting a VOR:
1) With the ‘WPT - VOR Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the
VOR, or the city in which it’s located in the ‘VOR’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR
Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’
Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’
Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
196
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
VRP
The VRP Information Page dispays information about the selected visual reporting point (VRPs) and
a map of the surrounding area.
VRP Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected VRP
- VRP Name
VRP Information
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
Selected VRP
Figure 5-35 VRP Information Page
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. A white arrow before
the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. In addition to displaying a map of the surrounding area,
the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs. The list only includes VRPs that
are within 200 nm. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
197
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
VRP Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest VRP
Nearest VRP
VRP Information
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
Figure 5-36 Nearest VRP Page
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the ‘WPT - VRP Information’ Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of
the VRP in the ‘VRP’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VRP’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VRP’
Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
USER WAYPOINTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created
from any map page (except PFD Maps, Aux-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a
position on the map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a
bearing/distance from an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and
longitude. Once a waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user
waypoints are erased upon system power down.
198
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
User Waypoint Info
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Waypoint
Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
Figure 5-37 User Waypoint Information Page
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
User Waypoint Info
Selected User
Waypoint
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-38 Nearest User Waypoint Page
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
199
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter the name of the User
Waypoint, or scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box using the
large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest User WPTS’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest User’
Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Creating user waypoints from the User WPT Information Page:
1) Press the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new
waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two
reference waypoint identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the
FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the
reference waypoint identifier, the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude
and longitude into the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the
cursor to ‘Temporary’ and selecting the ENT Key to check the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
200
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user
waypoint AAAAAA?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two
reference waypoint identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the
FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the
reference waypoint identifier, the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude
and longitude into the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the
cursor to ‘Temporary’ and selecting the ENT Key to check the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the
desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page is displayed with the
captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens
upon pressing the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of
initiating a new waypoint, 2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’
or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new waypoint is initiated with the default name being the
selected map item.
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is
highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two
reference waypoint identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the
FMS Knobs.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
201
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the
reference waypoint identifier, the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude
and longitude into the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by
moving the cursor to ‘Temporary’ and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the
box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Once a user waypoint has been created, it may be edited, renamed, or deleted. A system generated
comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing, and distance. If
a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint
information page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power
cycle.
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate
the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, if required, and press the ENT
Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Renaming user waypoints:
1) With the ‘WPTS - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a user waypoint in
the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box. Press the Rename Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a new name.
202
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA
to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter a waypoint name or
select the waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter a waypoint name or
select the waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to
define the waypoint.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the ‘WPT - User WPT
Information’ Page.
Deleting a single user waypoint:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in
the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Press the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘YES’ is highlighted in the confirmation
window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
203
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in
the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting all user waypoints:
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in
the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
204
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.4 AIRSPACES
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D,
Restricted, MOA (Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary
Flight Restriction (TFR). For detailed information concerning TFRs, see the Hazard Avoidance Section.
Display settings for airspace altitude lables and airspace boundaries are selected from the ‘Airspace’
Group in the ‘Map Settings’ Window. See Table 5-5 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of
airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
205
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
Airspace Altitude Label
Class D Airspace
Alert Area
Class C Airspace
ADIZ
Warning Area
Figure 5-39 Airspace
In addition, a selected frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest
Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the
Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in four boxes labeled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace
Agency’, ‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’. Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in
206
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The Alerts and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the
respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Airspace Alerts Info
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace 1
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Airspace 2
Airspace 3
Softkeys
Figure 5-40 Nearest Airspace Page
The Airspace Alerts Box (Aux - System Setup 1 Page) on the MFD allows the pilot to turn the
controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the
Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page. It simply turns
on/off the message provided in the Alerts Window on the PFD when the aircraft is approaching or near
an airspace. An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an
airspace. For example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below
an airspace, an alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an
airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the
altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Pressing the PFD Alerts/Message Softkey displays the Alerts Window on the PFD. The following
airspace alerts are displayed in the Alerts Window:
Message
Comments
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less
than 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft
penetrates the airspace within 10 minutes.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
207
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Message
Comments
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft
position.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft
position.
2 nm.
Table 5-9 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
Displaying and removing airspace altitude labels:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace’ Group, if necessary, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace ALT LBL’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ to display labels and ‘Off’ to remove labels.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude Buffer’ Field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’
Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to
turn the alert Off.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
208
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Use the FMS Knob on the MFD to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page.
2) Press the Alerts Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight
‘Select Alerts Window’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace
Alerts’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The
function does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the
airspace. If the current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the
airspace boundary is shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the
vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
Figure 5-41 Smart Airspace
Turning smart airspace on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Group’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to
turn smart airspace Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
209
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.5 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key, is quicker to use than a
flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present
position to the selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced
with a new direct-to or flight plan, or cancelled.
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the
path) from the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is
based on barometric altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The ‘Direct To’ Window
displays selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Map of Selected Point
Desired Course
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
Figure 5-42 Direct-To Window - MFD
210
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
Activation Command
Figure 5-43 Direct-To Window - PFD
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the ‘Direct To’ Window. Also, any
waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the ‘Direct To’
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
Figure 5-44 Waypoint Submenu
The Direct To Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to
navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the
active flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any
WPT page defaults to the displayed waypoint.
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The
course to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘Course’) on the Direct To
Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan
waypoint as the default selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it
counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to
remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the facility name, or city field and turn
the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate entries exist
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
211
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window
is displayed with the active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints
(the FPL list is populated only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window on
the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan
destination as the default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints
(the FPL list is populated only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired
waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected waypoint as
the direct-to destination.
212
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘NRST -
Nearest Airports’ Page on the MFD and press the FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the destination field
highlighted.
2) Highlight the ‘Course’ Field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the cursor flashing in
the ‘Ident, Facility, City’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no
airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named
‘MAPWPT’ is automatically created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, VRP, or user waypoint, the
waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected point
entered as the direct-to destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
213
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active,
the system resumes navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path)
from the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the
waypoint, or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All
VNV altitudes prior to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful
activation of a direct-to destination that is part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the
direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more information regarding
the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ Box altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an
airport, an additional choice is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or
‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
5) The cursor is now flashing in the ‘VNV’ Box offset distance field.
6) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
214
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time,
adding waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed.
The system allows flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight
plan is displayed on maps using different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the
segment of the flight plan currently being flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed
approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
Roll Steering Path †
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering
path. When a future roll steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll
steering path.
Table 5-10 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. Upon
power up, the previously active flight plan is retained and automatically repopulated if the aircraft
position is at the origin airport and the aircraft is on the ground. If, however, the aircraft is not at the
origin, on the ground, or if more than 12 hours have passed since the last active flight plan modification,
the previously active flight plan is not retained. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes
the active flight plan. The active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When
storing flight plans with an approach, departure, or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information
from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system
automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified. If an approach,
departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the affected stored
flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that one or
more stored flight plans need to be edited.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of
approach, departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line
describing the instrument procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan
remains active (unless an instrument procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
215
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded
from the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the
sequence of waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the
database is updated). The update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway
waypoints are changed to regular (non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see
Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
•
Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
•
Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no
longer on the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
•
Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
•
Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
•
Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
•
Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Deviation
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
Figure 5-45 Active Flight Plan Page
216
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan
Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
Figure 5-46 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Figure 5-47 Flight Plan Catalog Page
The active flight plan is listed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is
shown on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page on the
MFD, and are available for activation (becomes the active flight plan).
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key. Press the small FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
2) Select the origin airport and runway.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
217
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier
using the FMS Knob.
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the departure waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field
highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
3) Repeat step number 2 for the destination airport and runway.
4) Select the enroute waypoints.
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute
header is selected, the new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute
waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new waypoint will be placed ahead of the
selected item).
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the waypoint. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is
entered.
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor (if
required).
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) From the MFD, press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and
press the ENT Key to display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier
using the FMS Knob.
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the departure
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field
highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
5) Repeat step number 4 for the destination airport and runway.
218
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6) Select the enroute waypoints.
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute
header is selected, the new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute
waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new waypoint will be placed ahead of the
selected item.)
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The stored flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight
Plan Page.
Under certain conditions, the following messages may appear when a flight plan is imported or
exported from or to an SD card. Some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
Description
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully
imported as a stored flight plan.
‘File contained user waypoints only. User The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight
waypoints imported successfully. No
plan, only user waypoints. These waypoints have been
stored flight plan data was modified.’
saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
stored in the system have been modified.
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
‘Flight plan import failed.’
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the
SD card.
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported
from the SD card, however others had errors and were
not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight
plan, only user waypoints. One or more of these
waypoints did not import successfully.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’ The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints
than the system can support. The flight plan was
imported with as many waypoints as possible.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
219
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
Description
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more
locked.’
waypoints that the system cannot find in the navigation
database. The flight plan has been imported, but must
be edited within the system before it can be activated for
use.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
loaded.’
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user
waypoints. The quantity of stored user waypoints has
exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user
waypoints on the SD card have been imported. Any
flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited
within the system before it can be activated for use.
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed
when imported due to naming conflicts with waypoints
already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the
SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to
the SD card. The SD card may not have sufficient
available memory or the card may have been removed
prematurely.
Table 5-11 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and
press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be
displayed.
Or:
If an existing flight plan is selected, an ‘Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL’
prompt is displayed. Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan
and see the list of available flight plans on the SD card. If overwriting the existing flight
plan is not desired, select ‘CANCEL’ using the FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, select
another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
220
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name
of a waypoint already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the
imported waypoint with those of the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the
imported waypoint is automatically renamed by adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Export Flight Plan’.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the
left to highlight the name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new
name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
MOBILE DEVICE/FLIGHT STREAM 510 FLIGHT PLAN TRANSFER
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Flight Stream 510 Bluetooth
wireless connection. Transfer of a flight plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device.
Refer to fly.garmin.com for more information.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
221
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
Pending Flight Plan
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
Preview Softkey
Ignore Softkey
Figure 5-48 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
Pending Flight Plan
Store? or Activate?
Selection
Delete Softkey
Store Softkey
Activate Softkey
Figure 5-49 Preview Flight Plan Page
222
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Previewing a pending flight plan transfer from a mobile device:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight
Plan pop-up alert appears in the lower right corner of the MFD, and a Connext
annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
Press the Preview Softkey to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Ignoring a pending flight plan transfer from a mobile device:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight
Plan pop-up alert appears in the lower right corner of the MFD, and a Connext
annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The
pending flight plan will still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
Or:
Press the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight
plan. The pending flight plan will still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
Storing a pending flight plan from a mobile device:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
6) Press the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and
the pending annunciation is removed.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
223
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the
pending annunciation is removed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the
pending annunciation is removed.
Activating a pending flight plan from a mobile device:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight
Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page.
4) Press the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The
pending flight plan becomes the active flight plan and is removed from the Flight Plan
Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting a pending flight plan transferred from a mobile device:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
224
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5) Press the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The
pending flight plan is removed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request,
press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting all pending flight plans transferred from a mobile device:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation Window is
displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel
the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan,
select the desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected
waypoint. Flight plans are limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and
procedures). If the number of waypoints in the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is
full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight
plan.
NOTE: Manually adding waypoints to a flight plan after a MANSEQ leg creates a lateral gap
in the flight plan. Time, fuel, and distance values for legs beyond the gap do not include the
distance across the gap.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
225
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Stored Flight Plan Selected
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Figure 5-50 Stored Flight Plan Page
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to
select “EDIT” and press the ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed
directly in front of the highlighted waypoint.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it
clockwise displays a blank ‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise
displays the ‘Waypoint Information Window’ with a waypoint selection submenu
allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the
submenu of waypoints and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the
flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a
Duplicate Waypoint Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
226
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed
prior to the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it
clockwise displays a blank ‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise
displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with a waypoint selection submenu
allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the
submenu of waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each
waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key
2) Press the FMS Knob on the MFD to activate the cursor.
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint.
4) Push the Joystick on the MFD to activate the panning function on the ‘FPL - Active
Flight Plan’ Page and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
5) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press
the ENT Key. The user waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next
available in sequence) and is added to the active flight plan.
Waypoints entered in the enroute segment of the flight plan may be treated as fly-by waypoints,
unless otherwise designated. A fly-by waypoint is a waypoint that marks the intersection of two
straight paths, with the transition from one path to another being made by the aircraft using a
precisely calculated turn that “flies by” but does not vertically cross the waypoint. A fly-over
waypoint is a waypoint that must be crossed vertically by an aircraft.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
227
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Enroute Segment
- TOP as Fly-By Waypoint
Figure 5-54 TOP Fly-By Waypoint
Figure 5-51 TOP Fly-By Waypoint
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
Enroute Segment
- TOP as Fly-By Waypoint
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
Figure 5-55 TOP Fly-Over Waypoint
Figure 5-52 TOP Fly-Over Waypoint
228
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Designating a fly-over waypoint:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key and press the FMS Knob to activate the
cursor (not required on the PFD).
Or:
For a stored flight plan, highlight the desired flight plan on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog
Page’ and press the Edit Softkey.
2) Highlight the desired waypoint.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Fly-Over Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set
[waypoint] to be a fly-over waypoint?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
5) To change the waypoint back to a fly-by waypoint, highlight the desired waypoint. Press
the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Fly-By Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set
[waypoint] to be a fly-by waypoint?’ Window is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press
the ENT Key.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the
desired airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway
entry point, select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be
loaded if there is a waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an
arrival or approach procedure. The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on
loaded flight plan waypoints.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
229
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Preview of
Selected Airway
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-53 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
Airway Exit Points
Available
Figure 5-54 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a
directional restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within
the list of airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to
another waypoint.
230
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These
airways are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the
flight plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point.
If this waypoint is not a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at
this time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey (MFD
only), or press the MENU Key and select ‘Load Airway’. The Select Airway Page/
Window is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the ‘Load Airway’ menu item is
available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint
ahead of the cursor position).
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the
ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway
inserted.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation
database into a flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport
(departure), arriving at an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures
section for more details.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
231
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Flight Plan Name
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
Softkeys
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan
Figure 5-55 Stored Flight Plan Page
DEPARTURE
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one
departure can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure,
the transition waypoints, and a runway.
Departure Airport
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMKC
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-54 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Figure 5-56 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
232
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Departure Airport
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
Departure Transition
Points Available
Figure 5-57 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Departure’, and press the
ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
ARRIVAL
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one
arrival can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
233
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Figure 5-56 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Figure 5-58 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY3
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Figure 5-57 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Figure 5-59 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
234
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the
ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
APPROACH
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only
one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by
designating transition waypoints.
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Figure 5-58 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Figure 5-60 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
235
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-59 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Figure 5-61 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Approach’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS
Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Approach Channel’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key
to accept the approach channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
236
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
STORED FLIGHT PLAN
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased
when the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored
flight plan can be viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
A stored flight plan may be viewed or edited. The system also allows copying a flight plan into a
new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without affecting the original flight plan. This
can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating a modified version of the
original stored flight plan.
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being
activated. Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and
replaces it with the flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Lastly, individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Selected Flight Plan
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-62 Stored Flight Plan Information
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight
Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available
position in the flight plan list on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
237
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired flight plan.
4) The ‘Flight Plan Info’ Box displays departure, destination, total distance, and enroute
safe altitude information for the selected flight plan.
5) Press the Edit Softkey to open the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page and view the
waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired flight plan.
3) Press the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘activate stored flight plan?’
Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired flight plan.
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and
press the ENT Key. The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired flight plan.
238
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Copy to flight plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request,
press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [airway name]from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
239
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight
‘Remove [procedure]’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
240
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired flight plan.
3) Press the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete
Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete flight plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the
request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation
window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the
request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The active flight plan can be edited by adding or removing flight plan items. The edits made to the
active flight plan affect navigation as soon as they are entered. The system allows deleting an active
flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the system. Individual waypoints,
entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints in the final
approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete a
waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification’.
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for
identification and sorting.
The flight plan leg which is currently being used for navigation guidance is referred to as the ‘active
leg’. The system automatically sequences from one active leg to the next as defined by the active flight
plan. Any leg in the active flight plan successive to the leg currently being flown may be selected to
become the new active leg.
Lastly, the active flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure
point.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
241
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
3) Press the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’,
and press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert
active flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete
all waypoints in flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the
request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
242
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in deletion of the
end waypoint of the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the deleted waypoint is created and
activated.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [airway name] from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight
‘Remove [procedure]’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
243
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a
flight plan. Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used
to make the system reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan
waypoint. Offset distances can be entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a
negative offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint,
whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted after the
selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the alongtrack distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected
waypoint is the active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active
waypoint. Assigning an along track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along
track offset is not allowed at or after the final approach fix of an approach.
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance
must be changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with
the new offset distance.
244
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-63 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK
Offset Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by
leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right
of the current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages
shows the parallel course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Activation of parallel track will apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that
does not meet the criteria for parallel track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track
at the beginning of that leg.
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the
activation prompt is displayed, but disabled.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
245
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The following will inhibit activation of a parallel track:
•
Initiating a direct-to, to the selected waypoint.
•
If an approach leg is active, the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track
with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active’.
•
If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry (e.g., there is a sharp
turn of more than 120 degrees), the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel
track because of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’).
•
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status indicates
that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’).
•
If there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active.
The following will cancel the parallel track:
•
Initiating a direct-to, to a waypoint.
•
Initiating a hold at the present position.
•
If a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a result of the course
change.
•
No legs are remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active.
Initiating a hold at a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is
required to fly to the hold waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the
parallel track will be resumed. Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be
resumed upon exiting the hold.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
Activation Prompt
Figure 5-64 Parallel Track Window
246
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Parallel Track
Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Original Track
Parallel Track
Figure 5-65 Parallel Track Active
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel
Track’ Window is displayed with the ‘Direction’ Field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The
‘Distance’ Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key.
‘Activate Parallel Track’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to
cancel the parallel track activation.
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel
Track’ Window is displayed with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
247
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be
configured to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of
the flight plan, and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view,
additional information is displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE),
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Changing the flight plan view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the View Softkey to display the Wide, Narrow, Leg-Leg, and CUM Softkeys.
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg
Softkey to view leg-to-leg waypoint distance.
4) Press the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or select the Narrow Softkey to
display the narrow view.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Charts may also be viewed alongside the active flight plan in split screen mode. With an active flight
plan loaded into the system, the Charts Page will automatically display a chart coinciding with the
active flight plan leg. For more information on Charts, see the Additional Features Section.
Activating split screen mode from the active flight plan displays the Charts page which removes the
Flight Plan Map. The Flight Plan Map can be re-displayed on the active flight plan page. However
replacing the Flight Plan Map on the active flight plan page in split screen mode limits the flight plan
content which can be displayed. For example, displaying the Flight Plan Map while in split screen
narrow view removes the Active VNV Profile Box. See the following figures below depicting the
different split screen displays with the active flight plan.
248
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Display Title shows ‘Chart + Active Flight Plan
Split Screen Narrow View
Split Screen Wide View
Figure 5-66 Split Screen Narrow and Wide View
Split Screen Narrow View with Flight Plan Map
Split Screen Wide View with Flight Plan Map
Figure 5-67 Split Screen Mode with Flight Plan Map
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
249
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Viewing charts and active flight plan page in split screen mode:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the Charts Softkey. Split screen mode is now enabled showing the Charts Page
alongside the Active Flight Plan Page, and Charts Page is bordered by a cyan box
indicating it is the active display pane.
3) To quickly view the chart corresponding to the active flight plan leg, press the AUTO
Softkey.
Displaying the flight plan map on the active flight plan page in split mode:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the Charts Softkey. Split screen mode is now enabled showing the Charts Page
alongside the active flight plan, and the Charts Page is bordered by a cyan box
indicating it is the active display pane.
3) Move the Joystick to select the Active Flight Plan page as the active display pane.
4) Press the MENU Key. ‘Show Flight Plan Map’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the Flight Plan Map, press the MENU Key and select ‘Hide Flight Plan Map’.
Press the ENT Key.
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Stored or
Active Flight Plan Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway
heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit
waypoint reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display.
The DTK value is inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint,
“To” waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden
in a collapsed airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next”
waypoint is automatically expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded
to facilitate flight plan review.
250
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
All Airways
Collapsed View
V4.SLN Airway
Expanded View
Figure 5-68 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the
ENT Key. The airways are collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a
reference waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a
chosen reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A
window appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted.
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint. The system displays the bearing (BRG)
and distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference
waypoint and creates a user waypoint at this location. Press the ENT Key. The name for
the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position,
or at a direct-to waypoint.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
251
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-69 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
252
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(Inbound or Outbound)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
Leg Length Mode
Button
(Time or Distance)
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To Waypoint Selection
5-69 Creating
DefinedHolding
Holding Pattern
at a Direct
WaypointTo Waypoint
Figure 5-70 Figure
Creating
a Usera User
Defined
Pattern
at aToDirect
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
253
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold
at’ Window appears with the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press
the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT
Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the
ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Hold at’ Window appears with the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press
the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT
Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the
ENT Key.
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold
waypoint at the aircraft present position and activate the hold.
254
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’
instead of ‘Activate?’ when finished.
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press
the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT
Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the
ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-
defined hold defined at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the
active flight plan, the hold is inserted into the active flight plan. If the direct-to
waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is created.)
Editing a user-defined hold:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Edit Hold’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’
Window appears with the Course Field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press
the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT
Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the
ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Update?’ is highlighted to update the hold.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
255
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern
to the inbound course and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the ‘HOLD’ waypoint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active
flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the
holding pattern.
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To
NAV’ selection.
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
256
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following
leg types: AF, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in
stored flight plans.
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and terminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan
or to a direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is
provided as a linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two
waypoints with specified altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical
waypoints are integrated into the active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are
supported.
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ),
and time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator
(VDI) and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ,
and TOD items displayed in the Active VNV Profile box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until
manually enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an
altitude constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active
Flight Plan Page allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude
constraint at the VNV direct-to waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is
spread along the flight plan from current position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the
leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key
also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass flight plan waypoints between the current position in
the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent (TOD) point is computed based on the
default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT)
and/or flight path angle (FPA) in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
257
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Disabled (fields dashed)
ENBL VNV Softkey
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
Cncl VNV Softkey
Figure 5-71 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
Enabling and Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL- Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press
the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the
waypoint shown in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box (defaults first waypoint in the active
flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation).
3) To Disable VNV guidance, press the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is disabled.
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to
be used. If not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is
selected.
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’,
and press the ENT Key. An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’
confirmation window is displayed.
258
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected
waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile
Window’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is now located in the ‘Active VNV Profile’
Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from
the published altitudes in the navigation database.
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are not “auto-designated”. This means the system
does not automatically provide descending vertical speed and deviation guidance to an altitude(s)
chosen by the system. Therefore, altitudes are normally displayed as white text. However, all altitudes
can be manually designated prior to the FAF. The FAF can be manually designated if the selected
approach provides no vertical guidance (i.e. glidepath). Manually designated altitudes are displayed as
cyan text and a pencil icon. For all designated altitudes, the system will automatically calculate altitude
constraints prior to the designated altitude, which are displayed as white text.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the
CLR Key. The altitude is now displayed only as a reference (white text). It is not used to give vertical
guidance. Other displayed altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a
result of manually changing an altitude to a non-designated altitude.
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest
hundred. An altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports.
When a database altitude restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when
creating a waypoint, effectively overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a
database altitude restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses
the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical profile.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
259
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Displayed Text
Examples
System Calculated Altitude
(White Text)
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Edited Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text with Pencil Icon)
Cross AT 2,300 ft
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
Temperature
Compensated
Figure 5-72 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
White Text
Cyan Text
5OOOFT
Altitude calculated by the system estimating
the altitude of the aircraft as it passes over the
navigation point. No white line above or
below to indicate a potential constraint.
Altitude is designated for use in determining
vertical guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual
designation or manually edited data entry.
5OOOFT
The system cannot use this altitude in determining
Altitude retrieved from the navigation
database. White line above or below indicates vertical guidance because of an invalid constraint
condition.
the type of constraint, as shown in the
preceding figure. These altitudes are provided
as a reference, and are not designated to be
used in determining vertical guidance.
Table 5-12 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
NOTE: All designated altitudes (cyan text) will be displayed in the Active Flight Plan Page and
Flight Plan Window without restriction bars regardless of what is shown on the published
procedure.
Manually designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
260
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical
guidance.
Manually designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical
guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and highlight the desired waypoint altitude. Turn the small FMS
Knob to enter editing mode.
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical
guidance.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
•
Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
•
Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be
exceeded
•
The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
•
The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
•
The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS
or GPS SBAS approach)
•
The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the
event an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for
the lateral waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no
predicted altitude can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude
constraint that has been edited.
Entering/modifying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight
level, turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the
first character, and the system automatically changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn
the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter the three digit flight
level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an
airport, an additional choice is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or
‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
261
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’
confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is
replaced by a system calculated altitude, if available).
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database
value:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’
confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation
database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’
confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)
A Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be shown on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. The
terrain, obstacles, vertical track vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information (active
flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV profile,
262
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
TOD/BOD, and destination runway) can be displayed on the VSD, depending on the selected mode.
See the Hazard Avoidance section for information about winds aloft, obstacles, and relative terrain on
the VSD.
NOTE: Certain leg types (e.g. holds, heading legs) do not support VNAV PATH descents
because the lateral distance of those legs in unknown. The VSD will not show a VNAV profile
for any legs that have no vertical path guidance.
The VSD horizontal range is equal to the navigation map indicated range when the VSD is in Track
mode. When the VSD is in Flight Plan mode, the horizontal range is the lower of twice the navigation
map indicated range or the lowest range the displays all of the remaining active flight plan. The VSD
altitude range automatically changes when the navigation map range is changed to keep a constant
ratio of altitude range to horizontal range, until both minimum and maximum display limits have been
met. At ranges above the maximum, the altitude range remains constant at the maximum.
The aircraft symbol is displayed on the left side of the VSD. The position of the aircraft symbol on
the vertical scale is close to the top for a descent phase and in the middle for a cruise phase or if the
phase is unknown.
If two waypoints are close together, and their labels or constraint values overlap enough to obscure
any text, one waypoint label/constraint value is removed and the vertical dashed line for that waypoint
is displayed as darker gray. The priority for which waypoint remains displayed is: (1) the current TO
waypoint, (2) waypoint with an altitude constraint, and (3) waypoint closer to the aircraft.
Terrain/obstacles are available on the VSD, and will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low enough
for the terrain/obstacles to be in view (terrain will be shown in gray if the terrain is selected Off on the
Navigation Map). The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of
the terrain based upon the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the
terrain database resolution, within a predefined width along the active flight plan between the aircraft
present position and the end of the map range or active flight plan. The predefined width is
determined by the flight phase.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
263
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
VSD Mode (AUTO FPL)
Selected Alt. (9000 FT)
Active FPL Waypoints
Altitude Constraints
Destination Runway
Vertical Situation
Display (VSD)
Absolute Terrain
VSD Mode Buttons
- FPL
- TRK
- Auto
Current VNAV Profile
Figure 5-69 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
Figure 5-73 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
VSD Mode
Button
Displayed
Mode
FPL Criteria
AUTO FPL
Available active FPL & aircraft
within FPL swath
Terrain/obstacles along the active
flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and
active flight plan information
AUTO TRK
(1) Active FPL available &
aircraft not within FPL swath,
or (2) Active FPL not available
Terrain/obstacles along the current
track, vertical track vector, and
selected altitude
Active FPL available
Terrain/obstacles along the active
flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and
active flight plan information
Active FPL not available
Only shows message 'Flight Plan
Not Available'
Auto
Flight Plan
Track
FPL
TRK
NA
Items available on VSD
Terrain/obstacles along the current
track, vertical track vector, and
selected altitude
Active flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV
profile, TOD/BOD, and destination runway
Table 5-13 VSD Modes
264
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Flight Phase
Width of Swath
Approach, Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
En Route, Oceanic
4.0 nm
Table 5-14 VSD Width of Swath
VSD MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Message
Description
‘Loading...’
VSD is loading data due to a range change, full/half
switch, or first being selected for display.
‘Flight Plan Not Available’
Flight Plan mode is selected and there is not a flight
plan loaded with at least one leg.
‘Flight Plan mode unavailable because
aircraft off course and active leg over 200
NM’
All of the following are true:
- Flight Plan mode is selected
- The active leg is greater than 200 nm
- The aircraft is outside the swath
‘Aircraft Beyond Active Leg’
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s
position, as projected on the flight plan, is past the
end of the active leg.
‘Active Leg Begins Beyond Aircraft
Position’
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s
position, as projected on the flight plan, is prior to
the beginning of the active leg.
At least one of the following is true:
- Valid terrain database not available
- GPS MSL altitude not available
‘VSD Not Available’
- Current barometric altitude not available
- Neither current track nor current heading available
- GPS position not available
- Map range setting is less than 1 nm
‘VSD Data Old. Deselect and Reselect VSD’
VSD data has failed to update for 2 seconds or
more.
Table 5-15 VSD System Messages
Enabling the Vertical Situation Display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
265
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable the Vertical Situation Display.
5) Press the VSD Mode Softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
5) Press the Inset Softkey.
6) Press the VSD Mode Softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Disabling the Vertical Situation Display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey
4) Press the Off Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
266
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.8 PROCEDURES
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals
(STARs), and non-precision and precision approaches (APRs) are stored within the database and can be
loaded using any Procedures (PROC) Key.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No
waypoints are required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and
destination airport are already loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport,
saving some time selecting the correct airport on the Procedure Loading Page.
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure
in the navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’,
that indicates a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading
leg in the flight plan displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the
pilot to manually initiate sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
Figure 5-74 Procedure Leg Identifiers
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
267
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page:
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to
the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Or:
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to
the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Or:
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting
to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/
facility name/city, and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on
the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select
the procedure. The cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure
is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key
to select the runway or transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The
procedure is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key
to select the runway or transition. The cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the
‘Minimums’ Box. The procedure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the Info 1 Softkey or the Info 2 Softkey to return to the ‘WPT - Airport
Information’ Page.
268
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Loading a procedure into the active flight plan from the [Procedure] Information
Page:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page:
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to
the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Or:
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to
the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Or:
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting
to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/
facility name/city, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different procedure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on
the map.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to
select the procedure. The cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The
procedure is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT
Key to select the runway or transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if
available). The procedure is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to
select the transition. The cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’
Box. The procedure is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the [Procedure] Information Page Menu.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load [procedure]’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the procedure into the active flight plan.
DEPARTURES
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in
the active flight plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by
selection of a departure, the transition waypoints, and a runway.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
269
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Departure Airport
Departure Choices
Departure Preview
Figure 5-75 Departure Selection
Selected Departure
Loaded Departure
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-76 Departure Loading
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
270
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page/Window is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight
plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ARRIVALS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one
arrival can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in
the active flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of
an arrival, the transition waypoints, and a runway.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
271
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Destination Airport
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
Figure 5-77 Arrival Selection
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-78 Arrival Loading
272
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page/Window is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published
approach procedures for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available
approaches.
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides
guidance for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach
procedures. Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when
another approach is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach.
The route is defined by selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
273
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the
procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation,
meaning the GPS receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver
cannot be used for primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected
approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown
by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service
levels according to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided
for assistance in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach.
This guidance is displayed on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a
magenta diamond. In all cases where LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV
minima are used. The active approach service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the
following table:
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima. Advisory vertical guidance is
provided
L/VNAV
(available only if
SBAS available)
LP
(available only if
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/
VNAV minima (downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS unavailable)
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LP
minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
unavailable)
RNAV GPS approach using published LP
minima
(available only if
SBAS available)
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
(downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV
minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
unavailable)
(available only if
SBAS available)
Example on HSI
Table 5-16 Approach Service Levels
274
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Destination Airport
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
Figure 5-79 Approach Selection
Selected Approach
Loaded Approach
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-80 Approach Loading
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
275
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page/
Window is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS
Knob to move the cursor to the Approach Channel Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key
to accept the approach channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and
press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the
ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the ‘TEMP At’ [airport] Field. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the temperature, and press the ENT Key
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the
large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the
approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must
to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
NOTE: If there is no arrival procedure in the active flight plan, loading an approach after a
destination airport has already been entered will result in a duplicate destination airport
waypoint being added to the end of the enroute segment.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest
airport. The airport is previewed on the map.
276
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and
press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed with the
‘Transition’ Field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and
press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the
ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the ‘TEMP At’ [airport] Field. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the
large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the
approach procedure. The system continues navigating the current flight plan until the
approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach
course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to
the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course
of the approach.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight
plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
277
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load and Activate” is given
(“Load and Activate” is only available for the active flight plan). “Loading” adds the approach to the
end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued
navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the
flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute
to the destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-ToFinal’ — which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’
highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the ‘Procedures‘ Window.
2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The page
menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course,
the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of
the approach.
MISSED APPROACH
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case
‘6600ft’) is not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which
guides the aircraft along the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first
turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be
below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft
altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to
provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,600 feet is reached. After reaching 6,600
feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case ADANE). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix
(ADANE) to begin the missed approach procedure.
278
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course to Altitude Leg
Figure 5-77 Course to Altitude
Figure 5-81 Course to Altitude
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published
procedure. For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to
the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of
waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is
established on a Course to Altitude leg when the missed approach procedure is activated.
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied
temperature at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C,
the system increases the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is
displayed in white text with a snowflake icon next to it.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
279
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
Figure 5-82 Temperature Compensation
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
Figure 5-83 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Manually activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The ‘Page
Menu’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘TEMP At’ [airport] Field. The compensated
altitude is computed as the temperature is selected.
280
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the Temperature Compensation
Window on the MFD, or in the References Window on the PFD. There is only one
compensation temperature for the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect
both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments
section for information about applying temperature compensation to the MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight
plan.
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is
displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Temperature Compensation Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes
does not select/deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/
deselecting temperature compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated
approach altitudes.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
281
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.9 WEIGHT PLANNING
The ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page is available to manage actual weight, estimated weight, center of
gravity (CG), and fuel quantity throughout an entire flight.
The ‘Station vs Weight’ Box displays a visual representation of the aircraft’s center of gravity from
takeoff to landing for a given flight plan, plus the remaining fuel burn. The takeoff CG icon is
representated as a triangle, current CG as a diamond, landing CG as a square, and fuel burn as a curved
line. All that lie within the white bordered polygon, are considered to be within the weight balance
parameters and, therefore, are colored green.
Pressing the Graph Softkey reveals softkeys which enable toggling between the Lateral or Longitudinal
center of gravity displays, plus a Zoom Softkey which enlarges the graph representation.
Station vs. Weight
White bordered CG Internal
GW Envelope
Predicted CG Movement
due to Fuel Burn
Aircraft Weight and
Balance Calculations
Basic Empty Weight Zero Fuel Weight Ramp Weight Takeoff Weight Current Weight Lateral Station CG Longitudinal Station CG -
- Takeoff triangle
- Current diamond
- Landing square
- Fuel Burn curve
Aircraft Load Weight Entries
- Crew/Passengers
- Baggage
Weight Entries
Hook Weight Fuel on Board Fuel Reserves -
Hook Weight Softkey
Fuel on Board Sync Softkey
Estimated Weight
Calculator
- Syncs the actual FOB to
the FOB Field on this page.
Est. Landing Weight Est. Landing Fuel Excess Fuel -
Config Softkey
- Displays W&B Config Page
Graph Softkey
Confirm Softkey
Changes LAT/LONG CG Graph
- Exits to the ‘EIS - Engine’ Page
Figure 5-84 Weight and Balance Page
282
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Zoomed in graph
LAT/LONG
Softkeys
Zoom in/out
Softkey
Figure 5-85 Station vs Weight Zoom Feature
The ‘Aircraft Weight and Balance’ and ‘ Estimated Weight’ Boxes contain entry fields for Fuel on
Board, Hook Weight, and Fuel Reserves, plus preflight and inflight weight calculations which use the
following formulas:
•
‘Basic Empty Weight’ is calculated by summing the weights of the airframe/engine, fixed equipment,
unusable fuel, full oil and other items necessary for all flights. All these items must be marked as
“Present” within the ‘Aircraft Data’ Box on the ‘Weight and Balance Configuration’ Page to be included
within this calculation.
•
‘Zero Fuel Weight’ = Basic Empty Weight + Aircraft Load
•
‘Ramp Weight’ = Zero fuel weight + the confirmed Fuel on Board weight (static value confirmed by the
pilot)
•
‘Takeoff Weight’ = Ramp Weight - fuel burned for start, taxi, and run-up
•
‘Current Weight’ = Zero Fuel Weight + Hook Weight + current Fuel on Board (updated based on fuel
flow). Current Weight is essentially the same term as current Gross Weight (GW).
•
The ‘Aircraft Load’ = crew + passengers + baggage. The Aircraft Load Box provides the weight entries
for the pilot, copilot, passenger and baggage compartment locations.
•
‘Est Landing Weight’ = Zero Fuel Weight + Estimated Landing Fuel Weight
•
‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight = Fuel on Board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
•
‘Excess Fuel’ weight = Estimated Landing Fuel Weight - Fuel Reserves Weight
When adding Hook Weight, calculations are applied immediately to the Current Weight after takeoff
throughout the entire fuel burn. Therefore, the Current Weight and fuel burn are displayed independent
of the Take Off and Landing icons on the Station vs Weight chart. Additionally, when Hook Weight is
applied, a gray External GW Envelope will overlay the Internal GW Envelope.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
283
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Current CG and
Fuel Burn
Gray CG External
GW Envelope
when hook
weight is present
Hook Weight
Entered
Figure 5-86 CG with Hook Weight
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields
display invalid values consisting of six dashes. Fuel calculations can be completed once airborne and the
destination waypoint has been entered:
•
‘Est Landing Weight’
•
‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight
•
‘Excess Fuel’ weight
Pressing the Config Softkey displays the ‘Weight and Balance Configuration’ Page which contains the
‘Aircraft Data’ Box listing the items contained within the zero fuel weight. These ‘Aircraft Data’ items
correspond to actual installed hardware (e.g. Seat, Cargo Bin, Litter, etc.) and do not change the ‘Aircraft
Load’ weights on the ‘Aux -Weight and Balance’ Page. This page provides the ability to account for
custom configurations such as executive seating and litter configurations.
284
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Basic Empty Weight CG
- Longitudinal CG Station
- Lateral CG Station
- Longitudinal CG Moment
- Lateral CG Moment
(Calculated based on items
listed as “Present”)
Basic Empty Weight
(Calculated based
on items listed as
“Present”)
Aircraft Data Weight
Items
Item Present Yes/NoItem TitleItem WeightItem ArmItem Butt LineDefault Softkey
Figure 5-87 Aircraft Configuration
Litter Position
Arm/Weight Entry
Executive
Configuration
Figure 5-88 Litter and Executive Configuration
Pressing the Confirm Softkey returns to the ‘EIS - Engine’ Page.
WEIGHT WARNING CONDITIONS
If the ‘Ramp Weight’ is greater than the maximum allowable gross weight, then the ‘Ramp Weight’ is
displayed in amber.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
285
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
If the ‘Takeoff Weight’ is greater than the maximum allowable gross weight, then the ‘Takeoff Weight’
is displayed in amber.
If the ‘Current Weight’ is greater than the maximum allowable gross weight or the maximum
allowable gross weight with an external load (Hook Weight), then the ‘Current Weight’ is displayed in
amber.
If the ‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight is less than or equal to the ‘Fuel Reserves’ weight, the following
values are displayed in amber:
•
‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight
•
‘Excess Fuel’ weight
If the ‘Est Landing Fuel’ is zero or negative, ‘Est Landing Fuel’ will be displayed in red.
If the aircraft CG will lie outside the specified CG envelope at any time (to include remaining fuel
burn calculated after landing), the respective Take Off triangle, Current diamond, Fuel Burn curve,
and/or Landing square will be displayed in amber. From takeoff to landing, if the aircraft CG will lie
outside the specified CG envelope for either the longitudinal or lateral station, then the respective LAT
and/or LONG Station Field will also be displayed in amber.
NOTE: Any icon (Takeoff, Current, Landing, or Fuel Burn) or LAT/LONG Station may change
color when Hook Weight is added or removed.
When any portion of the Current CG diamond lies outside the visible chart area, the following amber
text will appear on the chart, “THE CURRENT CG EXCEEDS THE CHART LIMITS.”
Longitudinal Fuel
Burn portion
outside Envelope
Landing outside
Envelope
LONG Station
outside Envelope
Figure 5-89 Out of CG - Longitudinal with Hook Weight
286
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Lateral Take Off,
Current, Fuel
Burn, and Landing
outside Envelope
LAT Station outside
Envelope
Figure 5-90 Out of CG - Lateral
Entering basic empty weight:
1) From the ‘Aux - Weight Planning’ Page, press the Config Softkey; or press the MENU
Key, highlight ‘Weight and Balance Configuration’, and press the ENT Key to display
the ‘Weight and Balance Configuration’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired field for the item data to be edited.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to the desired value and press the ENT Key to confirm the
entry.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 until adjustments are complete.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering aircraft load:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field within the ‘Aircraft Load’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the weight.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry. The displayed weight and balance information
is automatically updated.
5) Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all seat and baggage weight values are accurate.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
287
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Entering the hook weight:
1) Press the Hook WT Softkey to activate the cursor on the ‘Hook Weight’ Field, or Press
the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Hook Weight’, and press the ENT Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the hook weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry. The displayed weight and balance information
is automatically updated.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering a fuel on board weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Fuel on Board’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel on board.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry. The displayed weight and balance information
is automatically updated.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Entering fuel reserves weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Fuel Reserves’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves amount.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Synchronizing the fuel on board with the actual measured fuel on board:
Press the FOB Sync Softkey on the ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page; or press the
MENU and highlight ‘Synchronize Fuel on Board’, and press the ENT Key. The actual
measured fuel on board is displayed in the ‘Fuel On Board’ Field.
Setting up a litter configuration (starting from the standard configuration):
1) Press the Config Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Weight and
BalanceConfiguration’, and press the ENT Key to display the ‘Weight and Balance
Configuration’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘CPLT’ ‘Present’ Field. Turn the small FMS Knob
to select ‘No’. The new weight will be reflected in the Basic Empty Weight shown at the
top of the Box.
4) Repeat step 3 for ‘LH FWD’ and ‘LH AFT’. There is now space for the litter.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘LITTER’ ‘Present’ Field.
288
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’. The new data will be reflected in the Basic
Empty Weight and center of gravity calculations shown at the top of the Box.
7) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page. The litter
configuration will be shown in the ‘Aircraft Load’ Box.
Setting up an executive configuration (starting from the standard configuration):
1) Press the Config Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Weight and Balance
Configuration’, and press the ENT Key to display the ‘Weight and Balance
Configuration’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘MID AFT’ ‘Present’ Field. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select ‘No’. The new data will be reflected in the Basic Empty Weight and
center of gravity calculations shown at the top of the Box.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page. The
executive configuration will be shown in the ‘Aircraft Load’ Box.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
289
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.10 TRIP PLANNING
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information
for a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data.
TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip
Planning Page located in the Aux Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-80 Trip Planning Page
Figure 5-91 Trip Planning Page
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs
(manual page mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
•
Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are
from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
•
Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of
information is GPS ground speed.
•
Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of
information is GPS altitude.
290
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip
planning inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM)
selected, the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected,
the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan
(REM) selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the
endpoint of the active flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected,
the ‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTs) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan,
these default to the endpoints of the active leg).
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
•
Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected
waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
•
Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
•
Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is
shown as minutes:seconds.
•
Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
•
If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
•
If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the
departure time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight
plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
•
If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the
current leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the
current leg up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA
is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
•
Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
•
Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as
hours:minutes of the time at the destination.
FUEL STATISTICS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip
planning inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active
flight plan has already been flown.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
291
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
•
Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
•
Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is
obtained by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
•
Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by
taking the amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the
selected leg.
•
Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated
by taking the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the
selected leg.
•
Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by
the fuel flow.
•
Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of
fuel endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning
inputs.
•
Density Altitude
•
True Airspeed
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs)
mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/
WPTs selection). In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the
pilot, in addition to flight plan and leg selection.
Selected Leg(s)
Selected Flight Plan NN 00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Figure 5-92 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-82 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-93 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
292
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or
press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or
press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the
ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the
‘FPL’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be
viewed by turning the small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Trip Planning Map
also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is positioned in the
waypoint field directly below the FPL Field.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set
WPT to Present Position’ if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor
moves to the second waypoint field.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The
statistics for the selected leg are displayed.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’
from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor may now be positioned in any
field in the top right two boxes.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the ‘Departure Time’ Field and enter the
desired value. Press the ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and
the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all desired values have been
entered.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
293
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or
less than –20°, or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of
flight. In all other phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION”
annunciation on the map and the system stops using GPS.
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable
to calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR
Mode, the system uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and
heading data (when available) to calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode
airspeed and/or heading data is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of
accurately tracking estimated position and, consequently, the system may display a path that is different
than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated position information displayed by the system
through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite
measurements needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound
the relative inaccuracy of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must
be relied upon for position awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over
the ‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in the following figure. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in
amber on the HSI slightly below and to the left of the aircraft symbol on the CDI. Lastly, but at the same
time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source
data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated
position and is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information
as shown in the following figure. If the VSD Inset is selected on the MFD, ‘VSD Not Available’ will be
displayed.
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the
accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace
alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
294
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Distance &
Bearing
Current
Track
Indicator
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Nav Data Bar
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Figure 5-83 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
Figure 5-94 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
295
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
BLANK PAGE
296
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 OVERVIEW
Hazard avoidance features available for the G1000H NXi are designed to aid situational awareness and
provide advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather,
terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
•
GDL 69AH SXM SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
•
GSR 56H Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
•
Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather (Optional)
•
L-3 Stormscope® WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
•
Helicopter Terrain Awareness Warning System (HTAWS)
Traffic
•
TIS (Traffic Information Service)
•
GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
•
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
297
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 DATA LINK WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around
areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within data link weather products may
not accurately depict current weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of
the weather information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays
inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission, the weather
information shown by the data link weather product may be older than the indicated
weather product age.
The Data Link Weather feature enables the system to receive weather information from a variety of
weather sources, depending on the equipment installed in the aircraft. These sources may include
SiriusXM Weather and Garmin Connext Weather. For each source, a ground-based system processes the
weather information collected from a network of sensors and weather data providers.
The SiriusXM Weather service, available with the Garmin GDL 69AH SXM data link receiver and an
active service subscription, updates its weather data periodically and automatically, and transmits this
information to the aircraft’s receiver via satellite on the S-Band frequency. This service provides
continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
The FIS-B Weather service, available when equipped with a capable transponder or data link receiver
which can receive 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) data, delivers subscription-free weather
information periodically and automatically to the aircraft. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated
Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) to transmit the information to the aircraft’s receiver. Reception is
limited to line-of-sight, and is available below 24,000 feet MSL in the United States. FIS-B broadcasts
provide weather data in a repeating cycle which may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all
available weather data. Therefore, not all weather data may be present immediately upon initial FIS-B
signal acquisition. FIS-B is a component of the Automatic Dependent Surveillance (ADS-B) system,
which offers both weather and traffic data; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion later in this section for a
more detailed discussion of the ADS-B system and its capabilities.
The Garmin Connext Weather service, available when equipped with the Garmin GSR 56H Iridium
Satellite Transceiver and an active service subscription, provides data link weather information to the
aircraft after the pilot defines a geographic area and subsequently selects a manual or automatically
recurring Connext Data Request. The transceiver then contacts the Garmin Connext Weather service
using the Iridium Satellite telephone system and retrieves the weather data for the specified area. The
Garmin Connext Weather service offers worldwide weather coverage, but the availability of individual
weather products, such as radar precipitation, varies by region.
NOTE: To check the availability of Garmin Connext weather products offered in a particular
region, visit http://sites.garmin.com/connext.
298
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ACTIVATING DATA LINK WEATHER SERVICES
ACTIVATING THE SIRIUSXM WEATHER SERVICE
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this
system. This pilot’s guide only discusses supported weather products.
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s
customer service the coded ID(s) unique to the installed data link receiver. The Data Radio ID
must be provided to activate the weather service. A separate Audio Radio ID, if present, enables the
receiver to provide SiriusXM Radio entertainment. To view this information, refer to the following
locations:
•
The Aux - XM Information Page on the MFD
•
The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
•
The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display
weather data and/or provide audio entertainment programming through the data link receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
1) Select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather data) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for
SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website,
www.siriusxm.com.
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition
to payment information, and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Radio Page in
the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an
unavailable weather product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather
product. During activation, it may take several minutes for weather products in the
selected subscription package to become available.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
299
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
Select to Display XM
Information page
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
ACTIVATING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
Garmin Connext weather requires an active Iridium satellite network account and an active
subscription to the Garmin Connext Weather service.
A subscriber account must be established for the Iridium transceiver prior to using the Iridium
Satellite System for telephone services. Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial
number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the Aux - System Status
Page. Then Contact Garmin at the phone number listed at FlyGarmin.com.
300
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System ID Number
Iridium Transceiver
Serial Number
Figure 6-2 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
When an account is established, Garmin provides an Access Code which must be entered on the
system in order to complete the registration process.
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob
on the MFD to select the Map page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page. If
another data link weather source such as ‘XM’ or ‘FIS-B’ is displayed in the page title, it
will be necessary to change the data link weather source to CNXT before continuing.
Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change the data
link source to prior to registration.
3) If the system displays the Connext Registration Window, proceed to step 6. Otherwise,
press the MENU Key. The page menu window is now displayed.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration Window appears as shown in the figure
below.
6) Enter the access code provided by Garmin in the ‘Access Code’ field.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Register’ is highlighted as in the figure below.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
301
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
8) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin through the Iridium network. System
registration is complete when the Current Registration Window displays the correct
information for the Airframe, Tail Number, Airframe Serial Number, and Iridium Serial
Number.
9) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the Connext Registration Window.
Figure 6-3 Enter Access Code
WEATHER PRODUCT AGE
Unlike real-time weather information collected directly from weather sensors on-board an aircraft,
such as an airborne weather radar or a lightning detection system, data link weather by contrast relies
on service providers to collect, process, and transmit weather information to the aircraft. This
information can come from a variety of sources such as government agencies. Due to the time it takes
to collect, process, and distribute data link weather information, it is imperative for pilots to
understand that data link weather information is not real-time information and may not accurately
depict the current conditions.
For each data link weather product which can be displayed as a map overlay, such as radar
precipitation, the system can also show a weather product age. This age represents the elapsed time, in
minutes, since the weather service provider compiled the weather product and the current time. It
does not represent the age of the information contained within the weather product itself. For
example, a single mosaic of radar precipitation is comprised data from multiple radar sites providing
data at differing scan rates or intervals. The weather service provider periodically compiles this data to
create a single composite image, and assigns one time to this image which becomes the basis of the
product age. The service provider then makes this weather product available for data link transmission
at the next scheduled update time. The actual age of the weather data contained within the mosaic is
therefore older than its weather product age and should never be considered current.
302
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM and FIS-B weather products are broadcast automatically on a repeating cycle without pilot
intervention.
Each data link weather product age has an expiration time. The weather product age is shown in
white if it is less than half of this expiration time, otherwise it is shown in amber until reaching its
expiration time. After a weather product has expired, the system removes the expired weather product
from the displays, and shows white dashes instead of the age. If the data link receiver has not yet
received a weather product ‘N/A’ appears instead of the age to show the product is currently not
available for display. This may occur, for example, after powering on the system but before the data
link receiver has received a complete weather data transmission. It could also indicate a possible
outage of a weather product.
The weather product age is shown automatically for weather products displayed on MFD maps. For
PFD maps, the pilot can manually enable/disable the age information.
The following tables show the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates
for SiriusXM Weather and FIS-B Weather, respectively. The broadcast rate represents the interval at
which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated
weather product information. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is
updated or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. The service provider and its weather data
suppliers define and control the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
Enabling/disabling the weather product age for PFD Maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND to show/remove the weather product age information for PFD
maps.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
The following tables show the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates
for SiriusXM Weather and FIS-B Weather, respectively. The broadcast rate represents the interval at
which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated
weather product information. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is
updated or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. The service provider and its weather data
suppliers define and control the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
NEXRAD
30
5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
15 (69/69AH)
30 (69/69AH SXM)
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
7.5
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
303
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Cell Movement
30
1.25
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast
90
12
Surface Analysis
60
12
Freezing Levels
120
12
Winds Aloft
90
12
County Warnings
60
5
Cyclone Warnings
60
12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
90
22
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
12
Air Report(AIREP)
90
12
Turbulence
180
12
Radar Coverage Not Available
No product
image
30
5
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
No product
image
60
12
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
(TAF)
No product
image
60
12
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
FIS-B Weather Product
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
METARs
90
5
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
10
304
Symbol
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIS-B Weather Product
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Winds Aloft
90
10
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
5
No Radar Coverage
no product
image
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
(TAF)
no product
image
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR
no product
image
10
Table 6-2 FIS-B Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
The following table shows the Garmin Connext Weather product symbols, the expiration times and
the refresh rates. The refresh rate represents the interval at which Garmin Connext weather service
makes available the most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at
which the service receives new data from various weather sources. The pilot chooses how often to
contact the Garmin Connext weather service in order to retrieve weather data through the Connext
Data Request.
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Radar Precipitation
30
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15^
Infrared Satellite
60
30
Datalink Lightning
30
Continuous
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
Continuous
METARs
90
Continuous
Winds Aloft
90
Continuous
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
no product
image
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
305
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
TAFs)
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
no product
image
60
Continuous
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may
take between 3 and 10 minutes to provide new data.
† Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
^ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Table 6-3 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
DISPLAYING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
The ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM/CNXT)’ Page is the principal map page for viewing data link
weather information. This page provides the capability for displaying the most data link weather
products of any map on the system. The ‘Map - Weather Data Link’ Page also provides system-wide
controls for selecting the data link weather source, if more than one source has been installed. The
page title indicates the selected data link weather source (e.g., “XM”, “CNXT”).
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
NEXRAD Weather
Product Age (US)
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
306
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page and changing the data link weather source, if
applicable:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT) Page. The
currently selected data link weather source appears in the page title.
3) If the page title does not contain the desired weather source, press the MENU Key.
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’, or ‘Display Connext
Weather’ (choices may vary depending on the installed equipment).
b) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-5 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) PAGE SOFTKEYS
NOTE: Only softkeys pertaining to data link weather features are shown in the following
tables.
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for
map overlays used throughout the system. The following figures show the softkeys for the Weather
Data Link Page based on the selected source.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Description
NEXRAD
Enables/disables the NEXRAD weather product
overlay.
Echo Top
Enables/disables the Echo Tops weather product
overlay.
CLD Top
Enables/disables the Cloud Tops weather
product overlay.
XM LTNG
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Lightning weather
product overlay.
Cell MOV
Enables/disables the Cell Movement weather
product overlay.
SIG/AIR
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather
product overlay.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
307
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
METAR
Enables/disables the graphical METAR weather
product overlay.
Legend
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
More WX
Displays second-level SiriusXM Weather product
softkeys.
Enables/disables the Cyclone weather product
overlay.
Cyclone
Displays third level softkey for enabling/disabling
the Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather
product and selecting a forecast period.
SFC
Off
Current
Disables the Surface Analysis and City Forecast
weather product overlay.
Displays the Surface Analysis for the current
time period overlay.
12 HR, 24 HR, 36
HR, 48 HR
These softkeys display a Surface Analysis and
City Forecast overlay for the selected future time
period.
Legend
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Back
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the Freezing Level weather
product overlay.
FRZ LVL
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/
disabling the Winds Aloft weather product and
selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Wind
PREV
Off
Softkeys available
for selecting winds
from the Surface to
42,0000 feet
Next
Legend
308
Description
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude
softkeys.
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product
overlay.
Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather
product for the surface (SFC) through 15,000
feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot
increments of altitude.
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude
softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Back
Description
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Displays altitude softkeys for the Icing weather
product overlay.
ICNG
PREV
Off
Shows the previous level of Icing altitude
softkeys.
Disables the Icing weather product.
Softkeys available
for selecting winds
Enables/disables the Icing weather product
from the Icing
overlay from 1,000 feet to 30,000 feet. Softkeys
altitude from to
available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
1,000 to 30,000
feet
Next
Legend
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays softkeys for enabling/disabling the
Turbulence weather product overlay.
TURB
PREV
Off
Shows the previous level of Turbulence altitude
softkeys.
Disables the Turbulence weather product
overlay.
Softkeys available
for selecting
Turbulence altitude
from 21,000 feet
to 45,000 feet
Enables/disables the Icing weather product
overlay from 21,000 feet to 45,000 feet.
Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
altitude.
Next
Shows the next level of Icing weather product
softkeys.
Legend
Back
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
AIREPS
Enables/disables the AIREPs weather product
overlay.
PIREPS
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product
overlay.
County
Enables/disables the County Warnings weather
product overlay.
Back
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Shows the next level of Icing weather product
softkeys.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
309
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT) PAGE SOFTKEYS
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
PRECIP
Enables/disables the Precipitation weather
product overlay.
IR SAT
Enables/disables the infrared Satellite weather
product overlay.
SIG/AIR
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather
product overlay.
METAR
Enables/disables the graphical METAR weather
product overlay.
Legend
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
More WX
Displays second-level Connext Weather product
softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/
disabling the Winds Aloft weather product and
selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Wind
PREV
Off
Softkeys available
for selecting winds
from the Surface to
42,0000 feet
Next
Legend
Back
PIREPs
Back
310
Description
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude
softkeys.
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product
overlay.
Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather
product for the surface (SFC) through 15,000
feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot
increments of altitude.
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude
softkeys.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product
overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) PAGE SOFTKEYS
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Description
Cycles through NEXRAD display modes:
NEXRAD (annunciator disabled): No NEXRAD
shown.
US: Displays NEXRAD for Continental US
(CONUS).
RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data.
US/RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data where
available, and CONUS NEXRAD data in other
coverage areas.
NEXRAD
or
US
or
RGNL
or
US/RGNL
IR SAT
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather
product overlay.
SIG/AIR
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather
product overlay.
METAR
Enables/disables the METAR weather product
overlay.
Legend
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
More WX
Displays second-level Connext Weather product
softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/
disabling the Winds Aloft weather product and
selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Wind
PREV
Off
Softkeys available
for selecting winds
from the Surface to
42,0000 feet
Next
Legend
Back
PIREPs
Back
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude
softkeys.
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product
overlay.
Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather
product for the surface (SFC) through 15,000
feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot
increments of altitude.
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude
softkeys.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends
Window. Softkey available for selection when at
least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product
overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
311
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Weather Data Link Page can display a legend for each enabled weather product.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the
window.
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the
CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Additional information about the following weather products can be displayed by panning the Map
Pointer over the following products on the Weather Data Link Page:
Echo Tops
METARs
Cloud Tops
County Warnings
Cell Movement
TFRs
SIGMETs
AIREPs
AIRMETs
PIREPs
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning
the Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
312
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
Storm Cell
Selected with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-6 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Certain weather products, such as METARs or TFRs have associated full text. When a weather
product is selected with the Map Pointer, press the ENT Key. The system displays the full text for the
selected weather product in a window. To remove the window, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
The Weather Data Link Page also has a page menu that can be accessed by pressing the MENU Key.
It has controls for enabling/disabling the weather products as an alternative to using the softkeys.
CUSTOMIZING THE WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
The Weather Data Link Page includes controls for selecting the maximum map range to display
each weather product on the page. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected
maximum range, the system removes the weather product from the map. If more than one data
link weather source has been installed, the system uses the same maximum map range for the
comparable weather product of another source.
NOTE: Product Group 2’ is only applicable to SiriusXM and Garmin Connext Weather.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
313
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press
the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range
settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the
changed settings.
The pilot can select a map orientation for the Weather Data Link Page, or choose to synchronize the
map orientation to the same orientation used on the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting a map orientation for the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Group options.
5) If SiriusXM is the selected data link weather source, turn the small FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
Or:
If FIS-B or Garmin Connext is the selected data link weather source, turn the large FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘Orientation ‘ field at the bottom of the Product Group 1 list.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired map orientation: North up, Track up,
HDG up, or SYNC, then press the ENT Key.
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENUKey.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
WEATHER PRODUCTS MAP OVERLAYS
Other PFD and MFD maps and pages can display a smaller set of data link weather products. The
following table shows which data link weather products can be displayed on specific maps, indicated
with a ‘+’ symbol.
314
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Link
Weather
Product
PFD
MAPS
NEXRAD/
Radar
Precipitati
on
+
Weather
Nav. Map
Data Link
Page
Page
+
+
Cloud Top
+
Echo Top
+
Infrared
Satellite
+
Data Link
Lightning
+
Cell
Movement
Nearest
Page
Group
Flight
Plan
Pages
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Surface
Analysis &
City
Forecast
+
Freezing
Levels
+
Winds
Aloft
+*
+
+
County
Warnings
+
Cyclone
Warnings
+
Icing
Potential
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence
(TURB)
+
No Radar
Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Aux - Trip
Planning
Page
+
SIGMETs/
AIRMETs
METARs
Weather
Info.
Page
+
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
315
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Link
Weather
Product
PFD
MAPS
Weather
Nav. Map
Data Link
Page
Page
TAFs
+
Weather
Info.
Page
Aux - Trip
Planning
Page
Nearest
Page
Group
Flight
Plan
Pages
+
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-4 Weather Product Display Maps
Displaying Data Link Weather Products on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the softkey to enable/disable the desired weather product.
The Navigation Map Page also can display legends for weather products enabled on this map with
the Legend Softkey. This softkey is subdued if no weather products are enabled.
Showing/removing the weather legend on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Legend Softkey to show the weather legends window.
4) When finished, press the Legend Softkey again, or press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key
to remove the window.
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page also allows the pilot to select the maximum map range to display
weather products. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the
system removes the weather product from the map. The system uses this setting for all navigation
maps, including those displayed on the PFD.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the navigation maps:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range
settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
The system can also display data link weather information on the PFD navigation maps.
316
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Data Link Weather products on the PFD:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the desired weather product softkey(s) to enable/disable the display of data link
products on the PFD map.
On the MFD maps, the weather product icon and age appear automatically when a weather is
enabled and the range is within the maximum display limits. On PFD maps, this information is
available using the PFD softkeys.
Enabling/disabling the weather product icon and age display (PFD maps):
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the weather product age, source, and
icon box display on PFD Maps.
The setup menus for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the
map range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range
larger than the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed
from the map. The page menus also provide an alternative to using the softkeys to enable/disable data
link weather product overlays on maps.
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
NOTE: Data requests are not applicable to the SiriusXM Weather or FIS-B Weather services.
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the pilot with the options to define the requested weather
coverage area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel
weather data requests. A Request Status Window inside the menu shows the status of the Connext Data
Request.
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all
currently available Garmin Connext Weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the
aircraft’s present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’
coverage field) must be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates
‘INVALID COVERAGE AREA’ and the system will not allow a request to occur.
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be
specified prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these
option(s) until a flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
Manually Requesting Garmin Connext Weather information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
317
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT
Key to show or hide a green check mark to select one of more of the following
coverage selections:
•
Present Position – Requests data based on current location.
•
Destination – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To
destinations excluded). See the Flight Management section for more information about
entering and activating flight plans.
•
FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one currently exists. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the desired flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘Remaining
FPL’ to request weather data for the remainder of the flight plan), then press the ENT Key.
•
Waypoint – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large
and small FMS Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘Diameter / Route Width’ distance field and
turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired diameter and route width of the request,
then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted. Press the ENT
Key to initiate the request immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather
Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting weather data.
318
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-7 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu/Connext Data Request Window
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
319
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
Figure 6-8 Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation Data Displayed
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”.
Once a connection is established, the Request Status Window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time
Remaining:” with an estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext
Data Request Menu may be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the
data request will continue to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between
1 to 4 minutes to complete depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amounts of
weather activity present, and the Iridium signal strength.
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area
during an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for
display. On subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs
and TAFS) if it has not expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and
all graphical weather data is transferred to the aircraft during every data request.
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the Request Status Window indicates ‘OK’ if
the Connext Data Request menu is still within view.
320
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Connext Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Cancel Request’ field and press the ENT Key.
The request status box indicates ‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
The flight crew can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Automatic requests remain
enabled until the flight crew them, or the system power is removed. The Request Status Window
indicates the number of minutes or seconds until the next automatic data request occurs.
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering
Reversionary Mode, the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode,
however the Connext Data Request Window and its associated options will not be available
in Reversionary Mode.
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Update Rate’ field. Then turn the small FMS
Knob to highlight the desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min,
20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press the ENT Key
6) The ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the
‘Request Status’ Window based on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT
Key to immediately send an immediate Connext Data Request.
Or:
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
WEATHER PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The following is an overview of data link weather products the system can display.
NEXRAD (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Datalink weather radar information cannot be displayed at the same time as relative
terrain, echo tops, icing, or turbulence data.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
321
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation
RADar) system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD
network provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and
selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar
site may arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider
compiles the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and
assigns a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD
weather product. Individual images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always
older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD
data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this information during the next
designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the
current radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather
product should never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather regardless of the information it contains.
Figure 6-9 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity
image. This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various
altitudes. For radar sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from
the lowest antenna tilt angle, known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is colorcoded to indicate the intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation, if known.
322
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on the Weather Data Link (XM)
Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown for the selected region (US or
Canada). The pilot can change the region on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
Changing the NEXRAD coverage region:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Region datafield.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘US’ or ‘CNDA’ (Canada) and press the ENT Key.
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected.
Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not
being collected are indicated in gray shade of purple.
REFLECTIVITY
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the
NEXRAD display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates
to hazardous weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of
weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an
indication of the weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection,
while dry hail does not. Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z).
NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver
(designated by the letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
323
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
NEXRAD LIMITATIONS
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
324
•
Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
•
An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no
information about storms directly over the site.
•
Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar
beam overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site,
the radar beam is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any
precipitation occurring below the beam at this distance and altitude.
•
At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of
approximately four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the
highest level of radar reflectivity sampled within the area.
•
Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
•
Ground clutter
•
Strobes and spurious radar data
•
Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
•
Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
•
Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
NEXRAD LIMITATIONS (CANADA)
•
Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
•
Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation regardless
of actual precipitation type.
•
If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of
actual precipitation type.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
325
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
No Coverage
Above 55°N
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
NEXRAD (FIS-B)
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation
RADar) system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD
network provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and
selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar
site may arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to
FIS-B compiles the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and
assigns a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD
weather product. Individual images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always
older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD
data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this information during the next designated broadcast time
for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar
synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be
used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
326
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-13 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher
resolution, updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution,
updated less frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display
on the same map. When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display
precedence where data is available, and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional
NEXRAD coverage area.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
327
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
No radar coverage
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-14 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey. Each selection cycles though a coverage option as the
softkey name changes (US, RGNL, or US/RGNL.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) To enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information for the continental United States,
turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD On/Off field.
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of NEXRAD for the
continental United States or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
4) To enable/disable the display of Regional NEXRAD information, turn the small FMS
Knob to highlight the Regional On/Off field.
328
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of Regional
NEXRAD or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
NOTE: When both NEXRAD options are enabled on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page, a
combined version is displayed.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’
(regional), or ‘Combined’, then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects display of
NEXRAD on the PFD Maps.
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
329
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enables/disables NEXRAD
data display for the
continental United States
Enables/disables
regional NEXRAD
data display
Figure 6-15 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page Menu/Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page Setup
Menu
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received
from ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white spiked
boundary encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being
displayed. The system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this
boundary area.
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey
enabled), the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of
the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be
viewed on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the Legend Softkey
when the NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
330
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-16 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar
data is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray
shade of purple.
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during
initial FIS-B signal acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system
may display areas of no radar coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is
received. It may take up to approximately ten minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when
adequate reception is available.
REFLECTIVITY
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the
NEXRAD display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates
to hazardous weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of
weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an
indication of the weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection,
while dry hail does not. Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z).
NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver
(designated by the letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD LIMITATIONS
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
•
At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional
version of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm
tall. For the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5
nm wide by 5 nm wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected
within that area.
•
The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of
latitude.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
331
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
•
Ground clutter
•
Strobes and spurious radar data
•
Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
•
Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
•
Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
PRECIPITATION (GARMIN CONNEXT)
NOTE: Precipitation data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain data.
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar
coverage areas. This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources
such as government agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates
and times. Periodically, the Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to
form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image
becomes the Precipitation weather product. Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ
in age, and are always older than the displayed Precipitation weather product age.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product,
the displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the
current radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather
product should never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather regardless of the information it contains.
332
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Precipitation
Weather Product
Icon and Age
Boundary of
weather data
request
Precipitation
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-17 Precipitation Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD maps, press the Map/HSI or Map Opt Softkey).
This step is not necessary on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Select the PRECIP Softkey.
The system displays either base or composite radar imagery, depending on the region.
Region
Radar Reflectivity Type
United States
Composite Reflectivity
Canada, Europe, Australia
Base Reflectivity
The base reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the radar returns from the perspective of a
single antenna tilt angle. The composite reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the highest
radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles. The display of the information is color-coded to
indicate the intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation.
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the
Precipitation legend, select the Legend Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
333
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
No radar coverage
Boundary of
weather data
request
Figure 6-18 Precipitation Weather Product Legend
The display of radar coverage is enabled active when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray
shade of purple. A white boundary line depicting the selected coverage area of the Connext Data
Request encloses the precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
REFLECTIVITY
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the
Precipitation display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to
hazardous weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of
weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an
indication of the weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection,
while dry hail does not. Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z).
Weather radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver
(designated by the letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
PRECIPITATION LIMITATIONS
Radar images may have certain limitations:
334
•
Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet
snow, wet hail, and rain.
•
An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
•
At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of radar data are viewable. Each block of radar
information represents approximately four square kilometers and depicts the highest level of
reflectivity detected within that area.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
Figure 6-19 Precipitation Weather Product at 10 NM Map Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
•
Ground clutter
•
Strobes and spurious radar data
•
Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
•
Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
•
Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
ECHO TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data is
displayed.
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar
echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
335
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Altitude for
selected Echo Top
Figure 6-20 Echo Tops Weather Product
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-21 Echo Tops Legend
CLOUD TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
336
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If a GDL 69AH SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30
minutes. As with all SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it
reaches half of the expiration time, which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this
weather product age may be amber during routine operation.
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
Figure 6-22 Cloud Tops Weather Product
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the CLD Top Softkey.
Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
Figure 6-23 Cloud Tops Legend
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
337
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DATA LINK LIGHTNING (SIRIUSXM, GARMIN CONNEXT)
NOTE: Lightning from a data link source cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same
map as information from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
The Data Link Light weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
Lightning
Strikes
Figure 6-24 Data Link Weather Product
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page, select the Legend Softkey when Data
Link Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-25 Data Link Lightning Legend
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
338
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
CELL MOVEMENT (SIRIUSXM)
The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified
by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.
Storm Cells
Additional
information for
selected Storm Cell
Figure 6-26 Cell Movement Weather Product
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, the Cell Movement weather product has a dedicated CEL
MOV softkey for enabling/disabling this weather product on this page.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69AH SXM data link receiver is
installed. In this case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer
selects a storm cell.
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Select the Cell MOV Softkey.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
339
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-27 Cell Movement Legend
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the
NEXRAD Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map
Settings menu of the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation
maps:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When
set to ‘On’, Cell Movement is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on
navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement is not displayed on navigation
maps.
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling
the NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the
NEXRAD Softkey.
INFRARED SATELLITE (GARMIN CONNEXT)
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite
imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
340
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-28 Infrared Satellite Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Figure 6-29 Infrared Satellite Legend
Displaying Infrared Satellite information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Select the IR SAT Softkey.
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological
Information) are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for
hazardous convective weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a
significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: If SiriusXM Weather is the active data link weather source and a GDL 69AH SXM
receiver installed, the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless at least
one SIGMET or AIRMET has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
341
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: For Garmin Connext Weather only, the entire SIGMET or AIRMET is shown on the
map as long as any portion of it is issued within the selected coverage area of the Connext
Data Request.
AIRMET for
Turbulence
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
AIRMET for
Icing conditions
SIGMET
Figure 6-30 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-31 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the ‘Map- Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT or FIS-B)’ Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
342
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map
Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. The following figure shows sample SIGMET text.
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except
for in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are
reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service
area.
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the
temperature, dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric
pressure at an airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation
amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates
include the code “SPECI” in the report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide
them.
Additional Information on Weather
Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
METAR flag
selected with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-32 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24hour period, and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather
phenomena, and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed
first in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
343
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
information not found in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its original form
when TAFs are available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the MFD:
1) On the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page, press the METAR
Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR
text must be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMSKnob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that
the METAR text must be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF
text.
344
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-33 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the Legend Softkey when
METARs are enabled for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the system cannot determine the METAR category based on the information available.
Figure 6-34 METAR Legend
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the
MF.D. The system shows a METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated
with a METAR flag next to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint
Weather’ Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit
the Active Flight Plan Page.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
345
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map
pointer is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on
the map.
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST (SIRIUSXM)
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather
conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
Figure 6-35 Current Surface Analysis Data
346
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-36 Surface Analysis Legend
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48
HR. The SFC Softkey label changes to show the forecast time selected.
Or:
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
FREEZING LEVEL (SIRIUSXM)
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data
for that altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New
data appears when it becomes available.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
347
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-37 Freezing Level Data
Figure 6-38 Freezing Levels Legend
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the FRZ LVL Softkey.
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and
at selected altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments beginning at the surface up
to 42,000 feet MSL.
If the FIS-B option is installed and FIS-B is the active data link weather source, the Winds Aloft
weather product also displays temperatures aloft next to the winds aloft arrows on the Weather Data
Link (FIS-B) Page.
348
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-39 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Wind Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the
Next or Prev Softkey to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label
changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-40 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) on
the Navigation Map Page. The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track,
but not to aircraft speed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
349
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Track Mode
Boundary of VSD
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-41 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the
right, as shown in the table below.
Headwind Symbol
Tailwind Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
10 knots
50 knots
Table 6-5 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
350
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
a) Select the Navigation Map Page.
b) Press the MENU Key.
c) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation
Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
COUNTY WARNINGS (SIRIUSXM)
The County warning weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes,
severe thunderstorms, and flood conditions.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
351
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flood
Warnings
Thunderstorm
Warning
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-42 County Flood Warning
Figure 6-43 County Warnings Legend
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WXSoftkey.
3) Press the County Softkey.
CYCLONE (SIRIUSXM)
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of DD/
HH:MM.
352
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Cyclone
Figure 6-44 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Figure 6-45 Cyclone Legend
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Cyclone Softkey.
NOTE: If a GDL 69AH SXM receiver is installed, the Cyclone weather product is not available
unless at least one cyclone or tropical storm has been received. The weather product age
indicates ‘N/A’ when no cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
ICING (CIP & SLD) (SIRIUSXM)
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product shows a graphical view of the current icing
environment. Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not
specific to aircraft type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current
conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively
large, super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat
areas are depicted as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
353
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Light Icing Potential
Figure 6-46 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
Figure 6-47 Icing Potential Legend
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the ICNG Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Select the
Next or PREV Softkey to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label
changes to indicate the altitude selected.
TURBULENCE (SIRIUSXM)
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air
mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes
between 21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs,
SIGMETs, and PIREPs.
354
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-48 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet
Figure 6-49 Turbulence Legend
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the TURB Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next
or PREV Softkey to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes
to indicate the altitude selection.
PIREPS AND AIREPS
NOTE: AIREPs are only available with the SiriusXM Weather service.
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are
required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
355
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or
Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
AIREP
Urgent PIREP
PIREP selected with
Map Pointer
Figure 6-50 PIREPs and AIREPS on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
356
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Decoded PIREP Text
Original PIREP
Text
Figure 6-51 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Figure 6-52 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the PIREPS or AIREPS Softkey. (Note the AIREPS Softkey is only available with
the SiriusXM Weather service.)
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear
around the weather report when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text.
The data is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the
original text may contain additional information not present in the decoded version.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
357
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
TFRS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
information. Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service
Stations or Air Traffic Control.
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where
flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national
security, law enforcement, natural disasters, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any
time, and TFR data displayed on the system is only intended to supplement official TFR information
obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system
displays ‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
Information for
selected TFR
Figure 6-53 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page or Navigation Map
Page.
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system
displays TFR summary information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
358
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key.
The system displays the TFR Information window.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
Figure 6-54 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data
is decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is
selected, the TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation
Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be
displayed:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range settings.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
359
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the Aux - ADS-B
Status Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature,
which includes all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B
Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-55 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on ADS-B Status Page
360
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADS-B Status Page Item
Status Message
Description
FIS-B Weather Status: FIS-B
Processing
ENABLED
The FIS-B weather feature is
enabled to process and display FISB weather products.
DISABLED
---------------Weather Products: AIRMET
AVAILABLE
CONUS NEXRAD METAR METAR
GRAPHICAL NOTAM/TFR PIREP
NOT AVAILABLE
REGIONAL NEXRAD SIGMET TAF
WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT
AWAITING DATA
The FIS-B weather feature is
disabled
No FIS-B weather data received
from the transponder.
FIS-B weather data is available for
display for the weather product.
FIS-B weather data is not available
for the weather product, and/or
the system is not receiving the FISB weather service.
The system is receiving the FIS-B
weather service, and is waiting to
receive the weather product from
the FIS-B data broadcast.
Table 6-6 Aux-ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS FOR GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the
Request Status Window.
Weather Request Status
Message
Description
Auto requests inhibited Send The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to
manual request to reset.
excessive errors. Automatic weather data requests have stopped.
Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request
after an error occurred during the previous request. Timer counts
down until the next automatic request occurs.
Connext Comm Error [1]
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system
should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [2]
A communications error has occurred with the GDL59 or GIA. The
system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [3]
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system
should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [4]
This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have
recently failed, or the GDL 59 or a GIA is off-line.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
361
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather Request Status
Message
Description
Connext Comm Error [5]
This can occur if the GDL 59 is off-line or not configured, or the
Iridium or Garmin Connext services are not accessible. Check
Iridium signal strength. If this error persists, the system should be
serviced.
Connext Comm Error [6]
A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the
system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [7]
A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal
strength and re-send the data request.
Connext Comm Error [8]
A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
Connext Comm Error [9]
An error occurred while reading or writing data. If the error
persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Login Invalid
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Contact
Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200,
wait for the operator, and request Extension 1135 for assistance.
Connext Server Temp Inop
The Garmin Connext Weather data server is temporarily out of
service, but is expected to return to service in less than 30
minutes.
Connext Server Inop
The Garmin Connext Weather data server will be out of service for
at least 30 minutes.
Invalid Coverage Area
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least
one of the following: a waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan
destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is enabled
(checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data
request.
No Connext Subscription
The system is not be currently subscribed to Garmin Connext
services or the access code is incorrect. Verify the access code.
Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or
913-397-8200, wait for the operator, and request Extension 1135
for assistance.
Reduce Request Area
The size of the received weather data has exceeded system
memory limits. Reduce the size of the coverage area and issue
another Connext Data Request to ensure all available weather
data has been received.
Request Canceled
The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.
Request Failed - Try Again
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
Transfer Preempted
The GDL 59 is busy. Retry request later.
Table 6-7 Abnormal Garmin Connext Data Request Status Messages
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be
displayed on the PFD maps will be available for display (see the Hazard Avoidance section for a list
of weather products and their associated map availability).
362
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If manual Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new
weather data will be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic Connext Data
Requests were enabled prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic
data requests in Reversionary Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a
system error).
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
363
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the
sole basis for hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause
the system to display inaccurate or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the
lightning detection system manufacturer for detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same
map as lightning information from data link lightning sources.
The system can display L-3 WX-500 Stormscope lightning detection system information on the
Stormscope Page, and as an overlay on navigation maps. The system uses the symbols shown in the
following table to depict lightning strikes and cells based on the age of the information.
Lightning Age
Symbol
Strike is less than 6 second old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-8 Lightning Age and Symbols
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
On the Stormscope Page, lightning information can be displayed at the ranges of 25 NM, 50 NM,
100 NM, and 200 NM.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease
the map range.
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Select the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike Softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the Cell Softkey to display cell data or press the Strike softkey to display strike
data. ‘Cell’ or ‘Strike’ is annunciated in the mode box in the top-right corner of the
Stormscope Page.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the Stormscope Page.
Or:
364
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or
‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.
3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the
menu without changing the modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the
FMS Knob.
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Figure 6-56 Stormscope Page with Cell Mode Selected
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each
turn. This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft. Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays
on the system.
Manually clearing Stormscope cell or strike information:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the Clear Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
365
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
a) Select the Navigation Map Page.
b) Press the MENU Key.
c) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’, then press the ENT
Key.
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
Displaying Stormscope information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
The following options are available:
•
Stormscope On/Off field – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols.
•
Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display Stormscope
symbols. Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is
selected.
•
Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move the cursor among the product
selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity. Stormscope identifies clusters
of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
366
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Mode field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘Cell’ and ‘Strike’ options. When the
desired item is selected, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Stormscope maximum map display range
distance.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
367
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the
map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each
turn. This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft. Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays
on the system.
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
368
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD) TERRAIN
The system offers a Vertical Situation Display (VSD), which includes a profile of terrain and obstacles
in an inset window on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. Although the VSD does not display
TAWS alerts and potential impact areas, the VSD does use many of the same colors and symbols as
TAWS to depict relative terrain and obstacles within the VSD. Refer to the HTAWS discussion for more
information about relative terrain and obstacle color correlation and symbols.
Enabling/Disabling the Vertical Situation Display (VSD):
1) Select the ‘Map -Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the Inset Softkey.
4) Select the VSD Softkey to enable or disable the VSD.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT
Key.
The same controls which enable/disable the display of relative terrain and obstacles on the Navigation
Map Page also control the display of this information in the VSD.
Enabling/Disabling VSD Relative Terrain on the Navigation Map (when VSD is
enabled):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the Terrain Softkey. Each selection cycles though an option displayed in cyan:
Off (disables terrain), Topo (to show topographical data) or REL (to show relative
terrain).
VSD DISPLAY
When the VSD is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented
horizontally along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based
upon the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database
resolution, within a predefined width along the aircraft track between the aircraft present position and
the end of the map range. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase, as annunciated on the
HSI, and is widest during enroute or oceanic phases. Refer to HTAWS discussion for more information
about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
369
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight Phase
Total Profile View Width
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
Table 6-9 Profile View Width Scale
The forward looking swath of terrain is based on the selected VSD Mode, annunciated in the top-left
corner of the VSD Inset Window. In Flight Plan Mode, the contour follows the active flight plan, and if
no active flight plan is present, the VSD Inset Window displays ‘Flight Plan Not Available’. In Track
Mode, the contour is based on the aircraft ground track. In Auto Mode, the contour is based on the
active flight plan, when available, otherwise, it is based on the ground track.
Selecting a VSD Mode:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the Inset Softkey.
4) Select the VSD Softkey displaying the VSD mode in cyan. Each press of the softkey
cycles through a mode selection: FPL (flight plan), TRK (track), or Auto.
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the VSD is
adjusted to match the distance shown on the map range arc, down to one nautical mile. If the
Navigation Map range is adjusted below one nautical mile, the VSD range remains at one nautical mile.
When Navigation Map range is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in
the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the VSD;
only an outline of the terrain will be displayed in black in the VSD Inset Window. Refer to the HTAWS
discussions for more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’
Page.
370
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Profile
View Path
Enabled
Terrain Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
Altitude Scale
Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale
Figure 6-58 VSD on the Navigation Map Page with Relative Terrain Information
TRACK MODE BOUNDARY
The Track Mode Boundary represents the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the VSD. The boundary
is shown as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page and is only available when the VSD is enabled
in Track Mode. White range markers both edges of the Track Mode Boundary rectangle match the range
markers along the distance scale inside the VSD Inset Window whenever the profile range is at least four
nautical miles (or 7.5 km if configured for metric units).
The Track Mode Boundary may be enabled/disabled, and the Navigation Map range at which the
Profile Path is removed from map display can be changed.
Customizing the Track Mode Boundary display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘VSD’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
TRK Mode BNDRY – Enables/disables the display of the Track Mode Boundary and
sets maximum range at which Track Mode Boundary is shown.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
371
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
372
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 HTAWS
HTAWS
WARNING: Do not use HTAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. HTAWS is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: The data contained in the HTAWS databases comes from government agencies and
other sources. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but cannot
guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain
database coverage region.
NOTE: The terrain system is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
latitude.
HTAWS (Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System) increases pilot situational awareness and
aids in preventing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) accidents. HTAWS provides visual annunciations
and voice alerts when terrain, and obstacles, including power lines, are within the given altitude
threshold from the aircraft. The visual annunciations and voice alerts and warnings are advisory in
nature only.
HTAWS requires the following information to operate properly:
•
A valid terrain and obstacle database
•
A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HTAWS (Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System) increases pilot situational awareness and
aids in preventing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) accidents. HTAWS provides visual annunciations
and voice alerts when terrain, and obstacles, including power lines, are within the given altitude
threshold from the aircraft. The visual annunciations and voice alerts are advisory in nature only.
The terrain system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government and other sources.
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain
inaccuracies. Individual obstructions such as towers or power lines may be shown if present in the
database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the displayed
information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain inaccuracies or
omissions.
HTAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and
altitude, along with additional altitude input from an optional radar altimeter. GPS altitude is derived
from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL),
which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system uses GSL altitude
with the terrain and obstacle databases to determine HTAWS alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by
satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect
pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
373
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and
reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by HTAWS are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and
GSL altitude, HTAWS displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, HTAWS uses the GPS position and GSL altitude to
calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In
this manner, HTAWS can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous conditions.
HTAWS incorporates altitude input from an optional radar altimeter for certain alerts.
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local
atmospheric conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently
updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because
actual atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International
Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is
common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude.
DISPLAYING HTAWS INFORMATION
HTAWS uses colors to depict terrain and obstacles relative to aircraft altitude. The system adjusts these
relative colors automatically as the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-59,
Table 6-10, Table 6-11, Table 6-12, and Table 6-13 are used to represent terrain, obstacles, and potential
impact areas.
Red
Aircraft Altitude +250 ft
Terrain is between 250
Orange ft and 0 ft above the
aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
Lighted Obstacle
Aircraft Altitude -250 ft
Terrain is more than
250 ft above the
aircraft altitude
Terrain is between 0 ft
Yellow and 250 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Terrain is between 250
Green ft and 500 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude -500 ft
Black
Terrain is more
than 500 ft below
the aircraft altitude
On the Terrain Proximity Page only, a gray shade of purple indicates no terrain data is available.
Figure 6-59 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for HTAWS
The following tables show the relative obstacle coloring used by the HTAWS.
374
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL
< 1000’ AGL
> 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
> 1000’ AGL
Red point obstacle is at or above the
aircraft altitude
Yellow point obstacle is between the
aircraft altitude to within 250 feet
below the aircraft altitude
White point obstacle is more than
250 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-10 Relative Point Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Wire Obstacle
Wire Obstacle Location
Red wire obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude
Yellow wire obstacle is between the aircraft altitude to
within 250 feet below the aircraft altitude
White wire obstacle is more than 250 ft below the aircraft
altitude
Table 6-11 Relative Wire Obstacles and Colors
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind Turbine
Obstacle
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
Red wind turbine obstacle is at or above the
aircraft altitude
Yellow wind turbine obstacle is between the
aircraft altitude to within 250 feet below the
aircraft altitude
White wind turbine obstacle is more than 250 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-12 Relative Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
375
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Potential Impact Area Examples Alert Type Example Annunciation
or
or
Warning
Caution
Table 6-13 HTAWS Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
The ‘Map - HTAWS’ Page is the principal map page for viewing HTAWS information. HTAWS relative
terrain and obstacle information can be also displayed on the following maps and pages as an additional
reference:
•
PFD Maps
•
Navigation Map Page
•
Trip Planning Page
•
Flight Plan Page
Displaying relative terrain information (MFD maps other than the terrain page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD maps, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘REL’ is shown in cyan on the softkey to display relative
terrain data.
When relative terrain is shown on maps other than the HTAWS Page, a relative terrain icon appears on
the map. A relative terrain legend appears with the icon on the Navigation Map Page. The legend
appears by itself on the HTAWS Page.
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/
disabling the display of relative terrain, point obstacles (such as towers), and wire obstacles (such as
power lines). The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and obstacle data
are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is
removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
maximum range setting also affects the PFD maps.
The pilot can display relative terrain information independently of point or wire obstacle information;
however, obstacles for which warnings and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for
display and the map range is within the setting limit.
376
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the HTAWS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
•
Terrain Display — Enables the display of relative (‘REL’) terrain data or select ‘Off’ to
disable; also sets the maximum map range at which relative terrain is shown on the map.
•
Point Obstacle — Enables/disables the display of point obstacle data and sets the maximum
map range at which point obstacles are shown.
•
Wire Obstacle — Enables/disables the display of wire obstacle data and sets the maximum
map range at which wire obstacles are shown.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range
settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
HTAWS PAGE
The ‘Map - HTAWS’ Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle in relation to the aircraft’s current
altitude, without clutter from the basemap. This page is the principal page for viewing terrain
information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be enabled for additional reference.
The HTAWS Page also shows potential impact areas. If terrain or obstacles intersect with the projected
flight path intersect, the display automatically adjusts to a map range if necessary to emphasize the
display of the potential impact area.
Aircraft orientation on the HTAWS Page is always heading up unless there is no valid heading, in
which case the orientation is track up. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 250 feet to 1000
nm, which is indicated on the map range arc.
The HTAWS Page also provides controls for inhibiting HTAWS alerting, reducing alerting sensitivity
and for muting active cautions. Procedures for these controls are discussed later in this section.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
377
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Red Wire Obstacle
(At or Above Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain
(At or Above
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Wire Obstacles
(Between Aircraft
Altitude and 250’
Below)
Red Lighted
Obstacle (Between
Aircraft Altitude and
250’ Below
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
Aircraft Altitude and
250’ Below)
HTAWS Inhibited
Annunciation
Relative
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-60 HTAWS Page
Displaying the HTAWS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the HTAWS Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the HTAWS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on the current
state) and press the ENT Key.
HTAWS ALERTS
The system issues alerts when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within HTAWS software.
HTAWS alerts employ a caution or a warning alert severity level. When HTAWS issues an alert, the
system displays visual annunciations with voice alerts. Table 6-14 shows HTAWS alert types with
corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The HTAWS Alert Annunciation
is shown above the Roll Scale on the PFD and in the lower-left corner of the HTAWS Page on the MFD.
If the HTAWS Page is not displayed at the time of the alert, a pop-up alert appears in the lower-right
corner of the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
•
Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
•
Press the ENT Key (accesses the HTAWS Page)
378
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Potential Impact
Area Caution
MFD Pop-Up
Alert
PFD Alert Annunciation
Potential Impact Area Caution
Figure 6-61 HTAWS Alert Annunciations
Potential Impact
Area Caution
Caution
Annunciation
Figure 6-62 HTAWS Page
Alert Type
PFD/HTAWS
Page Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except HTAWS
Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
379
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/HTAWS
Page Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except HTAWS
Page)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
Voice Alert
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Line Impact
Warning (ILI)
“Warning; Wire, Wire”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Line Impact
Caution (ILI)
“Caution; Wire, Wire”
Reduced Required Line
Clearance Caution (RLC)
“Caution; Wire, Wire”
Touchdown Callout Voice
Alert
None
None
“Five Hundred”, “Four
Hundred”, “Three Hundred”,
“Two Hundred”, “One Fifty”,
“One Hundred”, “Fifty”*,
“Forty”*, “Thirty”*,
“Twenty”*, “Ten”*
* Alert requires radar altimeter data, otherwise alert is not issued.
Table 6-14 HTAWS Alerts Summary
An existing HTAWS caution voice alert can be muted while it is occurring. Muting an active caution
voice alert does not affect visual annunciations or warning voice alerts. If a new caution alert
subsequently occurs, the muting becomes disabled and the pilot will hear the new caution voice alert. If
a caution is not occurring, the softkey and menu option for caution muting are subdued and cannot be
selected.
Enabling/disabling muting for an active HTAWS Caution Voice Alert:
Press the TA MUTE Button on the collective.
Or:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Map — HTAWS’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the Mute CTN Softkey.
Or:
380
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Mute Active Caution’ or ‘Unmute Active Caution’ (choice dependent on the
current state) and press the ENT Key.
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE (FLTA)
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of HTAWS compares the projected flight
path with terrain, and obstacle information (including wire obstacles) found in the databases. The
system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
The projected flight path is a calculated, three-dimensional area ahead of, to the sides, and below
the aircraft. The size of the projected flight path varies based on factors including, but not limited to
ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is
level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway/helipad along the current
track. As the aircraft approaches the runway/helipad, the projected flight path becomes narrower
until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
Required Terrain Clearance (RTC), Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC), and Required Line
Clearance (RLC) FLTA alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is currently above terrain,
obstacles, or power lines, yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in the
following figure.
Required
Terrain/Obstacle
Clearance
Required
Terrain Clearance
400
350
Required
Terrain
(FT)
Required
TerrainClearance
Clearance (FT)
300
250
200
150
100
RTC Level (FT)
50
RTC Descending (FT)
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway/Helipad (NM)
Figure 6-63 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI), Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI), and Imminent Line Impact (ILI)
FLTA alerts are issued when the aircraft’s altitude is currently below the elevation of terrain, obstacle,
or power lines within the projected flight path.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
381
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLTA alerts are accompanied by yeloow or red potential impact areas displayed on navigation
maps and the HTAWS Page for a caution or warning, respectively.
In situations when reduced FLTA alerting sensitivity may be desired, such as in low-level
operations or during off-airport landings, HTAWS offers a Reduced Protection (RP) Mode. When RP
Mode is enabled, the following occur:
•
RTC is reduced to a maximum of 125 feet when groundspeed is at least 60 knots; RTC is reduced
to zero feet at less than 60 knots.
•
HTAWS reduces the distance of the projected flight path used to scan for terrain and obstacles.
•
HTAWS disables caution alerts.
When RP Mode is enabled, the system status annunciation ‘RP MODE’ is shown on the PFD, and
in the HTAWS Annunciation Window on the MFD.
Figure 6-64 Reduced Protection (RP) Mode Enabled System Status Annunciation
FLTA caution and warning alerts are automatically inhibited in any the following circumstances to
reduce nuisance alerts:
•
The groundspeed is less than 30 knots.
•
The aircraft is operating within a region of a published ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV or LNAV+V
approach service level within a defined descent path.
•
The aircraft is in the vicinity of runways or a heliport.
The pilot can manually inhibit HTAWS FLTA alerts. Discretion should be used when inhibiting
these alerts, as the system should be enabled when appropriate. When HTAWS is inhibited, the
system status annunciation ‘HTAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the HTAWS Annunciation
Window on the MFD.
Figure 6-65 HTAWS Alerting Disabled (HTAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
If HTAWS FLTA alerts are inhibited, or HTAWS is unavailable or has failed when the Final
Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach, a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may
appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the
prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for details.
Enabling/disabling RP Mode:
1) Select the ‘Map — HTAWS’ Page.
2) Press the RP Mode Softkey to enable or disable RP Mode (choice dependent on current
state).
Or:
382
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reduce Protection’ or ‘Enable Full Protection’ (choice
dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Inhibiting/enabling FLTA alerting:
1) Select the ‘Map — HTAWS’ Page.
2) Press the Inhibit Softkey to inhibit or enable HTAWS FLTA alerting. HTAWS is inhibited
when the softkey annunciator is green.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Inhibit HTAWS’ or ‘Enable HTAWS’ (choice dependent
on current state) and press the ENT Key.
TOUCHDOWN CALLOUT ALERTS
HTAWS provides Touchdown Callout voice alerts as the aircraft descends. These alerts are based
on either radar altitude (if a radar altimeter is installed and available) or the GPS-GSL altitude. A
Touchdown Callout voice alert consists of a spoken altitude such as “five hundred”. Each
Touchdown Callout voice alert occurs only once during a descent. Radar altimeter data is required in
order for these alerts to alerts to occur at and below 50’ AGL.
Touchdown Callout alerting has two types of settings available to the pilot on the ‘Aux - System
Setup 2’ Page. The ‘Callouts’ On/Off setting enables/disables all Touchdown Callout voice alerts, and
this setting is always in the ‘Off’ state after an avionics power cycle. No alerting will be heard unless
the pilot enables this setting. The second type of setting allows the pilot to select which altitude(s) to
hear a Touchdown Callout alert, when the alerting is enabled. The system recalls the settings for the
individual Touchdown Callout Alert altitudes on the next avionics power cycle.
The pilot can also restore settings on this page to their default values. Note this will affect all
settings shown on ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page, not just those pertaining to Touchdown Callout
Alerting.
Configuring the Touchdown Callout Alerts
1) Select the Aux — System Setup Page.
2) If the ‘Aux — System Setup 2’ Page is not already displayed, press the Setup 2 Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Callouts’ On/Off field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the ‘Callouts’ setting if desired. When ‘On’ is
selected, enabled alerts will be heard during the descent. When ‘Off’ is selected, no
callouts are heard for any altitude.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
383
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the On/Off field for the individual altitudes as
desired.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for a given Touchdown Callout Alert
altitude.
Restoring default settings for the Touchdown Callout Alerts:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
2) Press the Defaults Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Cancel’
and press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-66 Touchdown Callout Alert Settings (‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page
WIREAWARE POWER LINE ALERTING
For additional safety, HTAWS incorporates Garmin’s WireAware™ wire obstacle alerting technology.
For wire obstacles such as power lines present in the obstacle database, HTAWS shows these on the
maps as well as the Synthetic Vision display; see the Flight Instruments section for more information
about Synthetic Vision displays of power lines.
WireAware database information mainly includes Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) power
lines which are typically high voltage transmission lines depicted on VFR Sectional charts, and are
384
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
considered of special interest to pilots. These include power lines which may span rivers, valleys,
canyons, or be in close proximity to airports/heliports.
It is important to note the obstacle database does not contain all power lines. In fact, WireAware
database coverage is mostly limited to HOT power lines, such as the especially tall transmission lines
and their associated support structures. It does not typically have information for the more prevalent
smaller utility poles or lines, such as those found in residential areas. Furthermore, WireAware
obstacle database coverage exists mainly in the United States; with limited coverage in portions of
Canada and Mexico. In addition, the height of the wire obstacles is commonly estimated and should
not be relied upon for maneuvering decisions.
NOTE: Wire obstacle symbols are not depicted in the Vertical Situation Display (VSD).
HTAWS SYSTEM STATUS
At the beginning of an avionics power cycle, HTAWS performs a system test. The pilot can also
manually select an HTAWS system test as long as the ground speed is less than 30 knots. The system
issues a voice alert at the end of the test. No HTAWS terrain or obstacle alerting is available while a
system test is in progress.
Alert Type
PFD/HTAWS Page
Status Annunciation
HTAWS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
Voice Alert
HTAWS TEST
None
None
“HTAWS Test OK”
HTAWS FAIL
“HTAWS Failure”
None
“HTAWS Not Available”
None
“HTAWS Available”*
HTAWS FLTA
Alerting Inhibited
None
None
Reduced Protection
Mode Enabled
None
None
System Test in
Progress
System Test Pass
None
HTAWS System
Failure
HTAWS Not
Available
HTAWS availability
restored after
previous loss
None
* Voice alert message issued if HTAWS is inhibited.
Table 6-15 HTAWS System Status Annunciations
HTAWS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the “HTAWS Failure”
voice alert with the ‘HTAWS FAIL’ visual annunciation.
HTAWS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums.
Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area,
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
385
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
the ‘HTAWS N/A’ annunciation appears on the PFD and on the HTAWS Page. The voice alert “HTAWS
Not Available” is also generated. When sufficient GPS signal is received and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert “HTAWS Available” is generated (unless HTAWS is inhibited).
Alert Cause
PFD/HTAWS Page
Annunciation
HTAWS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
Voice Alert
None
TERRAIN DATABASE
FAILURE
None
HTAWS FAIL
“HTAWS Failure”
NO GPS POSITION
“HTAWS Not Available”
“HTAWS Available”
when GPS position
returns and HTAWS is
not inhibited.
Excessively degraded
GPS signal
None
“HTAWS Not Available”;
“HTAWS Available”
when sufficient GPS
signal is received and
HTAWS is not inhibited.
Out of database
coverage area
None
“HTAWS Not Available”
“HTAWS Available”
when aircraft enters
database coverage area
and HTAWS is not
inhibited.
MFD Terrain or
Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid.
HTAWS operating with
PFD Terrain or Obstacle
databases
Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable
or invalid on all
displays, invalid
software
configuration, HTAWS
audio fault
No GPS position
Table 6-16 HTAWS Abnormal Conditions
Manually testing the HTAWS System:
1) Select the ‘Map — HTAWS’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test HTAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm
the selection. A voice alert announces the result of the system test when completed.
386
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.6 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories
and does not under any circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see
and avoid other aircraft.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable
terminal radar site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic
Advisory Systems (TAS), Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) and TIS. Aircraft
without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication.
NOTE: Mode S TIS is disabled if another traffic system such as TAS or Automatic Dependent
Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) is installed.
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS
uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground
stations, and is updated every five seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic symbols within a 7.5nm radius, from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays TIS
traffic with the symbology shown in the following table.
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-17 TIS Traffic Symbols
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for
the TA, a solid amber circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map
on which traffic is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°.
Traffic information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in
the center of the Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic
Map Page on which traffic can be displayed.
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/
below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the
altitude separation appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below.
Altitude trend is displayed as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
387
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
the right of the target symbol. Traffic symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear
without altitude separation or climb/descent information.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic
information can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD
when the traffic TIS is operating:
•
PFD Maps
•
Navigation Map Page
•
Traffic Map Page
•
Trip Planning Page
•
Nearest Pages
•
Active Flight Plan Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Terrain-SVT option is installed and
enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Enabling/disabling traffic overlays (MFD navigation maps):
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the navigation map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the
feature is enabled for display.
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Not
Reporting
Altitude
TA Off Scale
Banner
Annunciation
Traffic System
Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-67 TIS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/
disabling display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data
388
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
(symbols and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is
selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on
those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the TrafficSoftkey to enable/disable the display traffic information on the Inset
Map or HSI Map.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
•
Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
•
Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
•
All Traffic - Displays all traffic
•
TA Only - Displays Traffic Alerts only
•
Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
•
Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the
option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range
settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the
changed settings.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s
current position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is
always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to
12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is
on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from
Standby to Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System
Status discussion for more information.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
389
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, 1200’
Above,
Descending
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Range
Marking
Rings
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-68 Traffic Map Page
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the TIS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following
occur:
•
A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
•
A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the right of the airspeed tape, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
•
The PFD Inset Map or HSI Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
390
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated
only when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual
annunciation are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are
generated. If a second TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then
subsequently increases, another voice alert is generated.
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-69 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is
out of range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
•
Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
•
Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
•
Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an
adjacent site.
•
Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about
3000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar
coverage in all directions.
•
Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA
muting status is shown in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the TNA Mute Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the
Traffic Map Page.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
391
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press
the ENT Key.
SYSTEM STATUS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters
Standby Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an
annunciation is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Map Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Description
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the transponder, but a failure is
detected in the data stream*
FAILED
The transponder has failed*
FAILED
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-18 TIS Failure Annunciations
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is
on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map
while Standby Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever
TIS has failed). Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is
displayed. The mode can be changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
392
Traffic Map Mode
Annunciation
Traffic Map Center Banner
Annunciation
Traffic Overlay
Status Icon
(Navigation Maps
DATA FAILED
TRFC FAIL
Data is being
received from the
transponder, but a
failure is detected
in the data
stream*
NO DATA
TRFC FAIL
Data is not being
received from the
transponder*
OPERATING
NONE
TIS is operating
and is receiving
traffic data from a
data link.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
Description
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Mode
Annunciation
Traffic Map Center Banner
Annunciation
Traffic Overlay
Status Icon
(Navigation Maps
Description
OPERATING
UNAVAILABLE
STANDBY
STANDBY
TIS is in Standby
Mode.
UNIT FAILED
TRFC FAIL
The transponder
has failed*
TIS is operating,
but the traffic
service is currently
unavailable or is
out of reception
range.
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-19 TIS Modes and Status Annunciations
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the Standby or Operate Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is
displayed in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and
press the ENT Key.
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left
corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed, as shown in the following table.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Description
TA OFF SCALE
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range* Annunciation
is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
TA X.X ± XX
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory** Annunciation
indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
AGE MM:SS
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds If after
another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the
display The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the
age increases
TRFC COAST
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this
message is displayed
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
393
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Description
TRFC RMVD
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds
since last message) Traffic may exist within the selected display range,
but it is not displayed
TRFC FAIL
Traffic data has failed
NO TRFC DATA
Traffic has not been detected
TRFC UNAVAIL
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-20 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
394
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.7 TAS TRAFFIC
GTS 800 TRAFFIC
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories
and does not under any circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see
and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all
of the traffic information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal
reception, and/or inaccurate information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not
represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of
other aircraft to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to
interrogations due to phenomena such as antenna shading or marginal transponder
performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude
reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: Mode-S TIS is disabled when TAS installed.
NOTE: If a Garmin GTX 345R transponder is installed with this traffic system, refer to the
ADS-B traffic discussion for more information about ADS-B traffic displays.
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight crew situational
awareness by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also
provides visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to assist in visually acquiring traffic.
The GTS 800 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C
transponders, and up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30
aircraft with the highest threat potential can be displayed simultaneously. No TAS surveillance is
provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
THEORY OF OPERATION
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system interrogates the transponders of intruding
aircraft while monitoring for transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the
distance, relative bearing, and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its
surveillance range. The traffic system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the
projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic
Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual annunciations and voice alerts.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
395
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
The GTS 800 TAS surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude.
Under ideal conditions, the system scans transponder traffic up to 12 nm in the forward direction. The
range is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation
signal patterns. In areas of greater transponder traffic density the GTS 800 automatically reduces its
interrogation transmitter power (and therefore range) in order to limit potential interference from
other signals.
In addition, if a 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder is installed, and the traffic system detects
airborne traffic providing 1090 MHz Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B)
information, the system will display the TAS traffic using the ADS-B symbology shown in third table
below.
NOTE: Do not confuse this functionality with full ADS-B capability, which can provide traffic
information from ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and ADS-B traffic outside of the
TAS surveillance volume.
TAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-21 TAS Symbol Description
Traffic Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.
Other Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information.
Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Table 6-22 Traffic with ADS-B Symbology (GTX 335/345 Transponder)
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the
intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
396
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional
information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional
information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of
the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the
direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B
is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the
ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is
in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-23 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a amber circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially
hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A
Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol
at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding
aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic
beyond 6 nm that is neither a TA or PA.
A solid white rounded arrow indicates either a PA or Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional
information, but the position of the traffic is shown with degraded accuracy.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol
in hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus
sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500
fpm in either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
397
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-70 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, a motion vector line extending
beyond the traffic symbol in the direction of the track may also be displayed when either absolute or
relative motion vectors are enabled.
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
Figure 6-71 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional Information and Track
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance
TA alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. The system applies Level A TA sensitivity
when the groundspeed is less than 120 knots; Level B TA sensitivity applies in all other conditions.
Sensitivity
Level
Intruder Altitude
Available
A
Yes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of
vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of
horizontal separation and vertical separation is within 600
feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is
within 600 feet.
A
No
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of
separation.
398
TA Alerting Conditions
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Sensitivity
Level
Intruder Altitude
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
B
Yes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of
vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of
horizontal separation and vertical separation is within 800
feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is
within 800 feet.
B
No
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
Table 6-24 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
TAS ALERTS
When the GTS 800 detects a new TA, the following occur:
•
The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the
bearing, relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For
example, the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in
front of own aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
•
A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds,
and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
•
The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
•
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center
of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text
will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA
traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the
TA are no longer present.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
399
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-72 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance
(nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock” or “No
Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”, “One
Mile” through “Ten Miles”,
or “More than ten miles”
Table 6-25 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
SYSTEM TEST
The GTS 800 provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test
takes ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols
appears on the Traffic Map Page. If the system test passes, the system announces, “TAS System Test
Passed” Otherwise the system announces, “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is
complete, the traffic system enters Standby Mode.
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when
performing a system test during flight.
400
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS Test Mode
Figure 6-73 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be
displayed during test.
4) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
OPERATION
After power-up, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The system must be in Operating Mode for
traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Selecting the Operate Softkey allows the traffic unit to switch from Standby Mode to Operating
Mode as necessary. Selecting the Standby Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
NOTE: The traffic system automatically transitions from Standby to Operating mode eight
seconds after takeoff. The system also automatically transitions from Operating to Standby
mode 24 seconds after landing.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
401
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing traffic system modes on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
3) Press the Operate or TAS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is
displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode.
‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
Or:
a) With the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired mode.
c) Press the ENT Key.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic
information. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is
adjustable with the Joystick (up to 40 nm) as indicated by the map range rings.
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the
‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
TAS Operating Mode
Annunciation
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-74 Traffic Map Page
402
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE DISPLAY MODE
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory
traffic is displayed. TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
•
Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 9900 feet above the
aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
•
Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above
the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the
aircraft to 9900 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below
the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step
2 above):
•
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with
the Joystick, and rings on the map denote the ranges.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
•
750 ft (with optional ADS-B)
•
750 ft and 1500 ft (with optional ADS-B)
•
1500 FT and 0.5 nm (with optional ADS-B)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
403
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
1 nm and 2 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the FLT ID Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice
dependent on current state).
3) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic
information can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD
when the traffic unit is operating:
•
Navigation Map Page
•
Traffic Map Page
•
Trip Planning Page
•
Nearest Pages
•
Active Flight Plan Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
option is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, the system shows a traffic status
icon to indicate traffic is enabled for display.
404
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Proximity
Advisory
Traffic Advisory
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
Figure 6-75 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map
Page):
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
•
Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
•
Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
•
All Traffic - Displays all traffic
•
TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
•
TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
•
All Traffic - Displays all traffic
•
TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
405
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
•
Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
•
Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the
option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu
controls the map range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If
a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps
besides the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page use settings based on those selected for the ‘Map - Navigation
Map’ Page.
A Traffic Map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map will appear in
heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic and
optional datalink weather information on navigation maps.
Showing the HSI Traffic Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the HSI Trfc Softkey.
Traffic information can also be overlaid on PFD navigation maps.
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD navigation Map:
1) With the Inset Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information.
SYSTEM STATUS
Mode
Traffic System Test Initiated
Operating
Traffic Mode Annunciation (Traffic Map
Page)
Traffic Display
Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TEST (‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
OPERATING
Standby
STANDBY(also shown in center of page)
Traffic System Failed*
FAIL
* See the following table for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-26 Traffic Modes
406
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the
‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Traffic Map Page Center Annunciation
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-27 TAS Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left
corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Description
TA OFF SCALE
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected
display range.
TA X.X ± XX
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in
hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TRFC FAIL
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending
incorrectly formatted data)
NO TRFC DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-28 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
407
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.8 ADS-B TRAFFIC
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories
and does not under any circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see
and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all
of the traffic information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal
reception, and/or inaccurate information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not
represented on the display.
The optional Garmin GTX 345R transponder sends and receives Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast (ADS-B) traffic information on the 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES) frequency. It
receives ADS-B traffic and data link weather information on the 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver
(UAT) frequency. The system provides visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to help the pilot
visually acquire potentially conflicting traffic. This discussion covers the traffic features of the GTX
transponder; refer to the Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather section for more
information about the UAT data link weather features of the GTX 345R.
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ADS-B is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic control system and is comprised of three
segments: ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R (Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
ADS-B is the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call
Sign, Tail Number, ICAO registration number, etc), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and
emergency status.
408
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
1090 ES
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
Mode A/C
RADAR
ATC
UAT
UAT
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
Figure 6-76 ADS-B System
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of
aircraft or system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the
capability to receive ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B
information. ADS-B participating refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information.
Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out, or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADSB nonparticipating aircraft.
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the
1090 MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R
is the rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking data
from one link and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, two aircraft are in the service volume
for a ground station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other on 978 MHz, the ground
station retransmits the data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see”
each other.
Because the GTX 345R transponder sends and receives ADS-B traffic reports on the 1090 ES
frequency, but only receives traffic reports on the 978 MHz UAT frequency, the presence of an ADS-R
ground station is necessary for an aircraft with only UAT-capabilities to ‘see’ the aircraft with the GTX
345R transponder.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
TIS-B provides the bridge between the radar-based ATC system and the ADS-B-based system. When
an ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B ground station, the
ground station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is then included
in the list of aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
409
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in Secondary
Surveillance Radar coverage, and the other aircraft is also in Secondary Surveillance Radar coverage,
and is transmitting its altitude.
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM
of the participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts
occur once every three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station
providing the TIS-B service.
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GTX 345R-equipped aircraft
according to the level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S
Transponder
Yes*
*Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar
coverage, or own aircraft is equipped with a TAS/TCAS I system and traffic is within the TAS/TCAS I
surveillance range.
ADS-B WITH TAS
When an optional active traffic system, such as a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed and
operating with an optional GTX 345R transponder, the transponder receives traffic from the active
traffic system and attempts to match (or “correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B traffic the transponder is
tracking. When a correlation is made, only the traffic with the most accurate information is displayed
to the flight crew. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the other)
is also displayed for the flight crew. This correlation of traffic by the transponder improves the
accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of the same aircraft being displayed
twice.
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional
active traffic system providing intermittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or
periodically depicted as two aircraft on the display.
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting
similar to the TAS system discussed previously.
The transponder issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic!
Two O’clock, Low, Two Miles.”
410
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize
nuisance alerts. Radar Altitude (if available), Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)
altitude are used to adjust the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm in accordance with the following table:
Sensitivity
Level
Height
Above
Terrain
(HAT)
GPS Phase
of Flight
Own
Altitude
(Feet)
Lookahead
time (sec)
Vertical
Threshold
for Alert
(feet)
Protected
Volume
(NM)
4
Any
Any
Any
20
850
0.2
4
Any
Any
Any
20
850
0.2
4
Unavailable
Approach
Any
20
850
0.2
5
Any
Any
Any
25
850
0.2
Any
Any
25
850
0.2
Unavailable
Terminal
Any
25
850
0.2
Unavailable
or >2350
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
<=5000
30
850
0.35
Unavailable
or >2350
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
40
850
0.55
Unavailable
or >2350
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
45
850
0.8
Unavailable
or >2350
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
48
850
1.1
Unavailable
or >2350
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
48
1200
1.1
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
>1000
<=2350
>5000
<=10,000
>10,000
<=20,000
>20,000
<=42,000
> 42,000
Table 6-29 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
411
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the
bearing, relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For
example, the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in
front of own aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
•
A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears to the right of the Airspeed Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five
seconds, and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
•
If the PFD Inset Map was already displayed, the traffic is shown on the displayed map. Otherwise
the Traffic Map is shown on the PFD.
•
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center
of the Traffic Map and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will
indicate ‘TA’ followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if
known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the
TA are no longer a factor.
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-77 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock”
through “Twelve
o’clock” or “No
Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude”
(if within 200 feet of own
altitude), or “Altitude not
available”
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Table 6-30 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
412
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
The optional GTX 345R can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground.
There are two ADS-B applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface
Situational Awareness (SURF). The system automatically selects the appropriate application based on
conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feet above the nearest
airport. When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field
elevation. When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic.
At a Traffic Map Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and
runways) appears in addition to traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database.
Refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SafeTaxi displays.
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic
symbols may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic
to be displayed in the SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while
SURF is on. Availability for AIRB and SURF is depicted on the AUX-ADS-B Status Page, discussed later
in this section.
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of
traffic, especially when runways are in close proximity to each other.
SURF Application On
Ground-based
vehicle
Aircraft on
the ground
Figure 6-78 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
413
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the table below. Above or below the traffic
symbol is the traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol
indicates that the traffic is climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft
track
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at
outer range ring at proper bearing.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed
at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder
aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the
aircraft track. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or
own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADSB is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-31 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
OPERATION
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there
is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
414
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRB Application On
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-79 Traffic Map Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic.
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Select the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-
B Off’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test
pattern display.
3) Ensure the the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
4) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
5) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
415
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the
PFDs. At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test
pattern is displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
ADS-B Test Mode
Figure 6-80 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is
displayed. TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following softkeys:
416
•
Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft
to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
•
Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft
to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft
to 9000 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below
the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey
description in step 2 above):
•
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
3) Press the ENT Key.
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict
the traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected,
the vectors extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own
aircraft. These vectors are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s
track and ground speed. These two values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely
with respect to own aircraft, and provide a forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own
aircraft, in the near future.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
417
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Absolute
Motion Vectors
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
Figure 6-81 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
Relative Motion
Vectors
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
Figure 6-82 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select one of the following softkeys:
418
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
Off: Disables the display of the motion vector.
4) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion
Vector Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key.
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select the Duration Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, select the Back Softkey to return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
DISPLAYING ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC INFORMATION
The Traffic Map Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may
include the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft,
service vehicle, unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV)), course, track, groundspeed), and other
information.
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The first selected traffic symbol is highlighted in cyan. Additional
information appears in a window in the upper-right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’
Page.
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan bracket until
the selected aircraft traffic symbol is highlighted.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can be changed at any time. Map range is
adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps. Refer to the previous
TAS/TCAS I discussions for information about these additional traffic displays.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
419
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
•
500 feet
•
500 feet and 1000 feet
•
1000 feet and 2000 feet
•
2000 feet and 1 nm
•
1 and 2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADS-B Mode
Traffic Mode
Annunciation (Traffic
Map Page)
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B: TEST
TEST MODE
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B: AIRB
NONE
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
ADS-B: SURF
NONE
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
NO TRK/HDG
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
Traffic Display
Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See ‘Traffic Failure Annunciations’ Table for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-32 ADS-B Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the ‘Map
- Traffic Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
420
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Center Annunciation
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
NO DATA
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit
is self-reporting a failure
DATA FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
FAILED
Table 6-33 Traffic Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left
corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*. Annunciation is
removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
TA X.X±XX
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**. Annunciation
indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
TRFC FAIL
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly
formatted data)
NO TRFC DATA
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-34 Traffic Status Annunciations
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the AUX - ADS-B
Status Page.
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
421
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-83 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
ADS-B Status
Page Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface
(SURF), Airborne
Alerts (CSA)
Status Message
On
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Available to Run
Traffic application is not currently active, but application
is ready to run when condition(s) determine the
application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Not Available
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is
available, but it does not meet performance
requirements.
Fault
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is
not available or the application has failed
Not Configured
Traffic application is not available, because it has not
been configured. If this annunciation persists, the system
should be serviced.
---------------TIS-B/ADS-R
Coverage
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
Available
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA
ground station.
Not Available
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an
FAA ground station.
--------------
422
Description
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADS-B Status
Page Item
GPS Status: GPS
Source
Status Message
External #1
The GTX 345R is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS
position source.
External #2
The GTX 345R is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS
position source.
--------Ground Uplink
Status: Last Uplink
Description
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Number of minutes, Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink
or ‘------’
from a ground station occurred. If no uplink has been
received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear instead
of a number of minutes.
Table 6-35 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
423
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
BLANK PAGE
424
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 OVERVIEW
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the applicable flight manual for information on the
optional Autopilot Kit.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
425
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
AFCS STATUS BOX
Autopilot mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the autopilot is active. Lateral flight
director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in
white and active in green.
Lateral Modes
Armed
Active
Vertical Modes
Active
Armed
Figure 7-1 AFCS Status Box
426
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 OVERVIEW
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic form, it is still
advisable to carry another source of charts on board the aircraft.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports
in the United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up
view of the airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView, FliteCharts and IFR/VFR electronic charts provides on-board electronic
terminal procedures charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential
information.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as
available services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69AH SXM Data Link
Receiver handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports.
Iridium Telephone, SMS messaging, and Data Link Services is an optional subscription service offered
through Garmin Connext™ and Iridium Satellite LLC.
Connext allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth connection
between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application. The optional Flight
Stream 510 device provides a Bluetooth® connection between the system and a mobile device running
the Garmin Pilot™ application. GPS and AHRS data can then be shared with the mobile device. Also,
flight plans can be transferred from the mobile device to the system. added: Refer to fly.garmin.com for
more information.
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a provider,
such as FlightAware.com.
The Auxiliary Video feature allows viewing images from video equipment, such as an infrared camera.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
427
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 SAFETAXI
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range.
The maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close
enough to show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport
Hot Spots, and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent
features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi
ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport provides enhanced position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways,
and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport
surface where positional awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are
defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion.
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the
maximum configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
- Navigation Map Page
- PFD Maps
- Weather Datalink Page
- Airport Information Page
- Intersection Information Page
- NDB Information Page
- VOR Information Page
- User Waypoint Information Page
- Trip Planning Page
- Nearest Pages
- Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and
airport features. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features
such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time
the softkey is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the Detail All Softkey
removes the taxiway markings and airport feature labels. Pressing the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR
station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the Detail
2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route
structure. Pressing the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter
Levels in the Flight Management Section.
428
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi Range
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the
‘Page Menu.’
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Map Settings’ Menu Option and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Aviation’ Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display
range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
429
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 CHARTS
CHARTS
Electronic charts that resemble the paper versions of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts
(FliteCharts) and Jeppesen terminal procedures charts (ChartView) can be displayed on the MFD.
When the databases for both chart types are purchased and loaded in the system, the desired charts
brand, or source, can be selected for viewing. The active chart source for a particular procedure is
shown on the information pane under Source.
CHARTVIEW
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the
moving map in the planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are
outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when
the current position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the
chart boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the
aircraft symbol is removed from the display.
The following figure shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey
shading is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display.
These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted
geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual
geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft
position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
Inset Box
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
Figure 8-1 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
430
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
•
Arrivals (STAR)
•
Departure Procedures (DP)
•
Approaches
•
Airport Diagrams
•
NOTAMs
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts
While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘NRST-Nearest Airport’ Page, or ‘FPLActive Flight Plan’ Page, press the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Options’ Menu to Charts.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu
Figure 8-2 Option Menus
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner No Available Charts appears
on the screen. The No Available Charts banner does not refer to the FliteCharts
subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or
procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-3 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an
individual chart), the banner Unable To Display Chart is then displayed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
431
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-4 Unable To Display Chart Banner
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu
Option, charts may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan
Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active
flight plan, the chart appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not
flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the
nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT–Airport Information’ page. Usually
this is the airport runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off
Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that page appears. If Airport
Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
Selecting a chart
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page, or ‘NRST-
Nearest Airports’ Page, press the Chart Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart
is displayed on the ‘WPT-Airport Information’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the ‘Approach’
Box. (Press the APR Softkey if the ‘Approach’ Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Approach’ Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
432
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
Chart Scale
Figure 8-5 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
While the Approaches Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank.
Once the desired chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page
can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing the Joystick centers the chart on the
screen.
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft
position is within the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO
SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at
certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the
associated map in the WPT page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey
switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport Diagram and the navigation map
on the ‘WPT–Airport Information’ page.
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is
on a different chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2
Softkey has no effect. The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView
diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within the chart boundaries.
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart
for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2
Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The
Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering information; the Airport
Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are
Jeppesen designators.)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
433
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Aircraft
Current
Position
Figure 8-6 Airport Information Page, Info View, Full Screen Width
In the example shown in following figure, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the
ENT Key displays the Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart.
Figure 8-7 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from Info View
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and
includes weather data such as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver,
434
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
when available. Weather information is available only when a SiriusXM Data Link
Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
- Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the
ChartView database. Pressing the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information
for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM
Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM Softkey may appear on the
Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the NOTAM
Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
NOTE: Only NOTAMs applicable to specific information conveyed on the displayed Jeppesen
chart are available when the NOTAM Softkey is pressed. There may be other NOTAMs
available pertaining to the flight that may not be displayed. Contact Jeppesen for more
information regarding Jeppesen database published NOTAMs.
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRTOpt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
Complete
Chart
Shown
Figure 8-8 Approach Information Page, All View
Pressing the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
Pressing the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
Pressing the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
435
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom
of the approach chart.
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the Fit WDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the
right.
Selecting Additional Information
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the Full SCN Softkey to display the
information windows (Airport, Info).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are
available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key
to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection
softkeys. The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’
Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Color Scheme’
Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the ‘On’ and ‘Off’ ‘Full Screen’ Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Figure 8-9 Page Menus
436
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Day/Night View
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing.
The Day View offers a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View
gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark environment. When the Chart Setup
Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’
Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the
ENT Key.
Figure 8-10 Page Menu Chart Setup
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Color Scheme’ Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use
the small FMS Knob to change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/
night crossover point based on the percentage of backlighting intensity. For example, if
the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display backlight
reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may
be accomplished by selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
437
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-11 Arrival Information Page, Day View
Figure 8-12 Arrival Information Page, Night View
FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts
are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when
the current position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These
charts will display an Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
Figure 8-13 Aircraft Not Shown Icon
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas
are indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These offscale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted
geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual
geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft
position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
438
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
- Arrivals (STAR)
- Departure Procedures (DP)
- Approaches
- Airport Diagrams
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
AIRPORT DIRECTORY
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
databases offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more.
This information is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the Info Softkey until Info 2 is
displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of
the databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases
simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information
for the airport closest to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, press the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Figure 8-14 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
439
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
IFR/VFR CHARTS
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a
high altitude IFR chart, if installed. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and
setup on the Navigation Map, but the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only
the following items will be overlaid on the chart:
•
Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent
information)
•
Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
•
Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
•
Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
•
Wind Direction and Speed
•
Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
•
Flight Plan Legs
•
Track Vector
•
Runway Extension
•
Missed Approach Preview
•
Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
•
Visual Reporting Points
•
VNAV Constraints
•
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected
on either the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on
the Navigation Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
When different VFR charts exist for the same area the chart type will automatically display according
to the range chosen. For example, in an area where both a Sectional and a Terminal Area Chart (TAC)
are available, a range of 6 nm or more will show the Sectional chart. Once the range is decreased
below 6 nm, the system will automatically change the displayed chart from the Sectional to the TAC.
Due to the potential error involved with the electronic depiction of maps, charts will display a gray
‘circle of uncertainty’ centered upon the aircraft icon. The aircraft’s actual position can be anywhere
within the range of the gray circle. The range of the circle will change based on the chart displayed and
current zoom range.
440
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-15 Navigation Information on the VFR Chart
Figure 8-16 Navigation Information on the IFR Low Altitude Chart
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
441
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-17 Navigation Information on the IFR High Altitude Chart
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected
on either the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on
the Navigation Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
Selecting IFR Low, IFR High, VFR Charts:
1) Select the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
2) Press the VFR, IFR Low, or IFR High Softkey to display the desired chart.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
b) Select ‘Display VFR’, ‘Display IFR Low’ or ‘Display IFR High’ to display the desired
chart.
c) Press the ENT Key.
442
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISIONS
Databases that may be available include FliteCharts, Obstacle, Terrain, IFR/VFR, Navigation,
ChartView, SafeTaxi, Airport Directory. Data is revised and expiration dates vary. Data is still viewable
during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. When turning on the
system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the databases. As an example, see the table
below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page displays and the definition of each. The expiration date
and disables date varies for each database.
Example Power-up Page Display Text
Table 8-1 Database Power-up Page Annunciations
White text, such as ‘FliteCharts Data Expires’ plus a date, indicates the chart database is current.
Yellow text, such as ‘Chart data is out of date!’ or ‘FliteCharts Data: Disabled”, indicates charts are no
longer viewable and have expired.
Database time critical information can also be found on the ‘Aux - System Status’ page. The database
Region, Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or
yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within
the current subscription period.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the applicable database
information is shown.
Database cycle numbers are in a format such as YYTI or YYII, which are deciphered as follows:
YYTI
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
T – Indicates the database type (ex. S is for SafeTaxi, D is for Airport Directory)
I – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 5 is the fifth issue of the year)
YYII
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
II – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 05 is the fifth issue of the year)
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix for instructions on revising databases.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
443
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Example Power-up Page Display Text Database Cycle Number Format Revision Cycle
YYII
28 days
YYMI
Not Applicable
YYTI
Not Applicable
YYBI
56 days
YYSI
56 days
YYDI
56 days
YYII
28 days
YYII
14 days
YYII
28 days
Table 8-2 Database Cycle Number and Revision
444
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.5 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather
products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL69AH SXM Data Link Receiver
is available for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69AH SXM can receive SiriusXM Satellite
Radio entertainment services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to
constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based
transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific
service packages, visit www.siriusxm.com.
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services:
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two
coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio
ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite Radio to activate the entertainment
subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions
with the GDL 69AH SXM. Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite
Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation signal that, when
received by the GDL 69AH SXM, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
•
On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
•
On the XM Information Page on the MFD
•
On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at
www.garmin.com, P/N 190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite
Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ page.
4) Press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux-XM Information’ Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
445
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Audio
Radio ID
Data
Radio ID
Weather
Products
Window
Figure 8-18 XM Information Page
6) If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are
blank on the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is
displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service
Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Press the Radio Softkey to show the ‘XM Radio’ Page where audio entertainment is
controlled.
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the
SiriusXM Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected
category. Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel
number.
446
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
2) Press the CH+Softkey to go up through the list in the ‘Channels’ Box, or move down
the list with the CH–Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll
through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
2) Press the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the ‘Active Channel’ Box is
highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the
desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories
of channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music
or other contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been
programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Press the Category Softkey on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category
with the small FMS Knob and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all
channels in the list.
PRESETS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are
selected by pressing the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly
and added to the channel list for the Presets category.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
447
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, while listening to an ‘Active Channel’ that is wanted for a
preset, press the Presets Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 Preset 5).
2) Press the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and
again to access the last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Pressing the More
Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active
channel.
4) Press the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the
top level softkeys.
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the Volume Softkey,
which brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
NOTE: Refer to section 4 for audio panel adjustments in blue mode. Blue mode volume
adjustments on the audio panel impact the volume adjustment on the radio page.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page displayed, press the Volume Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase
volume. (Once the VOL Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the
small FMS Knob.)
Muting SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page or ‘Aux-XM Information’ Page.
2) Press the Mute Softkey to mute the audio. Press the Mute Softkey again to unmute
the audio.
448
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND SMS MESSAGING
NOTE: An account must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice/SMS.
NOTE: Refer to Section 4 for blue-mode audio selection.
The GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone
service, and Short Message Service (SMS).
The telephone is available to the flight crew through the audio panel and headsets.
REGISTERING WITH GARMIN CONNEXT
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting
up an Iridium account, obtain the System ID and serial number of the Iridium Transceiver. Contact
Garmin Connext at http://www.flygarmin.com/.
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and
monitoring of telephone functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
Viewing the Telephone Page:
The phone status display gives a graphical representation of the current disposition of
voice and/or data transmissions.
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Telephone’ or ‘Aux - Text Messaging’
Page.
3) If necessary, press the Phone Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
Internal Phone External Phone
Description
Phone is Idle
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another
phone
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
Phone has failed
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
449
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Internal Phone External Phone
Description
Phone status not known
Phone is disabled
Phone is reserved for data transmission
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
Table 8-3 Telephone Symbols
Disabling/enabling telephone and low speed data services:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
3) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’ in the menu list.
Figure 8-19 Select Disable Iridium Transmission
5) Press the ENT Key. The Iridium transceiver is now disabled.
6) To enable the Iridium transceiver, repeat steps 1 through 3, then select ‘Enable Iridium
Transceiver’.
INCOMING CALLS
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed and
an aural alert “Incoming Call” will be heard. If the incoming call is an Iridium network call, Iridium
will be displayed. The pop-up alert may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to
the pop-up alert, a ringing phone symbol will be displayed to the right of the MFD page title. Also, the
voice alert “Incoming Call” will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
450
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Answering an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page
2) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
3) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
5) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the Answer Softkey on the MFD.
Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call
unanswered. Pressing the Phone Softkey will display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page allowing
additional call information to be viewed before answering.
Muting incoming call alerts:
1) With the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display
the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an
incoming call is received.
OUTGOING CALLS
Making an external call:
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the Dial Softkey on the MFD.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
451
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-20 Enter Phone Number
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Iridium’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor has now moved to the phone number entry field.
The International dialing sequence is necessary to place a call from the cockpit to an
external phone: Country Code + City/Area Code (if any) + Telephone Number. The
following country codes may be used when calling other satellite telephone systems.
Satellite System Country Code
Inmarsat
870
ICO
8810 or 8811
Ellipso
8812 or 8813
Iridium
8816 or 8817
Globalstar
8818 or 8819
5) Enter the desired telephone number (country code first) by pressing the number
softkeys on the MFD.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number.
452
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-21 System is Making the Connection
When the phone is answered, the connection is established. To exit the call, press the
Hangup Softkey.
Figure 8-22 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD
Placing a call on hold:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
453
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Press the Hold Softkey on the MFD.
The cockpit phone is now isolated from the call. This figure illustrates a call between
the cockpit and an external phone in which the cockpit phone has been put on hold.
Press the Hold Softkey again to resume the call.
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages
may be sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited
to 160 characters, including the email address. Senders should address text messages to aircraft by
entering [aircraft Iridium phone number]@msg.iridium.com.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ or ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Figure 8-23 Text Messaging Page
Message Symbol
Description
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
Saved text message, draft not sent
System is sending text message
Text message has been sent
454
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Message Symbol
Description
System failed to send text message
Predefined text message
Table 8-4 Text Message Symbols
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, a pop-up alert will be
displayed when a new text message is received.
New Text Message Pop-up
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-24 New Text Message Received
Press the View Softkey to view the message. Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up
window and leave the text message unopened. Pressing the Ignore All Softkey will extinguish the popwindow and ignore all future incoming text messages. Pressing the SMS Softkey will display the ‘AuxText Messaging’ Page.
Figure 8-25 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
455
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to
display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable
New Message Popups’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text
message is received.
Figure 8-26 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the Reply Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
Text messages may be sent from the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
456
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-27 Composing a New Text Message
2) The SMS Text Message Draft Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field.
Enter the desired telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished
through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS
Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters
and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers
Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters.
Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step
2.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the Send Softkey to send the message immediately, or press the Save Softkey to
save the message in Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the Cancel Softkey to
delete the message.
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these
messages as a predefined message.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
457
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Creating a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page
Menu.
Figure 8-28 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined Messages view is now displayed.
4) Press the New Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed.
Figure 8-29 Composing a Predefined Message
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘Title’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be
accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of
the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to
458
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the
Numbers Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha
characters. Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step
5.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the Save Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list.
Pressing the Cancel Softkey will delete the message without saving.
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Cancel Drafting Message’.
12) Press the ENT Key.
Sending a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
2) The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’
field. Enter the desired telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished
through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS
Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters
and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers
Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters.
Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
4) Press the Predefined Softkey. The Predefined Message Menu Window is displayed.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If
desired, the message can be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the Send Softkey to transmit the message.
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains
‘Sent” and ‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts.
Each text message box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Show Inbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Inbox Softkey.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
459
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left
of the list window.
Figure 8-30 Text Message Inbox
Show Outbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Outbox Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left
of the list window.
Show Draft messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Drafts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left
of the list window.
460
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the
type of message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Time Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list
window.
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Type Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list
window.
Viewing messages sorted by address:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Address Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list
window..
Viewing the content of a text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, select the desired message box.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the View Softkey.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
461
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Message content is displayed.
5) To close the text message, press the Close Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Marking selected message as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to
activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the MRK Read Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
Marking all messages as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to
display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate
all the message have been opened.
462
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Deleting a message:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to
activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the Delete Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
463
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being
logged by the system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data
card (up to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be
recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged
on a specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport
identifier. The file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has
been inserted.
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page. If no SD card has
been inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA”
is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
•
Local Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
•
Local Time (HH:MM:SS)
•
Active Waypoint Distance (nm)
•
Active Waypoint Bearing (degrees mag.)
•
UTC Offset (HH:MM)
•
Mag. Variation (degrees)
•
Active Waypoint Identifier
•
Voltage 1 (volts)
•
Voltage 2 (volts)
•
Amps 1 (amps)
•
Amps 2 (amps)
•
AFCS On ( 0 – false, 1 – true)
•
Latitude (degrees)
•
AFCS Roll Mode (e.g. HDG, LOC, GPS, VOR, ROL)
•
Longitude (degrees)
•
Right Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
•
Left Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
•
Center Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
•
AFCS Pitch Mode (e.g. ALT, GS, GP, VS)
464
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
•
Barometric Altitude (feet)
•
Altimeter Setting (in. Hg.)
•
GPS Altitude (ft)
•
Pitch Commanded (degrees)
•
Roll Commanded (degrees)
•
OAT (deg. C)
•
True Airspeed (kts)
•
Selected Vertical Speed (fpm)
•
Vertical Speed (fpm)
•
HSI Selection (GPS,NAV1/2)
•
GPS Fix (e.g. 2D, 3D, 3DDiff)
•
Indicated Airspeed (kts)
•
Horizontal Alert Limit (HAL, meters)
•
Gnd Speed (kts)
•
Vertical Alert Limit (VAL, meters)
•
Vertical Speed (fpm)
•
NAV1 Frequency (MHz)
•
NAV2 Frequency (MHz)
•
Horizontal Protection Level (HPLWAS, meters)
•
Pitch (degrees)
•
Roll (degrees)
•
Horizontal Protection Level (HPLFD, meters)
•
Vertical Protection Level (VPLWAS, meters)
•
COM1 Frequency (MHz)
•
COM2 Frequency (MHz)
•
Lateral Acceleration (g)
•
CDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
•
VDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
•
Normal Acceleration (g)
•
Heading (degrees magnetic)
•
Course (deg)
•
Wind Direction (degrees mag.)
•
Wind Speed (kts)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
465
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
•
Gnd Trk (degrees magnetic)
•
Fuel Flow (gph)
•
Fuel Press. (psi)
•
Oil Temperature (deg. F)
•
Oil Pressure (psi)
•
Engine Speed (rpm)
•
Power (%)
•
Torque (ft. lbs.)
•
Np (rpm)
•
Ng (%)
•
ITT (deg. C)
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file
can be imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
log_170610_104506_KIXD.csv
Figure 8-31 Log File Format
Data logging status can be monitored on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page.
466
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.8 MAINTENANCE LOGS
The system provides recording of CAS, CMC, exceedances, and other critical aircraft data that occur
while the aircraft is on the ground or in flight. This information may be used by aircraft maintenance
personnel in determining specific maintenance requirements.
The Maintenance Logs feature is accessible by entering a password. No pilot action is required.
Viewing the Maintenance Logs Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Maintenance Logs’. The ‘Aux - Maintenance Logs’
Page is now displayed.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
467
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.9 CONNEXT SETUP
The Connext Setup Page allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a
Bluetooth connection between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
Refer to fly.garmin.com for more information
The mobile device must be ‘paired’ with the system in order to use the various functions. Pairing is
accomplished by first placing the system in pairing mode by displaying the Connext Setup Page. The
system is ‘discoverable’ whenever this page is displayed. The pairing operation is completed from the
mobile device and the Garmin Pilot application. See the device Bluetooth pairing instructions and the
connection instructions in the Garmin Pilot application.
Viewing the Connext Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Connext Setup page.
Changing the Bluetooth Name:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Bluetooth Name’ field.
3) Enter the desired name by using the large FMS Knob to select the character field, and
the small FMS Knob select the desired alphanumeric character for that field.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is removed and the new name is displayed.
Enabling/Disabling Flight Plan Importing from Garmin Pilot:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Flight Plan Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Enabling/Disabling WiFi Database Importing from Garmin Pilot:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘WiFi Database Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Reconnection of a Specific Paired Device:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
468
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. Selecting ‘Enabled’ allows
the system to automatically connect to a previously paired device when detected.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Remove a Specific Paired Device from the List of Paired Devices:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
3) Press the Remove Softkey. A confirmation screen is displayed.
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’.
5) Press the ENT Key to remove the device from the list of paired devices.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
469
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 AUXILIARY VIDEO
The system provides a control and display interface to an optional video display.
VIDEO SOFTKEYS
While on the ‘Aux - Video’ Page, pressing the Zoom+ or Zoom- Softkeys increases or decreases video
display magnification between 1x and 2x.
Pressing the Hide Map Softkey removes the map and displays video on the full screen. The softkey
label changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the Hide Map Softkey again restores the map
view and the small video image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
Pressing the Setup Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: Contrast-, Contrast+, Bright-,
Bright+, SAT-, SAT+, Reset, and Back.
Pressing the Contrast- and Contrast+ Softkeys adjust display contrast in five percent increments from
0 to 100%. Pressing the Bright- and Bright+ Softkeys adjust display brightness in five percent
increments from 0 to 100%. Pressing the SAT- and SAT+ Softkeys adjust display saturation in five
percent increments from 0 to 100%.
Pressing the Reset Softkey returns all video adjustments options to the default settings.
While viewing the Setup Softkeys, pressing the Back Softkey or after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity,
the system reverts to the ‘Aux - Video’ Page softkeys.
The video adjustment options can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Displaying auxiliary video:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select Video and display the ‘Aux-Video’ Page.
Selecting video menu options:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Video’ Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu
Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press
the ENT Key.
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the
‘Aux - Video’ Page.
470
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-32 Aux - Video Page Menu
VIDEO SETUP
Video brightness, contrast, and saturation may be adjusted be selecting the setup function. While
viewing the setup function softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the
‘Aux - Video’ Page softkeys.
Adjusting the video settings:
1) With the ‘Aux-Video’ Page displayed, press the Setup Softkey.
2) Press the Bright- or Bright+, to adjust display brightness in five percent increments
from 0 to 100%.
3) Press the Contrast- or Contrast+, to adjust display contrast in five percent increments
from 0 to 100%.
4) Press the SAT- or SAT+, to adjust display saturation in five percent increments from 0 to
100%.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the previous softkey level.
Press the Reset Softkey to return the display to the default settings.
DISPLAY SELECTION
Pressing the Hide Map Softkey removes the map and displays video on the full screen. The softkey
label changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the Hide Map Softkey again restores the map
view and the small video image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
INPUT SELECTION
While on the ‘Aux - Video’ Page, press the Input Softkey to select Input 1 or Input 2. The selected
input is displayed in the upper left of the video display.
ZOOM/RANGE
Pressing the Zoom+ or Zoom- Softkeys increases or decreases video display magnification between
1x and 10x.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
471
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The Joystick can be used to increase or decrease the range setting on the map display or zoom in
and out on the video display. While in the Split-Screen mode, pressing the Map Actv or Vid Actv
Softkey determines which display the Joystick adjusts. Pressing the softkey to display Map Actv allows
the Joystick to control the range setting of the map display. Pressing the softkey to display Vid Actv
allows the Joystick to control the zoom setting of the video display.
When zooming in on the video display, a Zoom Window will appear in the upper right of the
display. A box within this window indicates the portion of the display currently being viewed. The
currently displayed portion of the full display may be adjusted by using Joystick.
Zoom
Window
Current
View
Figure 8-33 Zoom Window
472
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.11 WIFI CONNECTIONS
The optional GDL 59H Data Link provides a high speed IEEE 802.11g WiFi data link between the
aircraft and a ground computer network while the aircraft is on the ground and located within range of
the network.
The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPAEnterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive
portals, or other elements that require user credentials, including a user name and password or a
redemption or access code; or require action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
Control and monitoring of Wi-Fi functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux-Maintenance WiFi
Setup’ Page.
Viewing the WiFi Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Maintenance WiFi Setup’ Page.
Setting up a new WiFi connection:
1) Press the Avail Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the
Available Networks window. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as
security requirements and whether the network has been saved in the system’s
memory.
Figure 8-34 Available WiFi Networks
2) If necessary, press the Rescan Softkey to have the system scan again for available
networks.
Or:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
473
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network.
Figure 8-35 Desired Network Selected
5) Press the Connect Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect to Selected Network’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
6) If the network is secured, a window will be displayed in order to enter the necessary
passcode. Use the FMS Knobs to enter the desired alpha numeric characters. Press the
CapsLock Softkey to enter upper case letters. If there is no security associated with the
network, proceed to step 9.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key again.
9) The Save Settings window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘Save
Connection’.
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make re-connection easier at
a later time.
474
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Editing a saved network:
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the Auto Connect checkbox.
When a checkmark is present, the system will automatically connect to the network
when within range.
4) Press the Edit Softkey. The cursor now appears in the Connection Settings window.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘Save’ is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key.
Disconnecting a WiFi network:
Press the DISCNCT Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Deleting a saved WiFi network:
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
3) Press the Delete Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
475
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.12 POSITION REPORTING
NOTE: An account must be established with Garmin Connext™ to make full use of the
Position Reporting feature.
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a provider,
such as FlightAware.com.
The position reports can be activated or deactivated by the pilot. While active, the position reports are
transmitted over the Iridium Short Burst Datalink periodically at a pilot specified interval or by pressing
the Send REP Softkey. The minimum automatic transmission period between reports is two minutes
with more frequent transmissions possible via manually sending reports with the Send REP Softkey.
During voice communications and data transfers the Iridium datalink is occupied and position reports
will not be sent. During this period the reports will buffer and be sent as a package as soon as the link is
available. The position reports are received by Garmin Connext and forwarded to select flight tracking
provider(s).
To reduce excess usage, position reports are only transmitted while the aircraft is in the air.
The following are position reports contents:
•
Tail Number
•
Time
•
Latitude/Longitude
•
Ground Speed
•
Ground Track
•
Heading
•
Barometric Altitude
•
True Airspeed
•
Outside Air Temperature
•
Destination
•
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
•
Airborne Status
The Airborne Status field is the indication that the aircraft is on the ground or in the air at the time the
position report was generated. The avionics generate a position report when the Airborne Status field
changes state.
•
Passenger Onboard
Passenger Onboard indicates passengers are on the aircraft at the time the position report was
generated. A position report is generated when the Passenger Onboard field changes state.
476
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing the Connext Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux-Connext’ Page.
Figure 8-36 Aux-Connext Page
Setting up Position Reporting:
1) With the ‘Aux-Connext’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor in
the Transmission Period field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ for automatic transmission of position reports
or ‘Off’ to disable transmission of position reports.
3) Press the ENT Key. The selection is entered and the cursor is placed in the Transmission
Rate field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the first digit.
5) Again, turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the second digit.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
8) Press the ENT Key. The selection is entered and the cursor is placed in the Passengers
On Board field.
9) Turn the small FMS Knob left or right to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’.
10) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
477
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Sending a position report manually:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux-Connext’ Page.
3) If necessary, set the Transmission Period to ‘Auto’.
4) Press the Send REP Softkey.
478
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.13 ABNORMAL OPERATION
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to
fly to correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at
the top or bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the
horizon during extreme pitch attitudes.
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the
display.
Figure 8-37 Unusual Attitude Display
GDL 69AH SXM DATALINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a
failure.
•
Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed
to SiriusXM
•
Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
•
Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link
Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the ‘Aux - System Status Page’ for
Data Link Receiver (GDL 69AH SXM) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure
has been detected in the GDL 69AH SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux —System Status’ Page (the last page in the
Aux Page Group).
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
479
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Message
Message Location
Description
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD)
Data Link Receiver updating encryption
code
NO SIGNAL
XM Information Page Weather Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
Datalink Page (MFD)
receiver
LOADING
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
WEATHER DATA LINK
FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
No communication from Data Link
Receiver within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTION
ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription is activating
WAITING FOR DATA...
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription confirmed
downloading weather data
Table 8-5 Data Link Receiver Messages
480
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through
the audio panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
When Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages are generated, a CAS window containing messages
appears to the right of the vertical speed indicator on the PFD. Up to 12 messages can be displayed;
when more than 12 messages accumulate, the CAS Softkey becomes available. Pressing the CAS
Softkey displays the CAS Up and CAS Dn Softkeys for scrolling up and down through the messages
in the PFD CAS Window.
In Reversionary Mode, the CAS Softkey takes the place of the INSET Softkey.
CAS alerts are additionally displayed on the upper left of the Engine Page. Up to 19 messages can be
shown; when more than 19 messages accumulate, the CAS [Up Arrow] and CAS [Down Arrow]
Softkeys will become available to permit scrolling up and down through the messages on this page.
PFD CAS
Window
CAS Scrolling Softkeys
(Disabled Until More
Than 14 Messages
are Displayed)
Figure A-1 CAS Display (PFD)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
481
APPENDIX A
MFD Alerts
window
containing CAS
messages
CAS Scrolling Softkeys
(Disabled Until More
Than 19 Messages are
Displayed)
Figure A-2 Engine Page CAS Display (MFD)
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
CAS messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory, status) and sorted by order of
appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its urgency and on
required action. Refer to the current version of the applicable flight manual for recommended pilot
actions.
•
Warning (red) – Immediate crew awareness and immediate crew action required; accompanied by
one or more aural tones and a steady ‘WARNING’’ PBA light that is illuminated above the PFD.
•
Caution (amber) – Immediate crew awareness and subsequent corrective action required
accompained by single chime and a steady ‘CAUTION’ PBA light is illuminated above the PFD.
•
Advisory (white) – Crew awareness required and subsequent action may be required.
•
Status (green) – Crew awareness required.
DISPLAY INHIBITS
Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during certain conditions. If two alert
levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., DOOR AJAR warning and DOOR AJAR
advisory) only the higher alert level is displayed; or if a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages
depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically inhibited. Inhibits cannot be
activated by invalid sensor data.
WARNING MESSAGES
Refer to the current version of the applicable flight manual for recommended pilot actions.
482
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Annunciation Text
Description
BATTERY HOT
Battery overheat detected.
ENGINE FIRE
Fire/Overheat detector senses a temperature greater than or
equal to 338°F.
ENG OIL HOT
Engine oil overheat is detected.
ENG OIL PSI LOW
Engine oil pressure is low.
Ng less than 55% or FADEC senses engine out.
ENGINE OUT
ENGINE OVSPD
NP greater than 102.1% for 2.5 seconds or immediately when
above 107.3%.
Both the primary and reversionary channels have failed.
FADEC FAIL
XMSN OIL PRESS
Transmission oil pressure is low.
XMSN OIL TEMP
Transmission oil overheat is detected.
CAUTION MESSAGES
Refer to the current version of the applicable flight manual for recommended pilot actions.
Annunciation Text
AP DEGRADED
Autopilot fault detected. Performance degraded.
AP FAILED
AP failed.
AUTOTRIM
Autopilot trim system failure/fault detected.
BAGGAGE DOOR
Baggage door is not securely latched.
BATTERY RLY
Battery relay energized when battery switch is off. Battery still
connected to DC bus.
ENGINE CHIP
Chip detector has detected debris in engine oil.
ENG FUEL FILT
Engine mounted fuel filter is clogged and is currently
bypassed.
ENG OIL FILTER
Engine oil filter is in impending bypass.
ENG OIL PSI HI
FADEC has detected that engine oil pressure is high.
ENGINE MGT
MGT is in exceedance.
Backup Engine Controller is active.
FADEC BEC
FADEC DEGRADED
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Description
FADEC ECU operation is degraded (in-flight), FADEC ECU has
recorded a fault during previous flight, or a current fault has
been detected (wth engine shut down).
FLOAT ARM
Float Arm switch is in the armed position.
FUEL LOW
Fuel feed tank sensor indicates low fuel. 100 ± 10 pounds of
fuel remain in aft tank.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
483
APPENDIX A
Annunciation Text
FUEL VALVE
GEN FAIL
HEATER OVERTMP
HYDRAULIC SYS
L/FUEL BOOST
Description
Fuel valve is in transition or is not in the commanded
position.
Generator not connected to DC bus.
An over temperature condition has been detected either
under the pilot’s seat, copilot’s seat, or in the vertical tunnel.
Low pressure in hydraulic system.
Left fuel boost pump has failed.
L/FUEL XFR
Left fuel transfer pump has failed.
LITTER DOOR
Litter door is not securely latched.
MGT EXCEED
Engine MGT is in exceedance.
NG EXCEED
Engine Ng is in exceedance.
NP EXCEED
Engine NP is in exceedance.
NR MISCOMP
NR miscompare event.
NR EXCEED
NR exceedance > 118% has been detected.
PEDAL STOP
System has detected a failure in the pedal stop system.
Q EXCEED
Q MISCOMP
R/FUEL BOOST
Engine torque is in exceedance.
Miscompare of primary Q and alternate Q data source.
Right fuel boost pump has failed.
R/FUEL XFR
Right fuel transfer pump has failed.
SLIDING DOOR
Sliding door is not securely latched.
T/R CHIP
XMSN CHIP
T/R Chip Detector has detected debris.
Transmission Chip Detector has detected debris in
transmission oil.
ADVISORY MESSAGES
Annunciation Text
ALTN DATA FAIL
Alternate engine data source is not available.
AUTO RELIGHT
Engine igniter is operating.
ENG ANTI-ICE
Engine Anti-Ice valve is open.
ENG FUEL FILT
Engine fuel filter is in impending bypass.
ENG MISCOMP
Engine Miscomp event
FADEC CHAN FAIL
FADEC MAINT
INSTR FAN
484
Description
Single FADEC channel has failed.
Indicates FADEC system requires maintenance.
Instrument panel area fan has failed.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Annunciation Text
Description
Engine Ng limited due to OAT.
NG OAT LIMIT
QUIET MODE SEL
RESTART FAULT
Quiet Mode switch is in quiet position.
ECU fault will not allow start in AUTO (ECU) Mode.
Engine starter relay is engaged.
START
STATUS MESSAGES
Annunciation Text
Description
Float system is in test mode.
FLOAT TEST
Internal gross weight is greater than 5000 pounds (2268 kg).
IGW VNE
QUIET MODE ON
Engine Quiet Mode is on.
WOG
Aircraft is on the ground.
VOICE ALERTS
Voice Alert
Description
“Minimums, minimums”
The aircraft has descended below the preset BARO MIN, RA MIN or
COMP MIN minimum descent altitude.
The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when
vertical navigation is enabled.
“Vertical track”
“Traffic”
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (TIS and GTS 800).
“TIS Not Available”
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage
area.
“Traffic, Traffic”
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (Skywatch TAS system).
“TAS System Test Passed”
Played when the GTS 800 TAS system passes a pilot-initiated self
test.
“TAS System Test Failed”
Played when the GTS 800 TAS system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
“One o’clock” through
Intruder bearing (GTS 800 only)
“Twelve o’clock”
Intruder bearing (GTS 800 only)
or “No Bearing”
Intruder bearing (GTS 800 only)
“High”, “Low”, “Same
Altitude” (if within 200 feet
Intruder relative altitude (GTS 800 only)
of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
Intruder distance (GTS 800 only)
“One Mile” through “Ten
Miles”, or “More than ten
miles”
Intruder distance (GTS 800 only)
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
485
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM MESSAGE ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window
continues to remain flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair
facility.
When a new message is issued, the Message Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew. It continues to
flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are displayed in the Alerts window
in white text. Messages that have become inactive change to gray text. The Message Softkey flashes
again if the state of a displayed message changes or a new message is displayed. Inactive messages
can be removed from the Alerts Window by pressing the Alerts Softkey.
System Messages convey messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the system. Typically,
a large red X appears in a window when a related LRU fails or detects invalid data.
The following section describes various system message advisory annunciations. Refer to the
current version of the applicable flight manual for additional information regarding pilot responses
to these annunciations.
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
Alerts
Window
Message Annunciation
(Prior to softkey being
pressed)
Figure A-3 System Message Softkey
Alerts Annunciation
(After softkey is
pressed)
Figure A-4 System Messages in Alerts
Window
SYSTEM MESSAGES
NOTE: This Section provides information regarding system message advisories that may be
displayed by the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other
existing operational priorities must be considered when responding to a message. Always use
sound pilot judgment. The current version of the applicable flight manual takes precedence
over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
486
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an
LRU or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red
“X” annunciation as shown previously in the System Message Annunciation section.
Message Advisory
Comments
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS
navigation. Abort approach.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1
altitude error correction is
unavailable.
GDC is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1
airspeed error correction is
unavailable.
GDC is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using
backup GPS source.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has
failed. The system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not
receiving any GPS
information.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information.
Check AFMS limitations. The system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not
receiving backup GPS
information.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system
should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1
operating exclusively in noGPS mode.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system
should be serviced.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS
magnetic model database
version mismatch.
The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not
match.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1
Magnetic-field model needs
update.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update
magnetic field model when practical.
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not
receiving valid airspeed.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data
computer. The AHRS relies on GPS information to augment the lack of
airspeed. The system should be serviced.
APR DWNGRADE –
Approach downgraded.
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable, use LNAV only
minimums.
APR INACTV – Approach is
not active.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active.
Activate approach when required.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace
ahead less than 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the
airspace within 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace
near and ahead.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
487
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace
near – less than 2 nm.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
BARO QFE – Confirm Baro
QFE Reference Elevation.
Baro QFE Reference Elevation may no longer be valid.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by
CHECK CRS – Database
course for LOC1 / [LOC ID] is more than 10 degrees.
[CRS]°.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by
CHECK CRS – Database
course for LOC2 / [LOC ID] is more than 10 degrees.
[CRS]°.
COM #[1, 2] INOP – CAL –
Check COM calibration.
COM 1 and/or COM 2 calibration version error. Check COM
calibration.
COM #[1, 2] INOP – CRNT – COM 1 and/or COM 2 current is low. Check COM current.
Check COM current.
COM #[1, 2] INOP – INTRL
– Com internal fault.
COM 1 and/or COM 2 has an internal fault.
COM #[1, 2] INOP – SYNTH The COM 1 and/or COM 2 has a synthesizer lock fault.
– COM synthesizer lock
fault.
COM1 PTT – COM1 pushto-talk key is stuck.
The COM1 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1
remote transfer key is stuck.
The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the
problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1. COM1 may still be
COM1 SERVICE – COM1
needs service. Return unit for usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
repair.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over
temp. Reducing transmitter
power.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM 1.
The transmitter is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
COM2 PTT – COM2 pushto-talk key is stuck.
The COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2
remote transfer key is stuck.
The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the
problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM2. COM2 may still be
COM2 SERVICE – COM2
needs service. Return unit for usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
repair.
488
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over
temp. Reducing transmitter
power.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM2. The
transmitter is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1
configuration module is
inoperative.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The
system should be serviced.
DATA LOST – Pilot stored
data was lost. Recheck
settings.
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile
and settings. The pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred
settings, if desired.
DB CHANGE – Database
changed. Verify user
modified procedures.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have
been manually edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation
database update. Verify that the user-modified procedures in stored
flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database
changed. Verify stored
airways.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no
longer consistent with the navigation database. This alert is issued
only after an navigation database update. Verify use of airways in
stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions or
database mismatch. Xtalk is types (Americas, European, etc.) installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct
navigation database version or type in all displays.
off.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle
database mismatch.
The PFDs and MFD have different obstacle database installed. Install
correct obstacle database in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain
database mismatch.
The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database versions or types
installed. Install correct terrain database version or type in all displays.
FAILED PATH – A data path
has failed.
A data path connected to the GDU, GSD 41, or the GIA 63/W has
failed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an
obsolete approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete
been truncated.
procedure is removed from the flight plan. Update flight plan with
current arrival or approach.
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint
is locked. This occurs when an navigation database update eliminates
waypoint is locked.
an obsolete waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified
waypoint and flags this message. This can also occur with user
waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted. Remove the waypoint from
the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database, or update the
waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight
plan waypoint moved.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due
to a new navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans
contain correct waypoint locations.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
489
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
FS510 CARD ERROR –
FS510 not detected in MFD
Bottom Slot.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is
inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The system
should be serviced.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The receiver may
still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
service. Return unit for
repair.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is
inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The receiver may
still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
service. Return unit for
repair.
GDC1 MANIFEST – GDC1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The GDC 74 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GDC2 MANIFEST – GDC1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The GDC 74 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GDL59 CONFIG – GDL 59
config error. Config service
req’d.
GDL 59H configuration settings do not match those of backup
configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
GDL59 FAIL – GDL 59 has
failed.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59H. The receiver is
unavailable. The system should be serviced.
GDL59 MANIFEST – GDL59 The GDL 59H has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
software mismatch,
communication halted.
GDL59 RTR FAIL – The GDL
59 router has failed.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59H router. The system should
be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59H. The system should be
GDL59 SERVICE – GDL 59
needs service. Return unit for serviced.
repair.
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69
config error. Config service
req’d.
GDL 69AH SXM configuration settings do not match those of backup
configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has
failed.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69AH SXM. The receiver is
unavailable. The system should be serviced
GDL69 MANIFEST – GDL69 The GDL 69AH SXM has incorrect software installed. The system
should be serviced.
software mismatch,
communication halted.
490
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
GEA #1 CM INOP – COMM There is a problem with the GEA config module connection. Check
– Check GEA config module the connection.
connection.
GEA #1 CM INOP – TEMP – The GEA configuration module has insufficient cooling. If the problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
Check GEA config module
cooling.
GEA #1 INOP – CAL –
Check GEA rigging.
There is a problem with the GEA rigging. Check the rigging.
GEA #1 INOP – CNFG –
Check GEA software and
configuration.
There is a problem with the GEA software configuration. Check the
configuration. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
GEA #1 INOP – INTRL –
GEA internal fault.
The GEA has an internal fault. The system should be serviced.
GEA #1 INOP – SENS –
Check GEA configuration.
There is an error in the GEA configuration. Check the configuration. If
the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
GEA #1 INOP – VOLT –
Check GEA voltages.
The GEA voltage is low. Check GEA voltages.
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1
config error. Config service
req’d.
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup
configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
GEA1 MANIFEST – GEA1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The #1 GEA 1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too
far North/South, no
magnetic compass.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS
operation. Heading is flagged as invalid.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC
software mismatch,
communication halted.
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
GIA #[1, 2] INOP –CRNT –
Check GIA current.
The GIA 1 and/or GIA 2 current is low. The current should be checked.
GIA #[1, 2] INOP –SERIAL – Loss of GIA 1 and/or GIA 2 serial communication. Check GIA serial
communication.
Check GIA serial
communication.
GIA #[1, 2] INOP –VOLT –
Check GIA voltage.
GIA 1 and/or GIA 2 low voltage. Check voltage.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1
temperature too low.
The GIA1 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over The GIA1temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
temperature.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
491
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config The GIA1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio
config error. Config service
req’d.
The GIA1 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should
be serviced.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The GIA1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs The GIA1 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system
should be serviced.
service. Return the unit for
repair.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2
temperature too low.
The GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over The GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
temperature.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config The GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio
config error. Config service
req’d.
The GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should
be serviced.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA2
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs The GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system
should be serviced.
service. Return the unit for
repair.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1
config error. Config service
req’d.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup
configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is
inoperative.
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is
unavailable. The system should be serviced.
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should
be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1
needs service. Return unit for audio functions may still be available, and the audio panel may still be
usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
repair.
GMA XTALK – GMA
crosstalk error has occurred.
492
An error has occurred in transferring data between the two GMAs.
The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
GMU1 MANIFEST – GMU1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of
GPS navigation. Insufficient
satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of
GPS navigation. Position
error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of
GPS navigation. GPS fail.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 receiver. The receiver may still
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1
needs service. Return unit for be available. The system should be serviced.
repair.
A failure has been detected in the GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2
needs service. Return unit for be available. The system should be serviced.
repair.
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has
failed.
A failure has been detected in the #1 GSR 56H. The system should be
serviced.
GRS1 MANIFEST – GRS1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has
failed.
A failure has been detected in GSR2. The system should be serviced.
GTS CONFIG – GTS config
error. Config service req’d.
The GTS and GDU have incompatible configurations. This alert is also
set when the GTS has an invalid mode S address configured or the
mode S address does not match both XPDR mode S addresses.
GTS MANIFEST – GTS
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The GTS 800 has incorrect software installed. The G1000H system
should be serviced.
HDG FAULT – AHRS1
magnetometer fault has
occurred.
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid.
The AHRS uses GPS for backup mode operation. The system should
be serviced.
The magnetometer has detected a magnetic anomoly that could
HDG PRESET MODE –
Magnetic anomoly detected. affect heading indications. Heading Preset Mode may be used.
HPM is available.
HW MISMATCH – GIA
hardware mismatch. GIA1
communication halted.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
493
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
HW MISMATCH – GIA
hardware mismatch. GIA2
communication halted.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside
airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
LRG MAG VAR – Verify all
course angles.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic
variance for geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed
magnetic course angles may differ from the actual magnetic heading
by more than 2°.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot
navigate locked flight plan.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan
that contains locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight
plan. Update flight plan with current waypoint.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
LOI – GPS integrity lost.
Crosscheck with other NAVS.
MFD1 CARD 1 ERR – Card
1 is invalid.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains
invalid data.
MFD1 CARD 2 ERR – Card
2 is invalid.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified MFD contains
invalid data.
MFD1 CARD 1 REM – Card
1 was removed. Reinsert
card.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified MFD.
The SD card needs to be reinserted.
MFD1 CARD 2 REM – Card
2 was removed. Reinsert
card.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified
MFD. The SD card needs to be reinserted.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1
config error. Config service
req’d.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
Airport Directory database
error exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure
the data card is properly programmed if present. If problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
basemap database error
exists.
The detected a failure in the basemap database.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
basemap database error
exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
Chartview database error
exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional
feature). Ensure the data card is properly programmed if present. If
problem persists, the system should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
FliteCharts database error
exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional
feature). Ensure the data card is properly programmed if present. If
problem persists, the system should be serviced.
494
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
navigation database error
exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to
reload the navigation database. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
obstacle database error
exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure the data
card is properly programmed if present. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
obstacle database missing.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on
the specified LRU.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe
Taxi database error exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure the data
card is properly programmed if present. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
terrain database error exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure the data
card is properly programmed if present. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1
terrain database missing.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the
specified LRU.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1
has low voltage. Reducing
power usage
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1
has poor cooling. Reducing
power usage.
The MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by
dimming the display. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD [key
name] Key is stuck.
A key is stuck on the MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by
pressing it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem
persists.
MFD1 MANIFEST – MFD1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
The MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1
needs service. Return unit for serviced.
repair.
NAV #[1, 2] INOP – CAL —
Check COM calibration.
NAV 1 and/or NAV 2 calibration version error. Check COM calibration.
NAV #[1, 2] INOP – CRNT
— Check COM current.
NAV 1 and/or NAV 2 current is low. Check COM current.
NAV #[1, 2] INOP – INTRL
— Com internal fault.
NAV 1 and/or NAV 2 has an internal fault.
NAV #[1, 2] INOP – SERIAL
– Check NAV serial
communication.
Loss of NAV 1 and/or NAV 2 serial communication. Check NAV serial
communication.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
495
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
NAV #[1, 2] INOP –SYNTH
LOCK – COM synthesiser
lock fault.
NNAV 1 and/or NAV 2 has a synthesizer lock fault.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1
remote transfer key is stuck.
The remote NAV1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1
needs service. Return unit for receiver may still be available. The system should be serviced.
repair.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2
remote transfer key is stuck.
The remote NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2
needs service. Return unit for receiver may still be available. The system should be serviced.
repair.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non
WGS 84 waypoint for
navigation -[xxxx]
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on
the WGS84 map reference datum and may be positioned in error as
displayed. Do not use GPS to navigate to the selected non-WGS84
waypoint.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has
poor cooling. Reducing
power usage.
The PFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by
dimming the display. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
error. Config service req’d.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
basemap database error
exists.
The PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
navigation database error
exists.
The PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to
reload the navigation database. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
obstacle database error
exists.
The PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure the data
card is properly programmed if present. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
obstacle database missing.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on
the specified LRU.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe
Taxi database error exists.
The PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure the data
card is properly programmed if present. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain The PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure the data
card is properly programmed if present. If problem persists, the system
database error exists.
should be serviced.
496
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the
specified LRU
database missing.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key
name] Key is stuck.
A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by
pressing it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem
persists.
PFD1 MANIFEST – PFD1
software mismatch,
communication halted.
The PFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
PFD1 CARD 1 REM – Card 1 The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD.
was removed. Reinsert card. The SD card needs to be reinserted.
PFD1 CARD 2 REM– Card 2 The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified
was removed. Reinsert card. PFD. The SD card needs to be reinserted.
PFD1 CARD 1 REM ERR –
Card 1 is invalid.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD contains invalid
data.
PFD1 CARD 2 ERR – Card 2
is invalid.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD contains
invalid data.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs The PFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be
serviced.
service. Return unit for
repair.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
low voltage. Reducing power
usage
PTK FAIL – Parallel track
unavailable: bad geometry.
Bad parallel track geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track
unavailable: invalid leg type.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track
unavailable: past IAF.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
REGISTER GFDS – Data
services are inoperative,
register w/Connext.
The system is not registered with Connext, or its current registration
data has failed authentication.
SCHEDULER [#] –
Message criteria entered by the user.
SLCT FREQ – Select
appropriate frequency for
approach.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the
appropriate NAV receiver. Select the correct frequency for the
approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on
CDI for approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV
receiver. Set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn
ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
STRMSCP FAIL –
Stormscope has failed.
Stormscope has failed. The system should be serviced.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
497
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
SVT DISABLED – Out of
available terrain region.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the
boundaries of the installed terrain database.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB
resolution too low.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient
resolution (9 arc-second or better) is not currently installed.
SW MISMATCH – GDU
software version mismatch.
Xtalk is off.
The MFD and PFDs have different software versions installed. The
system should be serviced.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1 or
MFD1] Terrain awareness
display unavailable.
One of the terrain or obstacle databases required for HTAWS in the
specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has
expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic
device has failed.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The
traffic device should be serviced.
TCAS FAIL - TCAS system is
inoperative.
The TCAS or TAS system is not operational.
TRUE APR – True north
approach. Change HDG
reference to TRUE.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach
when the nav angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t
reach current vertical
waypoint.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum
flight path angle and vertical speed constraints. The system
automatically transitions to the next vertical waypoint.
VNV– UNAVAILABLE.
Excessive track angle error.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical
deviation to go invalid.
VNV– UNAVAILABLE.
Excessive crosstrack error.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to
go invalid.
VNV– UNAVAILABLE.
Parallel course selected.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to
go invalid.
VNV– UNAVAILABLE.
Unsupported leg type in
flight plan.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other
unsupported leg type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This
prevents vertical guidance to the active vertical waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at
waypoint -[xxxx]
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
XPDR1 ADS-B 1090 –
Datalinik: ADS-B 1090
receiver has failed.
A failure has been detected in the 1090 receiver.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL –
Transponder: XPDR1 is
unable to transmit ADS-B
messages.
ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid
GPS position. Other transponder functions may be available. Service
when possible.
498
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Comments
XPDR1 ADS-B NO POS –
Transponder: ADS-B is not
transmitting position.
The transponder is not able to receive position information.
XPDR1 ADS-B TRFC –
Transponder: ADS-B traffic
has failed
The Transponder is incapable of processing traffic information.
XPDR1 ADS-B UAT –
Datalink: ADS-B in UAT
receiver has failed.
A failure has been detected in the UAT receiver.
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1
config error. Config service
req’d.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup
configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
XPDR1 CSA FAIL - Traffic:
ADS-B In traffic alerting has
failed.
ADS-B Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is unavailable.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is
inoperative.
There is no communication with the #1 or #2 transponder.
XPDR1 FAULT – Datalink:
ADSB-B in has failed.
The transponder is unable to receive ADS-B information.
XPDR1 FIS-B WX – Datalink: The transponder is unable to receive FIS-B weather information.
FIS-B Weather has failed.
XPDR1 OVER TEMP Transponder: Transponder
over temp.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in XPDR1.
The transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
XPDR1 PRES ALT –
Transponder: ADS-B no
pressure altitude.
Unable to provide pressure altitude information.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1
needs service. Return unit for
repair.
XPDR1 UNDER TEMP Transponder: Transponder
under temp.
The system has detected an under temperature condition in XPDR1.
The transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
XTALK ERROR – A flight
display crosstalk error has
occurred.
The MFD and PFDs are not communicating with each other. The
system should be serviced.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
499
APPENDIX A
BLANK PAGE
500
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered
from time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These
notifications are available on flygarmin.com.
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain,
obstacles and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on
the ground. Go to flygarmin.com and select Aviation Data Error Report.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD
cards are required for database updates. Not all SD cards are compatible with the system.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration
date on the power-up screen and the effective date on the Aux – Databases Page being
displayed in amber.
LOADING UPDATED DATABASES
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power
interruption during the database loading process could result in maintenance being required
to reboot the system.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ system messages will be
displayed until database synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off,
then on. Synchronization can be monitored on the Aux - Database Page.
Databases may be loaded through Garmin Pilot and Flight Stream 510. When loading databases
through Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, it must be enabled on the system and the multimedia
card inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD. Refer to fly.garmin.com for more information.
The cycles and dates for both standby and active databases are displayed on the “Aux – Databases”
Page on the MFD. Any active databases with expiration dates in the past will be highlighted with
amber text. When an expired active database has a standby database that is ready to become effective,
a cyan double-sided arrow will be displayed between the database cycles. When this arrow is visible, it
indicates that the standby and active databases in that row will be switched on the next power cycle,
activating the current standby database. Databases can also be manually selected (or deselected) by
highlighting a list item and pressing the ENT key, provided a valid, verified standby database is
present.
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the
database product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin
authorized service facility in order to use some database features.
The navigation database contains the aeronautical data used by the system for the flight management
and flight planning functions. Included is detailed data for waypoints, procedures (arrivals, departures,
approaches), and airways. The navigation database is updated every 28 days.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
501
APPENDIX B
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and
towns. It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically
and have no expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to
aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to
note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle
database. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government
agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee
the accuracy and completeness of the data.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the
U.S. or worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S.
airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are
updated every 56 days. The AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000
airports with runways longer than 3,000 feet worldwide.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in
following ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in
relation to taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day
cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is
updated on a 28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no
longer function.
The ChartView database is updated on a 14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated
within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will no longer function. The ChartView database
must be purchased directly from Jeppesen, but can be update d at jeppesen.com or flygarmin.com.
The IFR/VFR charts database contains VFR and IFR raster charts. The VFR Charts are digital
representations of the Sectional Aeronautical Charts and Terminal Area Charts. The IFR Charts include
both IFR High (designed for navigation at or above 18,000 ft) and IFR Low (designed for navigation
below 18,000 ft). IFR/VFR Charts are updated every 28 days except for Canadian IFR/VFR Charts
which are updated every 56 days.
DATABASE UPDATES USING A SUPPLEMENTAL DATA (SD) CARD
All databases are updated through a single SD card in the bottom slot of the MFD. When the card
is inserted, the databases on the card will be copied to standby and synchronized across all powered,
configured units. After update, the card is removed and the databases are stored on the system.
When in standby, databases are not immediately available for use, but stored to be activated at a later
time.
Database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation Databases’
section of the Garmin website (flygarmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded from
the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the
502
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
new databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update
is as follows:
•
Windows-compatible PC computer
•
SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
•
Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
•
Supplemental SD Cards
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the
database product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin
authorized service facility in order to use some database features.
Updating Databases using an SD Card:
1) With the system OFF, remove an SD Card from the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
2) Download the databases and install them on an SD card.
3) Put the SD Card in the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
4) Turn the system ON.
5) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup
screen.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
8) Monitor the Sync Status on the Database page. Wait for all databases to complete
syncing, indicated by ‘Sync Complete’ being displayed. A cyan double-arrow will appear
between the Standby and Active columns to show which Standby databases will be
transferred to Active at the next power cycle.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
503
APPENDIX B
Figure B-1 Databases Page before Activation of Standby Databases
9) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown in the Standby Database column.
10) Remove the SD card from the bottom slot of the MFD if desired.
11) Remove and reapply power to the system.
12) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup
screen.
13) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
14) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
15) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database
column.
504
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
Figure B-2 Databases Page with Updated Databases
16) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS
Knob to select the database, and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or
the FMS Knob to exit.
Or:
Press the Menu Key and select ‘Details’ using the small FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
17) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the
standby database will become active.
Or:
Press the Menu Key and select ‘Swap Stby/Actv’ using the small FMS Knob. Press
the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby
database will become active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the
startup screen.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
505
APPENDIX B
f)
Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
g) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
h) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database
column.
DATABASES UPDATES USING FLIGHT STREAM 510
In order to load databases through Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, the Flight Stream 510
must be enabled on the system with the Multimedia card inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD.
A mobile device with Garmin Pilot must be paired with the Flight Stream 510 over Bluetooth (refer
to the Additional Features section). When there is at least one paired device available to connect, the
Flight Stream 510 will automatically connect to the system’s preferred mobile device. The preferred
device can be selected on the Aux – Databases page from a menu list of paired devices. Refer to
fly.garmin.com for more information.
Once a connection to the paired mobile device is made, Garmin Pilot makes available databases
that can be transferred to the Flight Stream 510. If any of these databases is more recent than the
respective standby database on the system, (or if there is no standby database on the system) those
databases will be automatically selected to load. The database updates may be initiated from the Aux
- Databases page, or from other pages on the MFD.
Updating Databases from any MFD page (except the Aux - Databases page):
1) With the system OFF, insert the Flight Stream Multimedia Card in the bottom slot of the
MFD.
2) Turn the system ON.
3) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup
screen.
4) On the mobile device, start Garmin Pilot and touch Home > Connext > Database
Concierge.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Connext Setup.
7) Ensure that Wifi Database Import is enabled in the ‘Device’ Window (refer to Additional
Features section for instructions to enable Wifi Database Import).
WiFi Enabled
Bluetooth
Status
WiFi Status
WiFi Password
Figure B-3 ‘Connext Setup’ Page
506
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
8) Verify that the mobile device is enabled via Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings on the
mobile device.
9) In the ‘Paired Devices’ Window on the “Connext Setup’ Page, ensure the system is
paired with the mobile device in use. (Refer to Additional Features for instructions on
connection to a preferred device.)
10) Press the Update Softkey when the Database Update screen appears. (Pressing the
View Softkey will allow database updates to be viewed from the ‘Aux Databases’ Page,
however, the windows shown below will not appear on the ‘Aux Databases’ Page.
Pressing the Ignore Softkey will postpone the updates until further action is taken.)
Figure B-4 Database Update Available
11) If using a device that has not been previously paired with the system, a password
prompt will on the mobile device. Enter the password shown in the ‘Password’ Field of
the ‘Aux - Connext Setup’ Page.
NOTE: The database updates may now be continued from any MFD page, however, the
update windows shown in these instructions will not be shown on the ‘Aux - Databases’
Page. Use the proceeding instructions in this section to update databases from the ‘Aux Databases’ Page.
12) The following screen will appear. Database update progress may be monitored on the
mobile device.
Figure B-5 Starting Database Transfer
13) When the transfer is complete, the following screen will appear.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
507
APPENDIX B
Figure B-6 Database Transfer Complete
14) Press the Close softkey.
15) Remove and reapply power to the system.
16) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup
screen.
17) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
18) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
19) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database
column.
Figure B-7 Databases Page with Updated Databases
20) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS
Knob to select the database, and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or
the FMS Knob to exit.
Or:
508
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
Press the Menu Key and select ‘Details’ using the small FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
21) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the
standby database will become active.
Or:
Press the Menu Key and select ‘Swap Stby/Actv’ using the small FMS Knob. Press
the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby
database will become active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the
startup screen.
f)
Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
g) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
h) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database
column.
Updating Databases from the Aux - Databases page:
1) With the system OFF, insert the Flight Stream Multimedia Card in the bottom slot of the
MFD.
2) Turn the system ON.
3) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup
screen.
4) On the mobile device, start Garmin Pilot and touch Home > Connext > Database
Concierge.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select Aux.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select Connext Setup.
7) Ensure that Wifi Database Import is enabled in the ‘Device’ Window (refer to Additional
Features section for instructions to enable Wifi Database Import).
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
509
APPENDIX B
WiFi Enabled
Bluetooth
Status
WiFi Status
WiFi Password
Figure B-8 ‘Connext Setup’ Page
8) Verify that the mobile device is enabled via Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings on the
mobile device.
9) In the ‘Paired Devices’ Window on the ‘Connext Setup’ Page, ensure the system is
paired with the mobile device in use (refer to Additional Features for instructions on
connection to a preferred device).
10) Press the Device Softkey to view databases that are ready to be loaded from the mobile
device (pressing the Stby/Actv Softkey will again display the current Standby and
Active databases).
11) The ‘Aux - Databases’ Page will show the databases connected to the mobile device in
place of the active databases on the system. Databases selected to load will be
indicated by a cyan arrow.
12) Press the Update Softkey.
13) If using a device that has not been previously paired with the system, a password
prompt will on the mobile device. Enter the password shown in the ‘Password’ Field of
the ‘Aux - Connext Setup’ Page.
14) The Database Update status will appear in the ‘Status’ Window at the top of the page.
Monitor update progress in the ‘Status’ Window, or on the mobile device.
15) When all databases have been successfully transferred from the mobile device and
appear in the standby column, remove and reapply power to the system.
16) Press the ENT Key or the right most-softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup
screen.
17) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
18) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
19) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database
column.
510
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX B
Figure B-9 Databases Page with Updated Databases
20) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS
Knob to select the database, and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or
the FMS Knob to exit.
Or:
Press the Menu Key and select ‘Details’ using the small FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
21) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the
standby database will become active.
Or:
Press the Menu Key and select ‘Swap Stby/Actv’ using the small FMS Knob. Press
the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby
database will become active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the
startup screen.
f)
Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
511
APPENDIX B
g) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
h) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database
column.
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation
database. At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by
the AHRS. If the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page.
Figure B-10 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in the figure above, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A
progress monitor is displayed as shown in the figure below. When the upload is
complete, the system is ready for use.
Figure B-11 Uploading Database
512
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
AVIATION TERMS AND ACRONYMS
Term/Acronym
A
AC
ACARS
Definition
Amps
Advisory Circular, Alternating Current
Airborne Communications Addressing and Reporting System
ACC
Accuracy
ACK
Acknowledge
ACT, ACTV
ADAHRS
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated Tilt
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference System
ADC
Air Data Computer
ADF
Automatic Direction Finder
ADI
Attitude Direction Indicator
ADIZ
Air Defense Identification Zone
ADS-B
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast
ADS-R
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast
AEA
AF
Aircraft Electronic Association
Arc to Fix Leg
AFCS
Automatic Flight Control System
AFM
Airplane Flight Manual
AFMS
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AFN
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
ATS Facilities Notification
Airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
AIM
Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRB
Airborne
AIRMET
Airman’s Meteorological Information
AIRREP
Air Reports
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
Alert
Altitude
Alternator, Alternate
ALTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
ALTV
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
AM
AMPS
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Amplitude Modulation
Amperes
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
513
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Definition
ANNUNC/ANN
Annunciation/Annunciator
ANT
Antenna
AOA
Angle of Attack, ACARS Over AVLC
AOC
Aeronautical Operational Control
AOG
Aircraft On Ground
AOPA
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
AP
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
Autopilot Disconnect
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
ARINC
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARSPC
Airspace
ARTCC
Air Route Traffic Control Center
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
AT
ATC
ATCRBS
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Auto Throttle
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
ATIS
Automatic Terminal Information Service
ATK
Along Track
ATN
Aeronautical Telecommunications Network
ATS
Air Traffic Services
AUTOSEQ
Automatic Sequence
AUX
Auxiliary
AVG
Average
AVLC
Aviation VHF Link Control
AWOS
Automated Weather Observing System
B
Both Runways
B ALT
Barometric Altitude
BARO
Barometer, Barometric
BATT
Battery
BC
514
Autopilot
Backcourse
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Bearing
Definition
The compass direction from the present position to a destination
waypoint.
BFO
Beat Frequency Oscillator
BKSP
Backspace
Bluetooth
Wireless standard for data exchange over short distances
BOC
Bottom of Climb
BOD
Bottom of Descent
BRG
see also Bearing
°C
Degrees Celsius
C
Center Runway
CA
Course to Altitude Leg
CAL
Calibrated
CALC
Calculator
Calibrated Airspeed
Indicated airspeed corrected for installation and instrument errors.
CAS
Crew Alerting System
CCG
Current Climb Gradient
CD
Course to DME Distance Leg
CDA
Current Data Authority
CDI
Course Deviation Indicator
CDU
Control Display Unit
CF
Course to Fix Leg
CG
Center of Gravity
CH, CHNL
CHT
CHKLIST
CI
Channel
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Course to Intercept Leg
CLD
Cloud
CLR
Clear
CM
Centimeter
CMC
Central Maintenance Computer
CN
Canada
CNS
Communication, Navigation, & Surveillance
CO
Carbon Monoxide
COM
CONFIG
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Communication Radio
Configuration
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
515
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
COOL
Coolant
COPLT
Copilot
Course
The line between two points to be followed by the aircraft.
Course to Steer
CPDLC
The recommended direction to steer in order to reduce course error
or stay on course. Provides the most efficient heading to get back to
the desired course and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
CPL
Couple
CR
Course to Radial Leg
CRG
Cockpit Reference Guide
CRNT
Current
Crosstrack Error
CRS
The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either direction,
left or right.
see also Course, Course to Steer
CRSR
Cursor
CSA
Conflict Situational Awareness
CSC
Current Speed Control
CTA
Control Area
CTR
Center
CTRL
Control
Cumulative, CUM
CVDR
CVR
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Data Recorder
Cockpit Voice Recorder
CVRG
Coverage
CWS
Control Wheel Steering
CYC CTR
CYL
Cyclic Centering
Cylinder
D ALT
Density Altitude
D-ATIS
Digital Automatic Terminal Info Service
DB, DBASE
Database
dBZ
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
DCL
Departure Clearance
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
516
Definition
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
DEG
Degree
DEIC, DEICE
De-icing
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Definition
DEP
Departure
Desired Track
DES, DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Dilution of Precision
The desired course between the active “from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry quality on a scale of one to ten
(lower numbers equal better geometry, where higher numbers equal
poorer geometry).
DIR
Direction
DIS
Distance
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the present position to a destination
waypoint.
DL LTNG
Datalink Lightning
DLS
Data Link System
DME
Distance Measuring Equipment
DN
DNALT
Down
Density Altitude
DOD
Department of Defense
DOP
see also Dilution of Precision
DP
DPRT
DR
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
DSBL
Disabled
DSP
Datalink Service Provider, Digital Signal Processor
DTG
Distance To Go, Remaining distance to last active FPL waypoint
DTK
see also Desired Track
DQR
Data Quality Requirements
E
Empty, East
EAS
Engine and Airframe Systems
ECU
Engine Control Unit
EDM
Emergency Descent Mode
EFC
Expected Further Clearance
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
517
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Efficiency
EGNOS
EGT
EICAS
EIS
ELEV
ELT
EMER, EMERG, EMERGCY
EMI
END, ENDUR
Endurance
ENG
ENGD
ENR
Definition
A measure of fuel consumption, expressed in distance per unit of
fuel.
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System
Engine Indication System
Elevation, Elevator
Emergency Locator Transmitter
Emergency
Electromagnetic Interference
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight time based on available fuel
on board.
Engine
Engaged
Enroute; ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA) Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles left
or right of the desired course on an active flight plan or direct-to.
ENT
Enter
EPE
see also Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
Error
ES
ESA
see also Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated Position Error
(EPE)
Estimated Time of Arrival
(ETA)
Estimated Time Enroute
(ETE)
A measure of horizontal GPS position error derived by satellite
geometry conditions and other factors.
The estimated time at which the aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed and track.
The estimated time it takes to reach the destination waypoint from
the present position, based upon current groundspeed.
ETA
see also Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
see also Estimated Time Enroute
EVS
Enhanced Vision System
EXPIRD
°F
518
Extended Squitter
Expired
Degrees Fahrenheit
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Definition
FA
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
FADEC
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FAF
Final Approach Fix
FAIL
Failure
FANS
Future Air Navigation System
FAR
Federal Aviation Regulations
FBO
Fixed Base Operator
FC
Course From Fix to Distance Leg
FCC
Federal Communication Commission
FCST
Forecast
FD
Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME Distance Leg
FDE
Fault Detection and Exclusion
FF, FFLOW
see also Fuel Flow
FIS-B
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FISDL
Flight Information Service Data Link
FL
Flight Level
FLC
Flight Level Change
FLT
Flight Timer
FLTA
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
FM
Course From Fix to Manual Termination Leg
FMS
Flight Management System
FOB
see also Fuel On Board
FOD
see also Fuel Over Destination
FPA
Flight Path Angle
FPL
Flight Plan
FPM
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
FREQ
Frequency
FRMT
Format
FRZ
Freezing
FSM
Flight System Messages
FSS
Flight Service Station
FT
foot/feet
Fuel Flow
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board
The total amount of usable fuel on board the aircraft.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
519
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Fuel Over Destination
The estimated fuel remaining when the aircraft reaches the
destination waypoint, based upon current fuel flow.
FWD
Forward
G/S
Glideslope
GA
Go-Around
GAGAN
GAGL
GPS Aided GEO Augmented Navigation
GPS AGL Altitude
GAL, GL
Gallon(s)
GBOX
Gearbox
GBT
Ground Based Transceiver
GCU
Garmin Control Unit
GCS
Ground Clutter Suppression
GDC
Garmin Air Data Computer
GDL
Garmin Satellite Data Link
GDR
Garmin Data Radio
GDU
Garmin Display Unit
GEA
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
GEN
Generator
GEO
Geographic
GFC
Garmin Flight Control
GIA
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
GLONASS
GLS
Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite Landing System
Global Navigation Satellite Landing System
GMA
Garmin Audio Panel System
GMC
Garmin Mode Controller
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GMU
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
GND
Ground
GOLD
Global Operational Data Link
GPH
Gallons per Hour
GPN
Garmin Part Number
GPS
Global Positioning System
GPWS
520
Definition
Ground Proximity Warning System
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Definition
Grid MORA (Minimum Off
—Route Altitude)
One degree latitude by one degree longitude in size and clears the
highest elevation reference point in the grid by: a) 1,000 feet where
the highest elevation is <5001MSL or b) 2,000 feet where the
highest elevation is >5000MSL
Groundspeed
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground
position.
Ground Track
See Track
GRS
Garmin Reference System
GS
Ground Speed, Glideslope
GSA
Garmin Servo Adapter
GSD
Garmin Data Concentrator
GSL
Geodetic Sea Level
GSR
Garmin Satellite Radio
GSU
Garmin Sensor Unit
GTC
Garmin Touchscreen Controller
GTS
Garmin Traffic System
GTX
Garmin Transponder
GW
Gross Weight
GWX
Garmin Weather Radar
HA
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
HDG
see also Heading
HDOP
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
Heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro.
HF
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix Leg
HFOM
see also Horizontal Figure of Merit
Hg
Mercury
HI
High
HI SENS
High Sensitivity
HM
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
HNS
Hybrid Navigation System
Horizontal Figure of Merit
HOV
HOV-P
A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft’s horizontal position.
Hover
Hover Prediction
hPa
Hectopascal
HPI
Hover Power Indicator
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
521
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
HPL
Horizontal Protection Level
HR
Hour
HRZN HDG
HSDB
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT
Heat
HUL
Hz
I
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)
Inner Marker
IAF
Initial Approach Fix
IAS
Indicated Air Speed
IAT
Indicated Air Temperature
IAU
Integrated Avionics Unit
ICAO
International Civil Aviation Organization
ICS
Intercom System
ID
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
IDENT, IDNT
IEEE
IF
Identification
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Initial Fix
IFR
Instrument Flight Rules
IG
Imperial Gallon
IGE
In Ground Effect
ILS
Instrument Landing System
IMC
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
IN
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
Inch
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
Information provided by properly calibrated and set instrumentation
on the aircraft panel.
INFO
Information
IN Hg
Inches of Mercury
INS
Inertial Navigation System
INT
Intersection(s)
INTEG
522
Definition
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Definition
IrDA, IRDA
Infrared Data Association
ISA
International Standard Atmosphere; ISA Relative Temperature
ISO
International Standards Organization
ITT
Inter-Turbine Temperature, Interstage Turbine Temperature
KEYSTK
Key Stuck
KG
Kilogram
kHz
Kilohertz
KM
Kilometer
KT
Knot
L
Left, Left Runway
LAT
Latitude, Lateral
LBL
Label
LB
Pound
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCL
Local
LDA
Landing Distance Available
LDG
ETA at Final Destination
LED
Light Emitting Diode
Left Over Fuel On Board
The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of one
or more legs of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel Reserve
The amount of flight time remaining, based on the amount of fuel
on board after the completion of one or more legs of a flight plan or
direct-to, and a known consumption rate.
Leg
LGND
The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints.
Legend
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LMM
Location Middle Marker
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
Low
LOA
Letter of Authorization
LOC
Localizer
LOI
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
LOM
Location Outer Marker
LON
Longitude, Longitudinal
LP
LPV
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Localizer Performance
Localizer Performance with Vertical Guidance
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
523
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
LRU
Line Replaceable Unit
LSB V
Lower Sideband Voice
LT
LTNG
LVL
M
MMO (VMO)
Mach Number
MAG
MAG VAR
Left
Lightning
Level
Meter, Middle Marker, Mach
Maximum Speed
Mach number is the ratio of the true airspeed to the speed of sound.
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
MAHP
Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ
Manual Squelch
MANSEQ
Manual Sequence
MAP
Missed Approach Point
MASQ
Master Avionics Squelch
MAX
MAXSPD
Maximum
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
MB
Marker Beacon
MCP
Maximum Continuous Power
MDA
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
MEPT
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
MET
Manual Electric Trim
METAR
MFD
MGRS
Aviation Routine Weather Report
Multi Function Display
Military Grid Reference System
MGT
Measured Gas Temperature
MHz
Megahertz
MIC
Microphone
MIN
Minimum
Minimum Safe Altitude
(MSA)
524
Definition
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of
the aircraft present position.
MKR
Marker Beacon
MOA
Military Operations Area
MON
Monitor
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Definition
MOV
Movement
MORA
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
MPEL
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
MPM
Meters per Minute
MSA
see also Minimum Safe Altitude
MSAS
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System
MSG
Message
MSL
Mean Sea Level
MT, M
mV
MVFR
N
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
North
NATS
North Atlantic Tracks System
NAV
Navigation
NAVAID
Navigation Aid
NDA
Next Data Authority
NDB
Non-Directional Beacon
NEXRAD
Next Generation Radar
NG
Gas Producer Rotation Speed
NM
Nautical Mile(s)
NoPT
NOTAM
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure shall not be executed
without ATC clearance)
Notice To Airman
NP
Power Turbine Speed
NR
Rotor Speed
NRST
O
Nearest
Outer Marker
OAT
Outside Air Temperature
OBS
Omni Bearing Selector
OFST
Offset
OGE
Out of Ground Effect
OOOI
Out of the gate, Off the ground, On the ground, and In the gate
OXY
Oxygen
P ALT
Pressure Altitude
PA
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
525
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Definition
PASS
Passenger(s)
PC
PDC
Pre-Departure Clearance
PFD
Primary Flight Display
PG
Pilot’s Guide
PI
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
Pilot Report
Pitch
POA
Plain Old ACARS
POH
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
POHS
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
POS, POSN
Position
PPH
Pounds per Hour
PPM
Parts per Million
P. POS
Present Position
PRES, PRESS
Pressure
PROC
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
PROP
Propeller
PROX
Proximity
PSI
Pounds per Square Inch, Power Situation Indicator
PT
Procedure Turn
PTK
Parallel Track
PTT
Push-to-Talk
PWR
Power
Q
Engine Torque
QFE
Field Elevation Pressure
QNH
Sea Level Pressure
QTY
Quantity
R
RA
RAD
RAD ALT
526
Personal Computer
Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
RAIM
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
RAM
Random Access Memory
RAT
Ram Air Temperature
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
RCVR
Definition
Receiver
REF
Reference
REM
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
REQ
Required
RES
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
REV
Reverse, Revision, Revise
RF
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to Fix Leg
RFM
Rotorcraft Flight Manual
RMI
Radio Magnetic Indicator
RMT
Remote
RNAV
Area Navigation
RNG
Range
RNP
Required Navigation Performance
RNWY, RWY
Runway
ROL
Roll
ROM
Read Only Memory
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RUDICS
RVRSNRY
RVSM
RX
S
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Router-Based Unrestricted Digital Interworking Connectivity Solution
Reversionary
Reduced Vertical Separation Minimums
Receive
South
SA
Selective Availability
SAR
Search and Rescue
SAT
Static Air Temperature
SBAS
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
SCIT
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
SD
Secure Digital
SEC
Second(s)
SEL, SLCT
SELCAL
SENS
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Select
Selective Calling
Sense
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
527
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
SFC
Surface
SIAP
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
SID
Standard Instrument Departure
SIG/AIR
SIGMET/AIRMET
SIGMET
Significant Meteorological Information
SIM
Simulator
SLD
Supercooled Large Droplet
SLP/SKD
Slip/Skid
SMBL
Symbol
SMS
Short Message System
SNGL
Single
SPC
Space
SPD
Speed
SPI
Special Position Identification
SPKR
Speaker
SQ, SQL
Squelch
SRVC, SVC
Service
SSID
Wireless Service Set Identifier
STAB
Stabilization
STAL
Stall
STAR
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
STATS
Statistics
STBY
Standby
STD
Standard
STRMSCP
Stormscope
SUA
Special Use Airspace
SURF
Surface
SUSP
Suspend
SVT
Synthetic Vision Technology
SW
Software
SYNC
Synchronize
SYN TERR
Synthetic Terrain
SYN VIS
Synthetic Vision
SYS
T
528
Definition
System
TRUE
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
TA
Definition
Traffic Advisory
TACAN
Tactical Air Navigation System
TAF
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
TAS
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
TAT
Total Air Temperature
TAWS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
TCA
Terminal Control Area
TCAS
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
TEL
Telephone
TEMP
Temperature
TERM
Terminal
TF
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
TFR
Temporary Flight Restriction
TGT
Target
T HDG
TIS
TIS-B
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
TIT
Turbine Inlet Temperature
TKE
see also Track Angle Error
TMA
Terminal Maneuvering Area
TMR/REF
Timer/Reference
TOC
Top of Climb
TOD
Top of Descent, Time to TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
Take-Off, Go-Around
TOLD
Takeoff and Landing Data
TOPO
Topographic
TORA
Takeoff Run Available
TOT
Total
TPA
Traffic Pattern Altitude
Track
Track Angle Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position; also
‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired track and the current
track.
see also Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
529
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
TTL
Total
TURB
Turbulence
TURN
Procedure Turn
TWIP
Terminal Weather Information for Pilots
TX
Transmit
UAT
Universal Access Transceiver
UHF
Ultra-High Frequency
UNAVAIL
US
USB V
Unavailable
United States
Upper Sideband Voice
USR
User
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time
UTM/UPS
V
V, Vspeed
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal Polar Stereographic Grid
Volts
Velocity (airspeed)
V1
Takeoff Decision Speed
V2
Takeoff Safety Speed
VA
Maneuvering Speed
VAPP , VAC
Approach Climb Speed
VFE
Maximum Flap Extended Speed
VLE
Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed
VLNDx
Approach Speed (Flaps at x°)
VLO
Maximum Landing Gear Operating Speed
VMC
Minimum Control Speed
VMO (MMO)
Maximum Operating Speed
VNE
Never-Exceed Speed
VR
Takeoff Rotate Speed
VREF
Landing Approach Speed, Reference Landing Speed
VSB
Maximum Speedbrake Speed
VSR
Stall Speed
VT
VTIRE
VX
530
Definition
Takeoff Flap Retraction Speed
Maximum Tire Speed
Best Angle of Climb Speed
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
Definition
VY
Best Rate of Climb Speed
VYSE
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
V DEV
Vertical Deviation
VA
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
VAC
Volts Alternating Current
VAPP
VOR Approach
VAR
Variation
VD
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
VDC
Volts Direct Current
VDL
VHF Datalink
VERT
Vertical
Vertical Figure of Merit
A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft’s vertical position.
Vertical Speed Required
The vertical speed necessary to descend/climb from a current
position and altitude to a defined target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed.
VFOM
see also Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
VLOC
VM
VMC
VNAV, VNV
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination Leg
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
VOL
Volume
VOR
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VORTAC
VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and Tactical Air Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VPROF
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile
VR
Heading Vector to Radial Leg
VRP
Visual Reporting Point
VS
Vertical Speed
VSD
Vertical Situation Display
VSI
Vertical Speed Indicator
VSR, VS REQ
190–02339–00 Rev. C
see also Vertical Speed Required
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
531
APPENDIX C
Term/Acronym
VTF
Vector to Final
W
Watt(s), West
WAAS
Wide Area Augmentation System
WARN
Warning
WATCH
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
WGS-84
World Geodetic System - 1984
WI-FI, WIFI
532
Definition
Wireless Local Area Network based on IEEE 802.11
WOG
Weight on Gear
WOW
Weight on Wheels
WPT
Waypoint(s)
WT
Weight
WW
World Wide
WX
Weather
XFER, XFR
Transfer
XM LTNG
SiriusXM Lightning
XMIT
Transmit
XMSN
Transmission
XPDR
Transponder
XTALK
Cross-Talk
XTK
Cross-Track, Crosstrack Error
YD
Yaw Damper
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX D
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
If a particular aspect of system operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked
questions or in the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information)
or a Garmin-authorized dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
WHAT IS SBAS?
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any
GPS signal errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances,
timing, and satellite orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of
each GPS satellite. The signal correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This
correction information can then be received by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable
users to rely on GPS for all phases of flight.
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area
Augmentation System (WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and
Hawaii. The European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of
Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa. The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
HOW DOES SBAS AFFECT APPROACH OPERATIONS?
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV
approaches are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This
approach combines the LNAV/VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical
Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV approaches allow lower approach minimums.
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path)
guidance capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved
instrument approaches to an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
WHAT IS RAIM AND HOW DOES IT AFFECT APPROACH OPERATIONS?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver
function that performs the following functions:
•
Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
•
Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a
certain phase of flight
•
Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available
satellites is sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach
does not become active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message
and the LOI annunciation flagging on the HSI.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
533
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six
satellites is required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation
solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a
specified protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for
non-precision approaches). The system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM
is not available (see Appendix A). Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If
RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.
WHY MIGHT THERE BE NO APPROACHES AVAILABLE FOR A FLIGHT PLAN?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in
mind some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does
not have a published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN AN APPROACH IS SELECTED? CAN A FLIGHT PLAN WITH AN
APPROACH, A DEPARTURE, OR AN ARRIVAL BE STORED?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing
the title of the selected instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan
remains active, unless the instrument procedure is activated. This may be done either when the
procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note the active flight
plan is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when
another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the
waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the
information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an approach, departure, or
arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is
deleted from the flight plan.
CAN “SLANT GOLF” (“/G”) BE FILED USING THE SYSTEM?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database.
See the approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual
(AIM) for more information.
WHAT DOES THE OBS SOFTKEY DO?
534
Normal (OBS not activated)
OBS
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
• Manual course change on HSI not
possible
• Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX D
Normal (OBS not activated)
OBS
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active
waypoint
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final
approach course
• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets
the current active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from
sequencing to the next waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic
waypoint sequencing is continued, and the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the
flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present active waypoint.
WHY MIGHT THE SYSTEM NOT AUTOMATICALLY SEQUENCE TO THE NEXT WAYPOINT?
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no
‘OBS’ or ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must
also cross the bisector of the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the
waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an equal angle from each leg.
WHEN DOES TURN ANTICIPATION BEGIN?
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability
to roll up to 30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
•
A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the
PFD 10 seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
•
A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds
before the turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next
[DTK/HDG] to ###° now’ is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS
mode) automatically sequences to the next DTK or HDG value.
•
The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate the midpoint of the turn has
been crossed.
WHEN DOES THE CDI SCALE CHANGE?
Once a departure is activated, the system Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is
set to 0.3 nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm
(enroute mode) at 30 nm from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI
scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF
during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions down further based on the type of approach
activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is activated, the CDI is set to 0.3
nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
WHY DOES THE HSI NOT RESPOND LIKE A VOR WHEN OBS MODE IS ACTIVE?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the
desired course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on
the GPS is constant regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive
when further away from the destination.
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
535
APPENDIX D
HOW DO I ACTIVATE A MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURE?
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP.
The first waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP
Button is selected after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be
followed, as indicated on the published approach.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), touch the
PROC Button on the Home Screen or the Active Flight Plan Screen. Touch the Activate Missed
Approach Button to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
AFTER A MISSED APPROACH, HOW CAN THE SAME APPROACH BE RE-SELECTED? HOW
CAN A NEW APPROACH BE ACTIVATED?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed
approach point (MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you
want to discontinue the current approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the
transition waypoint and does not take into consideration any missed approach procedures, if
the current approach is reactivated.
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for
another attempt by touching the PROC Button on the Home Screen, followed by the Activate
Approach Button. The system provides navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and
rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by touching the PROC
Button, then touch the Approach Button to access the Approach Selection Screen. Then touch the
Approach Button. The Touchscreen Controller displays a list of approaches as buttons. Scroll as
needed and touch the desired approach button, then touch a transition button. The Touchscreen
Controller returns to the Approach Selection Screen. To activate the selected approach, touch the
Load & Activate Button.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, touch the Direct To Button to access the Direct
To Screen. Then touch the waypoint point and enter the desired airport using the keypad or large
and small right knobs. Touch the Enter Button or push the Right Knob to accept the selected
airport, then follow the steps in the preceding paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
536
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
APPENDIX E
MAP SYMBOLS
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Map Pointer (when panning)
Measuring Pointer
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Displayed when aircraft GPS location is valid, but heading is invalid.
Top of Descent (TOD)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
190–02339–00 Rev. C
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
537
APPENDIX E
BLANK PAGE
538
Garmin G1000H NXi Pilot's Guide for the Bell 407GXi
190–02339–00 Rev. C
INDEX
A
Active Frequency
COM...............................................................124
NAV........................................................ 120, 131
ADS-B........................................................ 137, 408
ADS-B TX........................................................... 141
ADS-R................................................................ 409
Air Data Failure.................................................... 13
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference System
(ADAHRS)
Normal Operation............................................. 11
Troubleshooting................................................ 11
Aircraft Total Air Time Display.............................111
Airport
Information Page.............................................184
Information Window....................................... 188
Nearest........................................................... 188
Nearest Airport Information on MFD................190
Nearest Airport Information on PFD................. 189
Select & Review by ID, name, or location......... 187
Viewing Destination........................................ 188
Viewing Runway Information.......................... 190
Airspace............................................................. 205
Alerts/Messages.............................................. 208
Changing altitude buffer distance................... 208
Reviewing Information.................................... 169
Selecting and Viewing Alert Information..........209
Smart Airspace................................................ 209
Turning On or Off Alert................................... 208
Turning Smart Airspace On/Off........................ 209
Airway............................................................... 177
Adding to Flight Plan.......................................229
Collapsing....................................................... 250
Displaying and Removing................................ 178
In Stored Flight Plan........................................ 231
Selecting Range...............................................179
Along Track Offset..............................................244
Entering Offset Distance.................................. 245
Alternate Engine Data Source Annunciations......108
Altitude Constraint
Chart.............................................................. 260
Deleting a Manual Entry.................................. 262
Deleting Database-Generated..........................262
Entering/Modifying..........................................261
Invalid Causes................................................. 261
Modifying system calculated............................262
Pencil Icon (Manual Entry)............................... 260
Reverting Manual back to Original...................262
Altitude Intercept Arc......................................... 180
Annunciations........................................................ 9
Power Up............................................................ 7
Test Tone........................................................... 11
Approach................................................... 235, 273
Activating a Loaded With Vectors to Final........278
Activating a Previously Loaded.........................278
Loading Into Active FP Using PROC Key........... 276
Removing from Active FP.................................277
Service Levels.................................................. 274
Arrival........................................................ 233, 271
Alerts................................................................ 42
Loading into Active FP with PROC Key.............273
Removing from Active FP.................................273
Audio Panel........................................................119
Controls.......................................................... 121
Fail-Safe Operation..........................................158
Preflight.......................................................... 157
Auto-Designation............................................... 259
Automatic Squelch............................................. 124
Auto-Tuning
COM...............................................125, 126, 127
NAV........................................................ 132, 134
Autozoom..........................................................166
B
Backlighting......................................................... 49
Blue-Select Mode............................................... 145
Bluetooth........................................... 122, 123, 155
C
Charts
Split Screen..................................................... 248
Clearance Recorder and Player........................... 147
COM Frequency Box...................................120, 124
COM Tuning Failure............................................158
Command Bar Format
Command Bar Format....................................... 56
Crew Alerting System (CAS)............................... 481
Advisory Messages.......................................... 484
CAS Message Prioritization..............................482
Caution Messages........................................... 483
Display Inhibits................................................ 482
Status Messages..............................................485
Warning Messages.......................................... 482
I-1
INDEX
Crew Profile......................................................... 33
Creating............................................................ 34
Deleting............................................................ 38
Exporting to SD Card.........................................39
Import/Export Messages.................................... 34
Importing from SD Card.................................... 38
Renaming..........................................................37
Selecting an Active Profile..................................35
Cyclic Centering Annunciation........................... 108
D
Databases
Information......................................................... 7
Status................................................................11
Updating from any MFD Page......................... 506
Updating from the Aux - Databases Page........ 509
Updating Using an SD Card..................... 502, 503
Updating Using Flight Stream 510................... 506
Date/Time Settings............................................... 40
Dead Reckoning Mode....................................... 294
Departure...........................................................269
Loading Into Active FP using PROC Key........... 270
Removing from Active FP.................................271
Direct-To
Cancelling....................................................... 214
Manual Course Selection.................................213
Navigation.......................................................210
Using the Pointer.............................................213
Vertical............................................................214
Direct-To Destination
Entering waypoint, facility, or city.................... 211
Selecting Active Flight Plan Waypoint.............. 212
Selecting Nearest, Recent, or User Waypoint....212
Display Units........................................................ 41
DME Pairing....................................................... 136
DME Tuning....................................................... 135
Dual Tachometer................................................ 108
E
Emergency Frequency.................................121, 158
Engine Indicating System (EIS) Display.................105
Engine Page....................................................... 110
Entertainment.................................................... 122
F
FADEC................................................................108
Field of View...................................................... 181
Flight ID............................................................. 137
I-2
Flight Plan
Activating Leg................................................. 242
Activating Pending.......................................... 224
Activating Stored on MFD............................... 238
Active..............................................................241
Adding Airway................................................ 231
Adding Waypoint to Active..............................226
Changing View............................................... 248
Closest Point................................................... 251
Closest Point in Active FP to a WPT..................251
Collapsing/Expanding Airways in Active...........251
Creating Active............................................... 217
Creating/Adding User Waypoints to Active...... 227
Creation.......................................................... 216
Deleting Active................................................242
Deleting Airway from Active............................ 243
Deleting All Pending........................................225
Deleting Pending.............................................224
Deleting Procedure from Active....................... 243
Deleting Waypoint from Active........................242
Ignore Pending Transfer from Wireless............. 223
Import/Export Messages.................................. 219
Inverting Active............................................... 242
Inverting/Activating Stored on MFD................. 238
Leg Symbols.................................................... 215
Narrow/Wide Views.........................................248
Previewing Pending Transfer from Wireless...... 223
Stored............................................................. 237
Storing Active from Page or Window...............237
Storing Pending...............................................223
Transfers..........................................................221
Frequency Spacing..................................... 125, 129
Fuel Range Ring................................................. 180
G
GDU 1050H........................................................... 1
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Dead Reckoning Mode.................................... 294
Failure............................................................... 12
Normal Operation............................................. 13
Status................................................................15
GTS 800.............................................................395
INDEX
H
Holding
Creating User-Defined at Active FP WPT.......... 254
Creating User-Defined at Direct-To WPT...........255
Creating User-Defined at Present Position........ 254
Exiting Active FP User-Defined Hold................. 256
Removing Active FP User-Defined Hold............ 256
Removing Off-Route User-Defined Hold...........256
User-Defined................................................... 251
Hover Performance.............................................112
Power Check, Pre-Flight (IGE).......................... 116
Power Check, Pre-Flight (OGE).........................115
Power Check, Real Time (IGE)..........................114
Power Check, Real Time (OGE)........................ 114
HSI Double Green Arrow.................................... 131
HSI Single Green Arrow...................................... 131
HSI Single Magenta Arrow................................. 131
I
IDENT Function...................................................142
Intercom.................................................... 122, 143
Intercom Modes................................................. 144
Intersection........................................................ 191
Selection......................................................... 192
L
Line Replaceable Units (LRU)...................................1
Configuration......................................................3
Failure................................................................. 9
Optional Equipment............................................ 2
Status................................................................11
M
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update..........512
Magnetometer Failure.......................................... 13
Manual Tuning
COM...............................................................125
NAV................................................................ 131
Map
Airspace Symbols............................................ 174
Airway Symbols...............................................178
Autozoom.......................................................166
Aviation Symbols............................................. 174
Declutter......................................................... 176
Land Symbols.................................................. 174
Orientation......................................................163
Range............................................................. 165
Ranges............................................................ 159
Symbol Setup.................................................. 175
Marker Beacon...........................................121, 135
Menus..................................................................28
Missed Approach............................................... 278
Activating in Active FP..................................... 279
Morse Code Identifier.........................................130
Multi Function Display (MFD)..................................1
Backlighting...................................................... 49
Controls.............................................................. 4
Navigation Map...............................................161
Page Groups..................................................... 29
Power Up............................................................ 7
Softkeys............................................................ 25
N
NAV Frequency Box............................ 120, 130, 131
NAV Radio Selection...........................................131
Navigation
Dead Reckoning Mode.................................... 294
Navigation Data Bar........................................... 162
Changing a Field............................................. 162
Navigation Map
Auto North Up................................................ 165
Changing Orientation......................................165
Configuring Automatic Zoom..........................167
Decluttering.................................................... 177
Measuring Bearing/Distance............................ 169
Panning...........................................................169
Setting Topographic Display.............................172
Setting up Additional Group Items.................. 181
Setting up Land, Aviation or Airspace.............. 175
Topography..................................................... 170
Navigation Status Box.........................................161
Nearest
Airport............................................................ 188
Non-Directional Beacon (NDB)............................ 192
Selection......................................................... 194
Normal Operating Mode........................................ 8
P
Page Groups
Multi Function Display (MFD).............................29
Parallel Track...................................................... 245
Activating........................................................247
Cancelling....................................................... 247
Passenger Address..............................................123
Power Assurance Check..................................... 111
Power Situation Indicator................................... 107
I-3
INDEX
Primary Flight Display (PFD).....................................1
Backlighting...................................................... 49
Controls.............................................................. 4
HSI Map.......................................................... 160
Inset Map........................................................160
Map................................................................ 159
Map Decluttering............................................ 177
Power Up............................................................ 7
Setting Topographic Display.............................172
Softkeys............................................................ 19
Procedure Loading
Available Procedures at Airport........................268
Into Active FP from Information Page...............269
Procedure Pages................................................... 32
Procedures......................................................... 267
Q
Quiet Mode........................................................108
R
RAIM
FDE Prediction Tool............................................ 15
Predicting at Present Position.............................16
Predicting at Waypoint...................................... 16
Prediction.......................................................... 15
Reversionary Mode.................................................8
Runway
Selection......................................................... 187
RX Indicator....................................................... 125
S
Satellite
Constellation.....................................................14
Signal Strength..................................................17
Status................................................................14
Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
Disabling........................................................... 17
Selecting........................................................... 17
Scheduler............................................................. 47
Deleting a Message........................................... 48
Entering a Message........................................... 47
Secure Digital (SD) Cards........................................ 6
Settings, System................................................... 32
Smart Airspace................................................... 209
Softkeys
First-Level PFD Configuration.............................19
Function............................................................19
Multi Function Display (MFD).............................25
Primary Flight Display (PFD)................................19
Split COM Operation..........................................147
I-4
Split Screen........................................................ 248
Enabling/Disabling.............................................37
Functionality......................................................35
Split-PA Mode.................................................... 143
Standby Frequency
COM.......................................................120, 124
NAV........................................................ 120, 131
Stormscope........................................................ 364
Stuck Microphone.............................................. 158
System Message Annunciations..........................486
System Utilities..................................................... 44
T
TA
Alerting Conditions......................................... 398
Takeoff Timer..................................................... 108
TAS
Alerts.............................................................. 399
Surveillance Volume and Symbology................396
Theory of Operation........................................ 395
Telephone.......................................................... 122
Temperature Compensation Altitude.................. 279
Cancelling....................................................... 281
Manually Activating.........................................280
Three Dimensional (3D) Audio............................ 148
Time/Date Settings............................................... 40
Timers.................................................................. 45
Setting Generic................................................. 45
TIS-B.................................................................. 409
Track Vector....................................................... 179
Transponder....................................................... 137
Transponder Code Entry..................................... 140
Transponder Data Box........................................ 121
Transponder Mode Selection...................... 137, 140
Trip Planning...................................................... 290
Fuel Statistics...................................................291
Other Statistics................................................ 292
Trip Statistics................................................ 46, 291
Calculations via Manual Data Entry..................293
Selecting Automatic or Manual Page Mode..... 293
Selecting Flight Plan and Leg........................... 293
Selecting Flight Plan or Waypoint Mode...........293
TX Indicator........................................................125
U
Unit Settings........................................................ 41
INDEX
User Waypoint................................................... 198
Creating from Information Page...................... 200
Creating from Map Pages................................201
Editing............................................................ 202
Selection......................................................... 200
Utilities.................................................................44
V
Vertical Navigation
Waypoint Manual Designation.........................260
Vertical Navigation (VNV)....................................257
Activating Direct-To......................................... 258
Altitude Constraints........................................ 259
Enabling/Disabling Guidance........................... 258
Entering Along-Track Offset for WPT............... 214
Modifying VS TGT and FPA.............................. 259
Removing Altitude Constraint..........................214
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)........................... 262
Disabling......................................................... 266
Enabling..........................................................265
Messages........................................................ 265
Modes.............................................................264
Width Swath................................................... 265
VFR Code........................................................... 140
VHF Omni-directional Range (VOR).....................194
Selection......................................................... 196
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)............................... 197
Selection......................................................... 198
Voice Alerts........................................................ 485
Voice Recognition...............................................150
VOR Selection.................................................... 131
W
Waypoint........................................................... 183
Adding to Flight Plan.......................................225
Fly-By/Over...................................................... 227
Information Window....................................... 183
Reviewing Information.................................... 169
Selecting for Waypoint Mode.......................... 293
Weight and Balance........................................... 282
Configuration..................................................285
Definitions.......................................................283
Warnings........................................................ 285
Wind Vector....................................................... 180
I-5
INDEX
BLANK PAGE
I-6
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising